Service Manual

Version A.1

This service manual includes the basic information about the KIP 3100 Multi-Function Printer, which is required during field service to properly maintain the product’s quality and reliability.

Chapter 1 Introduction

Overview (Features, specifications, name of parts and etc.) Installation requirements, method of installation, connection with PC & printer Explanation for the steps of the print and scan process Circuit diagrams, image process system, electric parts location and etc. Parts replacement and mechanical disassembly Field maintenance information Problem resolution Service Mode settings, Diagnosis and etc.

Chapter 2 Installation

Chapter 3 Print / Scan Process

Chapter 4 Electrical

Chapter 5 Mechanical

Chapter 6 Maintenance Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 8 Service Mode and Utility Software

Some of the information included in this manual may be changed by product upgrades. Such information will be informed to you through Technical Bulletins or Engineering Change Orders. Read this service manual and these TBs / ECOs to understand the KIP 3100 correctly.

All sections of the document are subject to change without notice.

Chapter 1 Introduction
1. 1 Features page 1- 2 111111113 3 4 5 6 6 6 6

1. 2 Specifications 1. 2. 1 General 1. 2. 2 Printer part 1. 2. 3 Scanner part 1. 3 Specifications for Originals 1. 3. 1 Original - Standard 1. 3. 2 Special Documents 1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals 1. 4 Appearance 1. 4. 1 Front view 1. 4. 2 Rear view 1. 5 Specifications for the Scan Original

1- 7 1- 7 1- 8 1- 9 1-12 1-12 1-13 1-14

1. 6 Specifications for the Printing Paper 1. 6. 1 Improper Printing Paper 1. 6. 2 Proper Care of Printing Paper 1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition

1-1

K116sm1e1

1. 1

Features

The KIP 3100 is a single footprint Multi-Function Printer which can copy, scan and print. Advanced drivers and comprehensive print utilities make the KIP 3100 an advanced, easy to use system. Some of these features may be optional. The scan and print speeds are up to 80mm/sec or up to 5 “D” size prints / minute (landscape). KIP HDP technology generates no waste toner. The combination of the KIP HDP Plus imaging system with mono-component minute toner produces high definition lines, distinctive greyscale and consistent blacks. The maximum paper width is 36” (914mm) wide, and the minimum is 11” (279mm) wide. The maximum paper length is 19.7ft (6m) with 36” paper, and the minimum is 8.5” (210mm). Up to 600dpi print and scan resolutions, with an advanced Image Process System, produces the highest quality images. Copier Features • Easy Touch screen control panel • Collated Sets copying • Real-time image preview • Recall/reprint previous jobs • 600x600DPI copy quality • Integrated Accounting and Reports for all copying, network printing, scanning • Network ready copier • Simple Operator assistance for every day tasks (toner replacement procedure) • Image stamping • All hardware/software included for instant upgrade from Digital Copier to Network Printer to Scan-to-File system. • Information center displays all support information, meter readings, and serial number. Network Printer Features (Optional) • Standard TCP/IP connectivity • Direct support for vector file formats: HPGL1/2, HP-RTL, Calcomp 906/907 • KIP 3100 DWF format support • Direct support for raster file formats: TIF Group 3/4, Cals Group 4, Uncompressed Grayscale/Color TIF, • Optional KIP 3100 PDF format support: PS/PDF file format. • Standard Windows Driver for KIP Script (PS output) and KIP-GL (HPGL/2,RTL output) • Standard AutoCAD Drivers • Unlimited site license of KIP Request allows users to group supported formats together for printing collated sets. • Integrated Accounting in all KIP Drivers/Request for all network printing. • Integrated KIP 3100 Web Printing (web server) • Open architecture ASCII Job Ticket for third party applications Scan-to-File Features • Scan directly to PDF, TIF Group 4, Cals Group 4 • Scan to file to FTP or personal inbox on the KIP 3100 • Selected resolution – up to 600 DPI optical • Automatic original size recognition • Retrieve scanned image files with KIP Request

1-2

K116sm1e1

1. 2
1. 2. 1

Specifications
General
Specification KIP 3100 Console 1,500W (Including Scanner & IPS) 44W or less Idling Max. 60db Printing Max. 65db Impulse sound Max. 70db Max. 0.05ppm (Measurement method under UL Standard) 1266mm (Width) x 600mm (Depth) x 1100mm (Height) 50”w x 24”d x 44”h (UI is not included) About 219kg or 485 lbs (1 roll) About 230kg or 510 lbs (2 roll) (Temperature) 10 to 32 degrees Centigrade 50 to 85 Fahrenheit (Humidity) 20 to 85% RH Network Interface (10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX) In the US : 120V plus/minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 12A In Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 7A

Subject Model Configuration Power consumption (Maximum) Power consumption (Low power mode) Acoustic noise

Ozone Dimensions Weight Environmental condition for usage

Interface Input power

NOTE
The above specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-3

K116sm1e1

1. 2. 2.

Printer part
Specification LED Array Electro photography Organic Photoconductive Drum 80mm per second (Metric) (Inch) 6 / D Landscape LED Array 600dpi x 600dpi Maximum 914mm or 36” Minimum 279mm or 11” (Roll paper) 210mm or 8.5” (Cut sheet paper) Maximum (Standard) 6m or 19.7 ft (Option) 24m or 75 ft Minimum 210mm or 8.5”

Subject Printing method Photoreceptor Print speed

Print head Resolution of print head Print width

Print length

NOTE
If the print is longer than 6m, its image quality or the reliability of the paper feeding systems are not guaranteed. Warm up time First print time Fusing method Development method Media Shorter than 4 minutes 30 seconds (At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, and plain paper is used) 18 seconds (D Landscape) (At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, and plain paper is used) Heat and Pressure Rollers Dry type non-magnetic mono-component toner (Recommended Media) Plain Paper 18 – 24lbs Tracing Paper 18 – 20lbs Film 4MIL Recommend media for electro-photography process (Toner cartridge) Store the cartridge within the temperature range from 0 to 35 degrees Centigrade (32 to 95 degrees Fahrenheit) and within the humidity range from 35 to 85% RH.

Storage of consumables

NOTE
The above specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-4

K116sm1e1

1. 2. 3

Scanner part
Specification Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (5 pieces of A4 or 8.5” sized CIS) LED (R/G/B) Face up Center Max: 914.4mm or 36” Min : 210.0mm or 8.5” Max: 24m or 75 ft (Including the margin area) Min : 210mm or 8.5” (Including the margin area) 3mm from leading, trailing and both side edges 600dpi 200 / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi Sheet through type Max: 1.60mm Min : 0.05mm 65mm per second

Subject Scanning method Light source Setting of original Starting point of scan Scan width Scan length Margin area Optical resolution Digital resolution Original transportation Transportable original thickness Scanning speed

NOTE
The above specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-5

K116sm1e1

1. 3
1. 3. 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

Specifications for Originals
Original Standards

The width of original must range from 8.5” to 36” or 210mm to 914.4mm. The length of original must range from 8.5” to 75 ft or 210mm to 24,000mm. The thickness of original must range from 0.05mm to 0.65mm (Max 1.60mm). The shape of original must be square, and it must be standard sized. The type of original must belong to any of the followings. Plain paper Coated paper (High or middle class plain paper is coated with the paint.) Tracing paper Pansy Trace Paper (Both sides of the film is sandwiched between Tracing paper.) Film Newspaper Cardboard paper

1. 3. 2

Special Documents

The following kinds of originals are “special”. It is possible to scan them, but the image quality and feed reliability are not guaranteed. (1) These types of originals are acceptable, but the thickness may not be: Booklets Originals with a Hanger Cut and Pasted originals (2) These originals may not damage the scanner, but these types are NOT recommended: Cloth Aluminium Kent Paper

1. 3. 3
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

“Do Not Scan” Originals

Do not use the following types of originals because they are likely to damage the scanner. Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage) Slippery originals which is difficult to transport Irregularly shaped originals (Not square in shape) Extremely curled originals (Diameter of curl is less than 50mm) Extremely creased originals Torn originals

1-6

K116sm1e1

1. 4
1. 4. 1

Appearance
Front view
7 6 5 4 3 13

8 2

9 1

10

11

12

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Name Main Switch Original Guides User Interface Emergent Stop Button Original Tray Scanner Unit Toner Hatch (Original Table) Engine Unit Open Lever Bypass Feeder Roll Deck

8 9 10

11 12 13

Print Tray Counter Stylus

Function You can turn on/off the KIP 3100. Feed the original under the Scanner Unit along the Original Guides. This is a Touch Screen, and many kinds of user operation are available. Press this button when you would like to stop copying or scanning in an emergency. These trays catch the original ejected from the Scanner Unit. This unit reads the original when you make a scan or copy. Open the Toner Hatch when you replace the Toner Cartridge. Also put the original here and then feed it into the Scanner Unit when you make scan or copy. Pull up these levers when you open the Engine Unit. Feed a cut sheet paper from the Bypass Feeder. Roll paper can be set here. (You can set 1 roll paper normally, but 2 rolls of paper are available if you install the optional 2nd Roll Deck.) Prints are stacked here after the ejection. It counts the total amount of printing. Use this to press buttons on the touch screen. 1-7
K116sm1e1

1. 4. 2

Rear view

7 8 2 3

1

4

5

6

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Name Exit Cover LAN Port Dehumidify Heater Switch (Optional in the US) Breaker Inlet Socket Print Guide Trays COM Port (Optional) USB Port

Function Open the Exit Cover when you remove the paper misfed inside the Fuser Unit. Connect the LAN Cable to connect the KIP 3100 to the network. (Do not connect a telephone line) Turn on the Dehumidify Heater with this switch when you would like to dry the paper during the humid season. It is possible to shut off the supplied AC power. Connect the Power Cord here. These trays guide the prints to the Print Tray. Connect the cable from the Optional Device. (D-Sub Connector 9 pins: 12VDC max.) 5VDC max.

1-8

K116sm1e1

1. 5

Specifications for the Scan Original
0.05mm to 1.6mm 210.0mm to 914.4mm (8.5” to 36”) 210mm to 24,000mm (8.5” to 75ft)

A scan original must satisfy the following specifications. Thickness Width Length

Do not scan the following kinds of original, because you may damage the original or scanner itself! Stuck with paste Paste

Torn

Folded (Leading edge)

Excessively curled (a diameter of 50 mm or less)

1-9

K116sm1e1

Not square

KIP

KIP

Wet

Wet Metal or fabric material Metal Fabric

KIP

KIP

Rough surface (Carbon paper for example)

Rough surface

Clipped or stapled

Clipped

Stapled

KIP

KIP

1-10

K116sm1e1

The following kinds of originals can be read with using a carrier sheet. Image quality or the reliability of paper feeding for them is not guaranteed. Patched

Punched

1-11

K116sm1e1

6. 1 Specifications for the Printing Paper Improper Printing Paper Do not use the following kinds of printing paper because you may damage the print engine! Excessively curled (a diameter of 50 mm or less) Folded Creased Torn Punched 1-12 K116sm1e1 .1. 6 1.

2. 6.Extremely slippery Extremely sticky Extremely thin and soft Extremely slippery OHP Film CAUTION Do not use paper with staples. 1. carbon paper and conductive paper. 1-13 K116sm1e1 . 3. Proper Care of Printing Paper Follow these steps in taking care of your printing paper. Removing one round from the beginning of the roll surface of the tracing paper is recommended. Keep the paper away from high humidity. (3) It will become a cause for paper mis-feed. aluminium foil. NOTE (1) Print image may become light if printed on a rough surface of the paper. (It must be less than 70%) Put the paper on a flat place Place unused paper back into its original polyethylene bag to avoid the humidity. (5) Tracing paper exposed to air over a long period tends to cause defective printing. 2 1. defective print image or crease of paper if you use a paper that does not satisfy the specification. 4. such as thermal paper. (2) Print image may become defective if the print paper has an excessive curl. art paper. Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight. and do not use conductive paper such as aluminium foil and carbon paper. (4) Do not use a paper of which surface is very special. The use of these materials may cause a fire.

40% 70% “Void of image” occurs when you print with plain paper and tracing paper.1. Install the humidifier in the room. Shown below are necessary treatments according to the environmental conditions. Turn on the Dehumidify Heater. 6. Normal Print Loss of image If the media is humidified . remove the tracing paper from the machine and keep it in a polyethylene bag. (2) “Void of image” and “crease of paper” will occur in case of extremely high or low humidity. “crease of paper” and other problems occurs when you print with plain paper and tracing paper. High NOTE (1) KIP 3100 is equipped with the Dehumidify Heater (optional in U. 2. Low “Void of image” occurs when you print with tracing paper.) Using it in high humidity environment (65% or higher) is recommended. 1. and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Remove the paper from the machine right after the completion of the print. and keep it in a polyethylene bag. and keep it in a polyethylene bag. and humidify the room air.S. Remove the paper from the machine right after the completion of the print. 1-14 K116sm1e1 .A. If you will not make print soon. “Void of image”. “crease of paper” and other problems occurs when you print with plain paper and tracing paper. Remove the paper from the machine after everyday use. If you will not make print soon. 3 Humidity(%) Treatment against environmental condition Possible problem “Void of image”.(if installed) 2. remove the tracing paper from the machine and keep it in a polyethylene bag. Necessary treatment 1. Normal Print Crease of paper If the media is humidified .

1 Unpacking 2.Chapter 2 Installation The machine had passed our strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory.3 2. Install the machine in a good environmental place in a correct way. 4 2. 2 Unpacking 2. and then check that it works perfectly. 2 Scanner Calibration 2-1 K116sm2e1 . 1. 8. 1 Installation Requirements Page 2.2 2. 8. Installation is an important work to make the machine work at customer’s site as same as it has passed our strict inspection before shipment.6 2-13 2-17 2-18 2-36 2-45 2-47 2-47 2-47 2-51 2-54 2. 6 2. 7 Leveling the KIP 3100 Setup of the Roll Deck Setup of the Machine Installation of Accessories Turning on the KIP 3100 2. 8. 2 Confirmation of Accessories 2. 8. 1.3 2. 5 2. and then it was packaged and shipped. 1 Installation 2. 8 Initializing the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit 2. A service engineer has to understand machine’s function very well. 3 2. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility 2. 1 Installing USB Driver 2. 2.

The following conditions are required for the installation of the equipment. although the quantity generated is within all safe levels. if so required. 1 Installation Requirements 1. 10A or higher 2. dust or ammonia gases. The equipment must not be exposed to the air vents from heating/cooling systems. The outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. 2.) The floor must be level and the strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the equipment. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet. Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation. Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use. The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible. 3. Site Environmental Conditions Temperature Range 10 C to 32 C 50 F to 89. The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit. Please draw curtains to block any sunlight. 50/60Hz. The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight. 3.A: 120V +/-10%. (Refer to the following figure.S. Power source should be rated as: U. boilers.2. (see certifications) Ventilate the room. 50/60Hz. 1. do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to strong (intense) light as this will damage the Drum. (Rear) 60cm/24” or larger when the standard tray is installed KIP 3100 45cm/18” or wider (Front) 45cm/18” or wider 80cm/32” or larger 2-2 K116sm2e1 . The installation site must not have any open flames. When you open the printer (Upper Half). 15A or higher Europe and Asia: 220-240V+6% or -10%. 2.6 F Humidity Range 15% to 85% RH. 1. (NON CONDENSING) Keep the printer away from water sources. humidifiers or refrigerators.

2 Unpacking 2. 5 4. 1 Unpacking 1. and move it to the installation place. 3 3 4 3. 2. Remove the inner cardboard cases (5). Please note that and Software Box will be included in the crate. Cut the bands (1) and remove the top board (2). Remove pads (3) and the outer cardboard box (4). Unwrap the machine. Remove the wrapped machine with a forklift. DO NOT DISCARD THIS BOX.2. 7 6 2-3 K116sm2e1 . 2 1 1 2. Peel off the plastic bag (7). Open the front face (6) of the bottom board. OPEN THIS BOX FIRST. The Software box has the Software CD and other important installation notes and documents.

Startup Kit (9: Europe/Asia model only) and empty Drum Box (10).5. DO NOT DISCARD THESE ITEMS. 13 14 14 2-4 K116sm2e1 . DO NOT DISCARD THE BOX. Put aside each accessory box (8). Remove the scanner protection box (11) and the protection papers (12) around the machine. Put aside one more accessory box (13) and the protection mat under the Roll Deck. Remove the tapes (14) on Roll Deck. 8 10 9 11 12 6.

15 16 17 8. Remove the protection sheet (16) on the top rear of the machine. Put aside Shading Sheet (15) for the scanner adjustment.7. Remove the protection mat (14). Close the Scanner Unit. HANDLE WITH GREAT CARE. KEEP THE SHEET IN SAFE COSTODY FOR AVOIDING DAMAGE. 18 2-5 K116sm2e1 . DO NOT DISCARD THE SHEET. Open the Scanner Unit. Put aside the Power Cord (18) which is on the bottom plate of machine.

2.2. 2 Confirmation of Accessories Confirm the following parts are attached to the product. Item name Tray Picture Number of article 4 Drum Box ( empty ) 1 Guide 3 2 Tray 2 Assembly 2 2-6 K116sm2e1 .

Item name Guide 4 Picture Number of article 2 Original Guide 1 & 2 1 1 Power Cord 1 Monitor Assembly 1 2-7 K116sm2e1 .

Item name Arm Assembly Picture Number of article 1 Cover 3 1 Holder Assy 1 Stylus 1 2-8 K116sm2e1 .

Item name Plate 2 Picture Number of article 2 Arm 2 Arm 2 4 Guide 5 & 6 1 1 2-9 K116sm2e1 .

Item name Guide Sheets Picture Number of article 2 Developer Handle 1 Starting Toner (500g) (Europe/Asia model only) 1 Toner Cartridge (300g) (Europe/Asia model only) 2 2-10 K116sm2e1 .

Item name Shading Sheet Picture Number of article 1 Cap Assy 2 or 4 (2 for 1 Roll / 4 for 2 Rolls) 4x8 Tooth Washer Screws 4x6 Bind Screw (for Arm Assembly) 1 8 3x8 Bind Screws (for Guide 4) 4 2-11 K116sm2e1 .

Item name Setup Procedure Picture Number of article 1 User CD (Operator manual) (Europe/Asia model only) 1 Hardcopy of User’s Manual (German) (Europe/Asia model only) 1 2-12 K116sm2e1 .

Remove the screws (2) at both sides. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine.2. 1 2. 3 3 2-13 K116sm2e1 . 3 Leveling the KIP 3100 1. Remove 4 screws (3) at the bottom of both sides. 2 2 3.

4. 2-14 K116sm2e1 . Remove 5 screws (4) at the back on both sides. 5 6 7. Remove the Cover 2 (5) and the Cover 3 (6). (3 pieces on the left and 2 pieces on the right) 4 4 6. Close the Engine Unit.

) 85mm 7 NOTE Do not rotate the Levelling Bolts too much. Rotate 4 Leveling Bolts (7) on the bottom of the KIP 3100 with a wrench to bring up the KIP 3100 from the floor. the Adjuster Bolt may be removed. (It is about 80mm before the adjustment. 2-15 K116sm2e1 . If the distance between the bottom plate and the floor becomes wider than 95mm. Keep 85mm of distance between the bottom plate and the floor.8.

9. Front Rear 8 8 Right Left 8 8 2-16 K116sm2e1 . If not leveled. adjust by rotating the Adjustment Bolts. Put a level (8) on the specified positions shown to check the level of the KIP 3100.

4 Setup of the Roll Deck 1. Remove the tapes (2) from Roll Deck. Close the Roll Deck. 2 2 2 3. 1 2. 2-17 K116sm2e1 . Open the Roll Deck (1).2.

Carefully remove the protection mat (2) under the Drum. 1 2.2. 5 Setup of the Machine 1. 2 3. Pull up on the Levers (1) to open the Engine. 3 2-18 K116sm2e2 . Open the Cover 4 (3).

7 3 2-19 K116sm2e2 . Remove the screws (4) and flat washers (5) to release the Bands (6) at both sides. Rotate up the Pins (7) and move them to the inside to pull them out from the holes. Remove the Cover 4 (3). 6 6 4 5 5.4.

Open the Developer Press Unit (10). 8 7.6. Open the Bypass Feeder (8). 9 9 8. 10 8 2-20 K116sm2e2 . Remove 4 pieces of screw (9). Close the Bypass Feeder (8).

slide the Developer Unit (13) out of the machine. which protect the Developer Unit from vibration during transportation. 14 2-21 K116sm2e2 .9. 13 12. (They are no longer required. Disconnect the connector (14). Holding both side plates firmly.) 12 12 11. 11 10. Disconnect the connector (11). Remove 2 pieces of red screw (12) at both sides of the Developer Unit.

16 15.) 18 2-22 K116sm2e2 . 17 17 16. Remove the Separator (17). and add the toner to the Developer Unit. Remove 4 screws (15).13. 15 15 14. (Please even out the toner in the Developer unit. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (18) well. Remove the Hopper Assembly (16).

gently place Separator (17) on the added toner. It will be placed unseated. Along the guide on the side plates. 17 17 to be placed along the guide NOTE (1) Be careful of the direction of Separator (17). 17 (2) Just put Separator (17) on the toner. Do not install it in the wrong direction. Do not push it completely at this time.17. Doing so may damage the plastic screwing sheets (19) on the 2 shafts Unseated 19 17 19 2-23 K116sm2e2 . Do not push it in.

Separator will sink in the toner. Otherwise the toner may spill out. Replace the Hopper Assembly (16) and connect the connector (14). (2) Make sure that Separator (17) completely sinks in position by a 1/2 or more rotation of Developer Handle. and gently turn Developer Handle (20). Wrong: Unseated Correct: Seated 17 17 19. 16 14 2-24 K116sm2e2 . Insert Developer Handle (20) to the shaft of Roller Developer. 20 20 NOTE (1) Slowly turn Developer Handle. the plastic screwing sheets may be damaged at the next step. If not in position.18. Turn Developer Handle (20) until Separator sinks in position.

21.20. Insert the Developer Handle (20) to the shaft of Roller Developer. 20 NOTE Do not install the Developer Unit at this time. 21 21 2-25 K116sm2e2 . and rotate the Roller Developer several times so that its surface is covered with the toner. The Photoconductive Drum is covered with a black sheet (21). Gently remove it pulling from the front. as it must be removed when you setup the Drum in the later procedure. The process unit and toner cover should be open.

Install the Developer Unit (13) to the machine. 24 2-26 K116sm2e2 . 22 23 After installing the Developer Unit to the machine. Connect the connector (11). but they may not be in gear with each other by just installing the Developer Unit to the machine.22. Both gears will be in gear by this way. rotate the Gear Helical 34T (24: instead of Gear Helical 20T) by hand from under the Engine Unit. 13 11 NOTE Both the Gear Helical 20T (22) on machine side and the Gear Helical 28T (23) on Developer Unit side must be in gear firmly with each other.

23. Close and fix the Developer Press Unit (10). Close the Engine Unit. and put back the Cover 4 (3). 2-27 K116sm2e3 . 3 10 24.

(See the former procedure 25. not to be damaged during the transportation. (1) The black sheet has been removed from the Drum. Both the LED Head and the Image Corona are locked with the screws (25) being separated from the Drum. 26.) Otherwise a proper distance can not be kept between LED Head and Drum.) (2) The Engine Unit is closed firmly. Loosen the screws (25) to unlock the Fixing Brackets (26) at both sides.25. Left side Right side 26 26 25 25 NOTE Please satisfy the following requirements before performing Step 25. Remove 4 screws (27) and loosen 4 screws (28) to remove Cover 15 (29) 27 29 28 2-28 K116sm2e3 . (See the former procedure 21. Pressing down the Fixing Brackets (26) firmly. tighten the screws (25).

30 31 30 28.27. Route the harness (33) and fit Bushing (32) to the original position (35). Remove Bushing (32) from the frame and insert it onto the harnesses (33) of Arm Assembly (34). 35 33 32 2-29 K116sm2e3 . Remove 5 screws (30) to remove Case 5 (31). 32 34 32 33 29.

Pass through the harness (33) to the Arm Cover (37). Do not pull out the harnesses (33) too much. 34 36 36 31. 100mm 2-30 K116sm2e3 . 37 33 NOTE Pull out the harnesses (33) from the bottom opening of Arm Assembly within about 100mm. Fix Arm Assembly (34) to the frame with 4-4x8 tooth washer screws (36). Otherwise a noise problem may occur.30.

32. monitor) and Power Supply Cable and the other is the external one such as LAN Cable. USB Relay Cable or Folder Cable (Option). These 2 kinds of cable must not be bundled with the same Wire Saddle because a noise problem may occur. One is the internal cable such as VGA Cable. not secured together Therefore bundle the internal cables only with the Wire Saddles (38) at this time. 38 33 38 39 33 39 33 NOTE There are 2 kinds of cable inside of the machine. Secure the harnesses (33) with the wire saddles (38). Fix it with 2-4x8 tooth washer screws (41) of accessory loose so that it can turn upward on the screws (41). 33. USB Cable (of the scanner. Attach Monitor Assembly (40) to Arm Assembly. 40 38 41 41 41 2-31 K116sm2e3 . Pass through the harnesses (33) to the square hole (39).

40 44 43 42 35. Install 2 more 4x8 tooth washer screws (45) of accessory to the screw holes. 45 45 41 41 45 41 Reference Monitor Assembly can be tilted up (in 5 degree maximum) by adjusting the location of the tooth washer screws (45). Lean Monitor Assembly (40) back. Power Supply Cable (43). Monitor USB Cable (44) to Monitor Assembly (40). Secure the screws (45) in the top of the holes on Monitor Assembly. 2-32 K116sm2e3 . Connect VGA Cable (42).34. Secure the screws (41) (45) to fix Monitor Assembly (40).

36. 46 37 37. Fix Arm Cover (37) with 1-4x6 bind screw (46) of accessory. 48 48 47 47 38. Secure Power Supply Cable (43) with wire saddles (49) and connect it to DC Power Supply (50). 49 50 49 43 2-33 K116sm2e3 . Secure Power Supply Cable (43) and Monitor USB Cable (44) with the wire saddles (48). Secure VGA Cable (42) with the outside wire saddles (47).

USB Relay Cable or Folder Cable. One is the internal cable such as VGA Cable. because the USB Cables are the great cause for a noise issue. LAN Cable. 53 44 51 42 2-34 K116sm2e3 . (4) Bundle only VGA Cable (42) with the wire saddle (51) besides USB connector of IPS. USB Cable (of the scanner. Connect Monitor USB Cable (44) and VGA cable (42) to the lower USB port and VGA port on IPS respectively. monitor) and Power Supply Cable. USB Relay Cable or Folder Cable (Option). Do not interchange the USB Cables. The upper one should be occupied by Scanner USB Cable (53). These 2 kinds of cable must not be bundled with the same Wire Saddle because a noise problem may occur if these cables are mixed. (2) Route the excess (52) of VGA Cable in the wire saddle. 42 51 44 NOTE There are 2 kinds of cable inside of the machine. The inside line (48) is for Power Supply Cable (43). Monitor USB Cable (44) and Scanner USB Cable.39. And another is the external one such as LAN Cable. Note that the outside line (47) is for VGA Cable (42). Secure VGA Cable (42) with 2 wire saddles (51). 48 52 (3) There are two USB ports under the network connector on IPS. Do not bundle USB Cable (44) (53) together at this time. (1) There are 6 wire saddles on PC Cover. Monitor USB Cable (44) is to be connected to the lower USB port.

40. Replace Case 5 (31) and Cover 15 (29). Remove 1 screw (56) on the lower left corner of the back of Monitor Assembly. 31 29 41. 54 42. Replace Cover 2 (54) and Cover 3 (55). 55 56 2-35 K116sm2e3 .

Attach Holder Assy (57) to the corner shown as follows and fix it the 3x14 bind screw (56) of accessory. 58 57 2-36 K116sm2e3 . Place the stylus (58) to the Holder Assy (57).43. 57 57 56 44.

Loosen 4 screws (3). Fit the Guide 1 & 2 (2) to the Cover 4. fit the Plate 2 (4) to the screws (3). 3 3 4 2-37 K116sm2e4 . 2. 6 Installation of Accessories 1 1. 2 3. Fit 2 Guide 3 (1) to the notches on the Cover 10. and tighten the screws (3).2.

Install 2 pieces of Arm (5). 5 5 2-38 K116sm2e4 .4.

) 6 7 8 6 2-39 K116sm2e4 . (Be careful of the direction of insertion. 6 7 8 6 NOTE Insert all Arm 2 (6).5. Guide 5 (8). Guide 6 (7). Guide 6 (7). Guide 5 (8) as the following photos. Install Arm 2 (6).

9 7. 8.6. 12 11 2-40 K116sm2e4 .4x6 Bind Screws (9). Fit 4 pieces of Tray (11) to the notches (12) on the back of the machine. Attach 2 Sheet Assembly (10) with 4x6 Bind Screws (9) you have removed at step 6. boss 10 NOTE Fit the positioning bosses on the Sheet Assembly to the positioning holes on machine side at this time. Remove 2 .

9. Put each Tray 2 Assembly (14) onto the slide rails (17) on machine side. 15 16 10. ISO (A/B) Pull out completely. and fix with 2 . 13 14 NOTE Insert the tip plate (15) of the Guide 4 (13) into the slit (16) of the Tray 2 Assembly (14). Engineering Push in completely. 17 17 14 NOTE Change the position of Tray 2 Assemblies (14) according to the format of printing paper. Architecture Align with the marking line. 2-41 K116sm2e4 .3x8 screws. Fit the Guides 4 (13) to the Tray 2 Assemblies (14).

18 12. Make sure that Lock Lever (20) correctly locks Toner Cartridge. Shake Toner Cartridge (19) several times. Open Cover 4 (18). locate the pin (21) on top of Toner Cartridge to the groove (22). Pressing Lock Lever (20). 19 13.11. 20 21 22 2-42 K116sm2e4 .

26 15. 18 2-43 K116sm2e4 . rotate Toner Cartridge body (23) in one revolution to the arrow direction so that the tab (24) goes into the notch (25). 24 23 25 NOTE It is not necessary for the cartridge bottom to be locked by the lever (26).14. To open the toner supply hole. Close Cover 4 (18). That will be done at the machine’s power on.

or you may receive an electrical shock. WARNING (1) Do not handle the Power Plug with wet hands. In U. Power Switch Press “ | “ side. (3) Do not plug the printer into a multi-wiring connector in which other devices are plugged. There is a Power Switch on the right side of KIP 3100. It may overheat the outlet and may result in a fire.A. 50/60Hz and 10A 2.2. Press its “ I ” side to turn on the KIP 3100. Plug the KIP 3100 into an exclusive wall outlet. (2) Make sure to earth the machine for safety. : 120V plus/minus 10%. 50/60Hz and 15A In Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%. 2-44 K116sm2e4 . (4) The outlet must satisfy the following conditions. 7 Turning on the KIP 3100 1.S.

The User Interface (UI) starts operating. You can make a copy. 2-45 K116sm2e4 . The Ready Indicator lights green when ready. and displays the following Copy Mode Screen in one minute. which flashes during warming up. scan (optional) or print (optional).3. There is a Ready Indicator in the Copy Mode Screen. 4. Ready Indicator Note: The screen shown with available options.

4 4 2-47 K116sm2e5 . remove 4 screws (2) to remove Cover 10 (3).2. • Windows 2000 / XP operating system • USB 2. Loosen 4 screws (1). 2 3 1 2. 8. 2. 1. and connect it to the USB Terminal to your service PC.0 support 2. Disconnect the USB Cable (4). the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit requires scanner adjustment for initialization. 1 Installing USB Driver 1. 1 Installation NOTE Below are the system requirements to operate KIP Scanner Utility. Initialize the KIP 3100 using KIP Scanner Utility. 8 Initializing the KIP 3100 Scanner Unit After the setup. 8. This provides a clearer and more accurate scan image.

5. Turn on both your PC and the KIP 3100. If the following message appears. 4. Click [Next]. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive. select your driver update option and click [Next]. 2-48 K116sm2e5 .3. [Found New Hardware Wizard] for “KIP K116” starts automatically. Choose “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”.

Click [Continue Anyway] when the following message is indicated. 7. Click [Finish] to close [Found New Hardware Wizard]. 2-49 K116sm2e5 .6.

2-50 K116sm2e5 .8. Open Device Manager. and confirm that “KIP K116” is operating properly.

EXE for KIP Scanner Utility. The destination of the software can be changed. 2. The Setup program starts. 3. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive Locate and run SETUP. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility 1.2. 8. Click [Next]. 2-51 K116sm2e5 . 1. Click [Next].

Click [Finish]. Click [Next]. 5.4. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. 2-52 K116sm2e5 . The name of the program folder can be changed.

Add the following text to the end of the target path. Open the properties panel for the “KIP Scanner Utility” shortcut on “Start” _”Program” _ “Scanner Utility” _ “Scanner Utility” 7.6. “(one byte space)/Maintenance” 2-53 K116sm2e5 .

2. 2. 1. 2 Scanner Calibration NOTE Scanner Calibration should be performed with “KIP Scanner Utility 1. Start KIP Scanner Utility by. “Start” _”Program” _ “ScannerUtility” _ “ScannerUtility” (KIP Scanner Utility’s initial screen) 2-54 K116sm2e5 .12 (or later)”. 8.0 Cable. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.

Select [All] and then click [Execute]. Select [Calibration] under [Adjust]. You will be asked to set the original.3. 4. 2-55 K116sm2e5 . At first it is required to calibrate all pixels.

It takes about 5 minutes to complete Shading adjustment. When finished scanning.5. and the scanner reads it. Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet. 7. 6. NOTE (1) It takes about 10 minutes to complete Shading adjustment. 2-56 K116sm2e5 . Set Shading Sheet in the KIP 3100 accessory to the scanner. (2) The scanner will be performed “white balance” (monochrome) and “Color” calibration at the same time with Shading Sheet. Reload Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [Confirm] to check the result of Shading. click [OK].

If the density is even at every place.8. check whether the density is even or not. Scan image of Shading Sheet 9. As this pixel is “defective”. it is necessary to calibrate it individually in the next step. finish Shading clicking [Close]. There may be some place of which density is different from others as the following image. The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed. Defective pixel 2-57 K116sm2e5 . Scrolling the image horizontally.

10. If you will calibrate an individual pixel. select [Specified part]. and you will find a kind of red cursor. red cross cursor defective pixel 2-58 K116sm2e5 .NOTE Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image. 11. This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks. Move the pointer onto the scan image.

13. 14. select them in the same way. Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it.12. 2-59 K116sm2e5 . If there are some more defective pixels. You will be asked to set the original again. When finished. Check the result of Shading again. Scanner Calibration (“white balance” / “color”) is completed. The defective pixel is selected by this operation. Match the vertical line to a defective pixel. click [Close]. Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK]. 15. Click [Execute]. and the selected “defective pixel” is compensated individually.

4 Development 3. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) 3. 1. 2 Positioning process of Image Block Page 3.2 3. 1 Data flow in scan and copy 3.5 3. 6 Separation 3. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of toner) 3. 2.7 3. 2. 2 Each step of the print process 3. 8 Fusing 3. 1 Print Process 3. 1. 3 Exposure 3.3 3. 1 Characteristic of toner 3. 2. 2. 5 Transfer 3. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit 3.6 3. 1. 2. 2. 2 Scan Process 3. 4 Toner Collection Process 3. 2. 2.8 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-17 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-1 K116sm3e1 . 2. 2 Charge of Drum 3. 1. 5 Density Compensation Process 3.Chapter 3 Print / Scan Process 3. 2.2 3. 1.

1. Lamps. 2. the toner moves onto the object B. it can be said that the object B is relatively “positive” and the object A is “negative”. Corona Units. Object A with low potential (Relatively negative) A A A Toner moves from A to B. or it is also possible to remove the toner from an unwanted place. the toner continues to stay on the object B because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other. Object A with low potential (Relatively negative) A A A Toner stays on B. and the situation is as follows. therefore. it is attracted to the object B that is more “positive”. are performed. Drum Cleaning and etc. (In another word. Even if you move the object A close to the object B. The KIP 3100 properly controls the electric potentials for each of the following components: Drum. which tends to be attracted to a more “positive” object. Toner Transfer. 3-2 K116sm3e1 . it is possible to move the toner from one place to another as we intend. object B is more “positive” than the object A. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A. Comparing the potential of both objects.3. Object B with high potential (Relatively positive) B B B On the contrary. If you move the object B close to the object A.) As the toner is “negative”. Toner exists on the object A. Object B with high potential (Relatively positive) B B B Thus. 1. The movement of toner is correctly controlled for each of the following processes: Development. Suppose that there are objects A and B. 1 3. suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher than the object A. Developer Unit and Cleaning Roller. If we control the electric potentials. 1 Print Process Characteristic of toner The toner used for the KIP 3100 has a characteristic to be charged “negative”. the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place with a higher potential.

8. 7. 5. Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) Charge of Drum Exposure Development Transfer Separation Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) Fusing LED Head Image Corona Eraser Lamp Regulation Roller Grid Plate Cleaning Roller Fuser Roller Density Sensor Toner Supply Roller Developer Roller Transfer Corona Separation Lamp Separation Corona & Pressure Roller 3-3 K116sm3e1 . 3. 1. 6. 2 1. 4. Each step of print process One cycle of print consists of the following 8 processes.3. 2.

1.05mA AC (5.0KV) + DC (-250V +/-5V) +450V +/-5V Voltage during Toner Collection Process +350V +/-5V -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias 0V (Connected to the ground) The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias -550V +/-5V Reference When the printer is going to stop after printing. Refer to [3. +700V +600V +500V +400V +300V +200V +100V 0V -100V -200V -300V -400V -500V -600V -700V 2 SP2 1 6 3 4 1 SP1 5 7 Voltage of Transfer Corona Voltage of Cleaning Roller Voltage of Developer Roller Surface Potential of Drum SP1 : For black image / SP2 : For white image Name of part Image Corona Wire Grid Plate Developer Roller Regulation Roller (Center) Regulation Roller (Both sides) Toner Supply Roller Transfer Corona Separation Corona Cleaning Roller Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle -1. 3-4 K116sm3e1 .4 Toner Collection Process] on the page 3-20 for the detail.05mA -620V +/-30V -180V +/-5V -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias 0V (Connected to the ground) The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias Plain Paper: +1.0mA +/-0.Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of the electric potentials. the KIP 3100 will take the “Toner Collection Process” to remove the remained toner and place back into the Developer Unit.2mA +/-0.3mA +/-0. The following graphic shows the electric potential at each process and the movement of toner.05mA Other Media: +1. or when the used Roll Deck is changed with other one.

which remains there after the former print cycle. 1. 0V 0V 0V Eraser Lamp Drum Negative electric charges 3-5 K116sm3e1 . So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp. it is necessary to remove the negative electric charges from the Drum. 2. The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V (residual potential) by this process. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) As the first step of the print cycle. The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to light.3.

The surface of Drum becomes about -620V evenly as a result.3mA +/-0. 2 .3. which corresponds to the white area of the printed image pattern. The Grid Plate is also connected to the High Voltage Power Supply individually.05mA Corona Wire Image Corona Grid Plate 620V 620V 0V 0V Drum 3-6 K116sm3e1 . 1.2 Charge of Drum The Image Corona discharges negative electric charges which are given to the Drum. The Current and Voltage supplied to the Image Corona Wire is as follows: Corona Wire -1.

(This potential is not constant but is variable due to the environment. 3 Exposure According to the printed image pattern. it will not block the light from the LED Head because the diameter of toner (9 micrometers) is much smaller than that of 1 pixel (42 micrometers) of the LED. 2. (This is called “Electrostatic Latent Image”. this part of Drum surface loses the charges and its potential becomes about -20V. which was not exposed to the light from the LED Head. An invisible electric image pattern that consists of -620V area and the -20V area is formed on the surface of Drum as a result.3. 3-7 K116sm3e1 . As the Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to light. the LED Head throws the light (740nm) onto some part of the Drum which corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern.) The other part of Drum surface. keeps the -620V of potential which the Image Corona has given. The electric charges on the Drum are removed as needed. 1.) LED Head 20V 20V 620V 620V 0V 0V Drum (Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure) -20V -620V Reference Even if the toner remains on the Drum.

the -20V area on the Drum is relatively “positive”. A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result. 4 Development The Developer Roller.3. And both -620V and -20V areas exist on the Drum because the Electrostatic Latent Image has been formed in the former Exposure process. the -620V area is relatively “negative” seen from the Developer Roller. (The width of contact point is about 5mm. -620V -20V (Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image) (Visible toner image) 3-8 K116sm3e1 . Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-180V). is in contact with the Drum because the Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum. 2. Developer Roller Drum Developer Roller Drum 20V 620V 180V 20V Before Development After Development: Toner moves only to -20V area. So the toner does not move to the -620V area but stays on the Developer Roller. which is evenly covered with toner. On the other hand. 1.) The Developer Roller is supplied with -180V (+/-5V) during the print cycle. So the toner moves from the Developer Roller to the -20V area of Drum.

7 Drum Cleaning]. 3. 4. The Developer Unit controls the movement of toner in the unit taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers. 1. The remaining toner that moved to the Developer Roller is carried into the Developer Unit and then reused. Some Toner remained on the Drum Toner moves from the Drum to the Developer Roller. 3-9 K116sm3e1 . Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller Toner is shifted to the inside of the Developer Unit by the rotation of Toner Supply Roller. Refer to [3.) -20V -620V Reference The Developer Unit not only has the Developer Roller but also 2 more rollers inside which are also supplied with individual voltages. 1 5 2 3 4 Before Development (Toner is remaining on the white area. This way there will be no unnecessary black spots printed on the white area of the print.Even if some toner has not been removed by the Cleaning Roller and remained on the -620V area of the Drum (which corresponds to the white area of the print) shown later in section [3. Toner is reused. this toner is removed at the time of the Development process. 2. This remaining toner moves to the Developer Roller because the potential of the roller (-180V) is higher than that of the Drum (-620V).2.1.3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit] to know how the Developer Unit controls the movement. 5.) After Development (Toner is removed from the white area. ultimately covering the Developer Roller with the toner.

The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows.) Printing paper 20V 20V 20V Transfer Corona (+500V +/-30V) Positive electric charges 3-10 K116sm3e1 .0mA +/-0. 1.05mA for other +1. The toner existing on the -20V area on the Drum will move to the printing paper because the potential of the paper becomes higher than the Drum by the Transfer Process. 5 Transfer The printing paper is charged positively to about +500V as the Transfer Corona discharges positive electric charges from under the paper.05mA (When the Insulated Drum is used.2mA +/-0. Transfer Corona Wire: for plain paper: +1. 2.3.

3-11 K116sm3e1 .3. 1. Negative charges of the Drum are removed by the light from the Separation Lamp. the Separation Lamp throws light from under the Corona Wires to remove the negative charges of the Drum. 2. which mainly results in removing the positive charges of the printing paper. it is necessary to separate the paper from the Drum by removing the static force between them.0KV DC voltage : -250V As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage. and the paper is separated from the Drum by its weight. AC voltage : 5. The static force between the printing paper and the Drum is reduced as a result. The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC voltage. On the other hand. the negative charges are generated more than positive ones. 6 Separation The printing paper is attracted to the Drum after the Transfer Process because the potential of paper is positive and that of Drum is negative. Drum 620V 20V Separation Corona Separation Lamp Positive charges of the paper are removed by the AC discharge. To avoid jamming.

3-12 K116sm3e1 . The remaining toner will then be removed from the Drum in the Development Process. 1. Refer to the page 3-9 for the detail. As the Cleaning Roller is relatively “positive” and the Drum is “negative”. Cleaning Roller 450V Drum Remained toner Negative electric charges NOTE If too much toner exists in a small area (like a trace of solid black image) the Cleaning Roller may not be able to remove it all. This remaining toner will be removed by the Cleaning Roller. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of toner) Some amount of toner that has not transferred onto the printing paper remains on the Drum.3. and there are some negative electric charges on the Drum at this time. 2. the toner moves from the Drum to the Cleaning Roller. The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V (+/-5V).

Fuser Roller Inner Transport Unit Pressure Roller 3-13 K116sm3e1 . The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller. The Fuser Roller is very hot. The toner is firmly fused onto the printing paper by the combined heat and pressure when the paper passes between these rollers. and the Pressure Roller is strongly pressed to the Fuser Roller. 2. 1. 8 Fusing After Transfer / Separation Processes. the printing paper is transported to the Fuser Unit by the Inner Transport Unit.3.

1. The voltage of the Regulation Roller (Center) (-120V) is measured against the developer roller. Name of roller Developer Roller Regulation Roller (Center) Regulation Roller (Both sides) Toner Supply Roller Supplied voltage -180V +/-5V against the ground -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias 0V (Connected to the ground) The same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias (The Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller are connected together using a spring leaf plate inside the developer contact cover. In the following list.3. These areas are separated by insulators so that an individual voltage can be supplied to each. Each roller is supplied with its own voltage. “Regulation Roller” and “Toner Supply Roller” in the Developer Unit. The voltage on the Toner Supply Roller is provided by the Developer Roller Bias. meaning the difference against the voltage of Developer Roller Bias. the central area and both side areas. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit There are 3 kinds of rollers called “Developer Roller”. the voltage of the Developer Roller (-180V) is measured against the ground.) Regulation Roller: Both sides (0V: Connected to GND) Insulator Regulation Roller: Center (-80V against the Developer Roller Bias) Developer Roller (-180V against GND) Toner Supply Roller (Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias) NOTE The Regulation Roller is divided into three areas. 3-14 K116sm3e1 .

4. the toner which has passed through the rollers is firmly attracted to the Developer Roller. the movement of toner is controlled in the Developer Unit as follows.Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers. Since the voltage of the Developer Roller is 80V higher than that of the Regulation Roller (Center). This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacting the Regulation Roller. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by springs. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers it moves onto the Developer Roller Then the Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller. A very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Developer Roller as a result. Scraper Regulation Roller: Center (-80V against the Developer Roller Bias) 4 3 1 2 Toner Supply Roller (Same voltage with the Developer Roller) Developer Roller (-180V against GND) 3-15 K116sm3e1 . 2. and these 2 rollers move in the opposite direction of each other at the contact point. So a very small amount of toner passes between the rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside. Much of the toner sticks on the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside. 3. the Regulation Roller limits the amount of toner that can pass between the 2 rollers. 1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller. Even if the Developer Roller carries more toner than required.

Regulation Roller: Both Sides (0V: Connected to GND) 5 Developer Roller (-180V against GND) Regulation Roller: Center (-80V against Developer Roller voltage) Toner area (Drum side) Regulation Roller: Both sides (0V: Connected to GND) Non-toner area Developer Roller (-180V against GND) 3-16 K116sm3e1 . The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result. The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 0V as these parts are connected to Ground through both side roller bearings and brackets. This potential is higher than that of the Developer Roller (-180V). all of it moves onto the Regulation Roller and is scraped off by the Scraper. this helps prevent toner from dropping into the machine from the sides.5. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers.

This toner gathered by the Cleaning Roller is returned to the Developer Unit in the following 3 cases. (1) When the printer has finished printing out all the accumulated print jobs and prepares to stop. 4 Toner Collection Process As explained in [3. This process to return the toner to the Developer Unit is called “Toner Collection Process”. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -550V in the Toner Collection Process. The Charge Unit remains turned off.7 Drum Cleaning] on the page 3-12. the printer will take the Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions. toner on the Cleaning Roller moves onto the Drum.1. As the potential of Drum becomes higher than that of Cleaning Roller. (2) When the used roll paper is ended and changed with another one. (3) When the used roll paper is changed from one to another because the print size specified in the job is different. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from the Drum.2.3. the Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V to remove the remained toner from the Drum during the print cycle. 2. 1. When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area. 1. The potential of Drum becomes 0V. 0V 0V 550V 0V Remained toner Drum Cleaning Roller 3-17 K116sm3e1 .

Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the Toner Supply Roller. The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller changes to +350V (+/-5V) during the Toner Collection Process. Remained Toner 0V 0V Drum 350V 0V Developer Roller 3-18 K116sm3e1 .3. toner on the Drum moves onto the Developer Roller. As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum.

Reference Voltages supplied to the Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller during the Toner Collection Process. shown below: Name of roller Developer Roller Regulation Roller (Center) Regulation Roller (Both sides) Toner Supply Roller Supplied voltage +350V +/-5V against the ground -120V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias 0V (Ground) Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias Regulation Roller: Center (-120V against the Developer Roller Bias) Regulation Roller: Both sides (0V: Connected to GND) Developer Roller (+350V against GND) Toner Supply Roller (Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias) 3-19 K116sm3e1 .

Due to The Developer Roller / Regulation Roller Bias Adjustment. According to the result. image density will stabilize and provide a satisfactory image quality regardless of the machine usage. The KIP 3100 has the ability to reduce such loss of image density and is able to maintain a satisfactory image quality regardless of the machine usage. toner density on the surface of Photoconductive Drum is measured by the Density Sensor at regular time intervals. the Developer Roller / Regulation Roller Bias will be automatically adjusted to compensate image density. If the Density Value falls short of the lowest density limit (Minimum Density). The Density of all the patches is measured by Density Sensor (Density Measure). Several solid toner patches are created on the surface of Photoconductive Drum as follows. 5 Density Compensation Process On rare occasion. 1. The Density Measurement starts at regular intervals of 18 hours of Main Motor operating time. 3-20 K116sm3e1 . Default upon shipment Developer Roller Bias (Negative) Regulation Roller Bias against Developer Roller Bias No Compensation Compensation Level 1 Compensation Level 2 Compensation Level 3 -180V 120V -180V remain default -230V 120V -230V 160V -230V 200V 120V remain default 4. In the Density Compensation Process. 3.3. loss of image density may occur under special usage. Solid toner patch Photoconductive Drum Density Sensor 2. one of the Compensation Levels listed below will be applied. after the completion of the current print queue. The average of the patches (Density Value) is calculated. 1. The Developer Roller / Regulation Roller Bias will be adjusted based on the current Compensation Level.

( 9 ) C l ea r Mode 3-6. Press [MENU] until “Bias 3 Count Clr” appears. . Press [MENU] until “(9) Clear Mode” appears. [ ]. press [ENTER]. (2) Manual Switching of Compensation Level is not provided. 3-1. 3-2. and then press the keys in the following order. . B i a s3 Coun t C l r 3-21 K116sm3e1 . When it appears. 3-3. B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 3-7.NOTE (1) While the Density Value exceeds the Minimum Density. Turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] button to unlock the Keys. the current Compensation Level will remain. 3-5. Press and hold the [ * ]. Remove the cover from the front face of the machine to access the Sub UI. Press and hold the [ * ]. press [ENTER]. [ ] to enter the Service Mode. When it appears. Complete the replacement procedure and return all the parts to their proper positions. The applied bias adjustment by the Density Compensation will be set back to the default value. then press [Enter] to reset the Density Compensation Level. (3) An applied Compensation Level should be reset after replacing the Developer Roller. P r i n t er R1 : 36 r ea dy MENU ENTER 3-4. [ ]. [ ].

CIS Controller PCB’s and a Data Controller PCB in the scanner unit. or it outputs to the Network PC through the LAN cable in case of “scan to file”. The CIS Controller Boards convert the analog data into digital data. The Data Controller PCB completes the correct image processes according to the UI setting. and then sends the analog data to the CIS Controller Boards. CIS CIS CIS Analog data CIS CIS CIS Controller PCB (A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB (A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB (A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB (A/D Conversion) CIS Controller PCB (A/D Conversion) Digital data Data Controller PCB (Several image process) USB 2.0 IPS (Controller) Interface 8 Printer part LAN Network PC Printing out of the Copy Saving as an image file 3-22 K116sm3e1 . and then sends it to the Data Controller PCB. 3. The IPS then outputs the image data to the printer part of the KIP 3100 through the Interface 8 in case of “copy”.0 cable. 1 Scan Process Data flow in scan and copy There are CIS Units. 2 3. 2. 2. which reads the image and processes the data. 4. 1. Then it outputs the image data to the IPS through the USB 2.3. The CIS Units read the image pattern of the original.

3 Position] (page 8-205) for this setting. 4. Also. Since the CIS units are arranged in 2 rows. The Data Controller PCB performs these positioning processes. it is necessary to remove the duplication of image pixels by the horizontal positioning process (X overlap). To prevent this kind of problem. a vertical gap of image occurs among the image blocks. 2. NOTE The KIP 3100 performs these positioning processes (X overlap & Y offset) according to the setting specified through the KIP Scanner Utility. the reading area of these 5 CIS units overlaps each other by some degree.3. Shown in the following illustration The reading data is initially inputted to the Data Controller PCB as follows. Please refer to [8. It is very hard to recognize the image because many images are duplicated.12. Reading areas Duplicate Image CIS Vertical Gap The image data before the positioning process 3-23 K116sm3e1 . [Explanation] There are 5 CIS units arranged in 2 rows with some amount of their reading area overlapping each other. This means some image pixels are commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks. (2) Some image pixels are commonly included (duplicating) in the neighboring two Image Blocks. (1) A vertical gap of image occurs among the image blocks. 2 Positioning process of Image Block The KIP 3100 scanner reads the image of the original using 5 CIS units (Contact Image Sensors). It is necessary to remove this gap by the vertical positioning process (Y offset).

The image data before the positioning process The image data after the positioning process (Y offset) 3-24 K116sm3e1 .The Data Controller PCB removes the vertical gap among the Image Blocks according to the positioning setting (Y offset) specified through the KIP Scanner Utility.

Also the Data Controller PCB removes the duplication of image pixels among the Image Blocks according to the positioning setting (X overlap) specified through the KIP Scanner Utility. The image data after the positioning process (Y offset) The image data after the positioning process (X overlap) 3-25 K116sm3e1 .

3. 2. 2. 9 Roll Deck 4. 2. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output 4. 4 Check & Adjustment of AC Component to the Separation Corona 4.12 Scanner Unit 4. 6 Check & Adjustment of Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller 4. 2. 2. 3. 5 Check & Adjustment of DC Component to the Separation Corona 4. 2 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona 4. 8 Fuser Unit 4.2 4. 7 Check & Adjustment of Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller 4. 2 Left side 4.Chapter 4 Electrical 4. 3. 2. 4 Front side 4. 8 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller 4. 3. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona 4. 2. 2.10 Cutter Unit 4.7 4.10 Check & Adjustment of Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) 4-1 K116sm4e1 . 2 Electrical Components Location 4.3 4. 5 LED Head Frame 4. 2. 3. 2. 3. 3. 6 Main Frame 4. 1 General Information Page 4. 7 Developer Unit 4.3 4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply 4. 3. 9 Check & Adjustment of Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) 4.8 4-12 4-13 4-15 4-18 4-19 4-21 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-30 4-30 4-31 4-33 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-41 4-43 4-45 4-47 4. 3 Back side 4. 2. 3.11 Inner Transport Unit 4. 3. 1 Right side 4. 2.

This microcomputer reads the input signals from the sensors. 1 General Information This machine is mainly controlled by a microcomputer. clutches and blowers on programmed timing. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Generally the color of the wiring is separated depending on the voltage. and outputs the operation signals to the motors. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.4. As for the waste disposal of battery. There is a Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. 0VDC Blue 5VDC Yellow 12VDC Brown 24VDC Orange Signal in to DC Controller (sensors) Purple Signal out from DC Controller Gray CAUTION There is a battery (CR2032) on the Motherboard of IPS Controller. SSRs. dispose in accordance with local state and federal relations. 4-2 K116sm4e2 . solenoid. which is located on the DC Controller. Sensor Micro Computer (CPU & ROM) Driver DC Load The DC Controller has an LED which identifies that 5VDC is applied on this DC Controller safely.

4. 2 4. 1 Electrical Components Location Right Side 3 2 6 1 5 4 (230V model only) Item 1 2 Symbol SW1 MS1 Signal name (POWER-OFF) Name Switch Switch Type AJ8R2004BBCF FA1L-AA22 3 4 5 SSR1 SSR2 HV1 HV2 HV3 HVP4 OUTPUT2 OUTPUT3 OUTPUT5 HV_IM HV_TR HV_AC BIAS_TRG BIAS_SW Solid State Relay Solid State Relay HV Power Supply AQJ416V (US) AQJ426V (EU) AQJ416V (US) AQJ426V (EU) EUK1MGA60HA Function Turns on and off the machine Detects whether or not the Toner Hatch or the Engine Unit is opened. (1) Image Corona (HV1) (2) Transfer Corona (HV2) (3) Separation Corona (HV3) (4) Developer Roller (OUTPUT2) (5) Regulation Roller (OUTPUT3) (6) Cleaning Roller (OUTPUT5) 6 PW5724B Phase Control PCB PW5724B Flicker Reduction Used on 230V model only 4-3 K116sm4e2 . 2. (It shuts off the AC Power to the DCP1 when either of them are opened) ON / OFF control of the Fuser ON / OFF control of the Fuser Outputs the high voltage to each of the following components.

3) is outputted (or stopped) by the signal “BIAS_TRG”. The polarity of Bias is decided by the signal “BIAS_SW” 4-4 K116sm4e2 .NOTE Developer Bias (OUTPUT 2.

11 10 8 7 9 13 16 14 12 (120V model) (230V model) 15 4-5 K116sm4e2 .

15A) Protects the circuit from the surge caused by thunder Turning on and off the Dehumidify Heater Supplies the power to the Lamp (H1). (It stops supplying the power to the Lamp when Switch (MS3) or Thermostat (TS1) is open) Removes the noise from the AC line Used on 120V model Protects the AC line from the over-current Used on 120V model Removes the noise from the AC line Used on 230V model Inputting the AC Power Used on 230V model Protects the AC line from the over-current Used on 230V model 9 10 11 PW10810 SW2 RY1 - PW10810 PCB ASSY Switch (Option) Relay PW10810 SDDJE1 G7L-2A-TUB (DC24V) 12 LF1 - Noise Filter 13 CB1 - Breaker X28-XQ1A-15 14 LF1 - Noise Filter RG-208F2 15 16 INLET CB1 - Inlet Breaker X28-XQ1A-10 4-6 K116sm4e2 .15AH Function Outputs each of the following: 24VDC. 5VDC and 0VDC Protects the 24VDC output from over-current If you replace the fuses. (Manufacturer) LITTEL FUSE INC.15AH (250V / 3. (Type) Walter TSC3. make sure to use the following specified one.Item 7 8 Symbol DCP1 F1 F2 F3 Signal name - Name DC Power Supply Fuse Type LEB225F0524-U Walter TSC3.

4. 2. Lamps and Blowers Detects whether or not the Toner Hatch or the Engine Unit is opened (The machine does not shut off the AC power even if MS4 detects either of them is opened) Aligns the leading image formed on the Drum with the leading edge of the paper 4-7 K116sm4e2 . 2 Left Side 2 3 4 1 Item 1 Symbol PW11620 Signal name - Name PW11620 PCB Type PW11620 2 3 PW6654B MS4 - Driver PCB B Switch PW6654B V-162-1C25 10E 4 CL1 REGIST_CL Clutch MIC5NE-45 Function Overall sequence control with Interface to IPS and (Image Process for LED) Driver for the Toner and Press motors. Er.

3 Back Side 4 3 1 2 5 6 Item 1 2 3 4 Symbol BL7 BL8 DCP2 PW10523 Signal name - Name Blower Fan DC Power Supply PC Controller PCB Type D12F-24BL 05 ASFN90372 90 LDA15F-12 PW10523 Function Assists with transporting the paper on the Inner Transport Unit Cools down the IPS Controller Supplies the 12V DC power to both the UI and the PW10523 Switches AC Power On and Off to the IPS Controller. 2. Developer Unit and Paper Feeding section Drives the Fuser Unit 5 6 M1 M2 MAMTR HEAT_M DC Motor DC Motor DRG-6236-226 DRG-6236226B 4-8 K116sm4e2 . (Sends Shut Down signal to IPS Controller) Drives the Drum.4.

(Fuser Unit omitted) 7 8 Item 7 8 Symbol BL5 BL6 Signal name Name Fan Fan Type ASFN60372 ASFN60372 Function Controls the temperature on the right area of Fuser Roller Controls the temperature on the left area of Fuser Roller 4-9 K116sm4e2 .

4-10 K116sm4e2 .10 Item 10 Symbol MS8 Signal name Name Switch (Optional in USA) Type FA2L-BA22 Function It stops supplying the AC power to the Dehumidify Heater when the Roll Deck is opened.

) Detecting whether or not the Heater Hatch is opened. (The machine does not shut off the AC power even if the MS3 detects the Heater Hatch is opened.12 13 11 11 Item 11 Symbol BL3 & BL4 Signal name HEAT_BL_L HEAT_BL_R Name Blower Type D12F-24BL 05 12 MS2 Switch FA1L-AA22 13 MS3 Switch V-162-1C25 10E Function Exhausts the heated inside air.) 4-11 K116sm4e2 . (They are equipped with the Ozone Filters) Detects whether or not the Heater Hatch is opened. (It shuts off the AC power to the DCP1 when the Heater Hatch is opened.

4 Front Side 1 2 3 Item 1 2 3 Symbol LCD PW10570 EC1 Signal name Name LCD PW10570 PCB Type L168200J000 PW10570 E760PC10DC 24-551 COUNT Counter Function Several kinds of messages are indicated. 4-12 K116sm4e2 .4. It is possible to change the counting unit in the Service Mode. Counts the total linear meter (linear foot) or square meter (square foot). Several kinds of service operations are available. 2.

5 LED Head Frame 1 Item 1 Symbol PW6631 Signal name ER1 Name Eraser PCB A Type PW6631 Function Removes the negative electric charges from the Drum at the beginning of the Print Process 4-13 K116sm4e2 . 2.4.

(Image Corona Unit omitted) 2 3 Item 2 3 Symbol LED HEAD PW6693 Signal name Name LED Head HV-ZD Assy Type LH6604 PW6693 Function Creates the Electrostatic Latent Image on the Drum Keeps the Grid Voltage constant (Control of the surface potential) 4-14 K116sm4e2 .

2.4. 6 Main Frame (Drum omitted) 1 2 1 Item 1 Symbol PW6631 Signal name ER2 Name Eraser PCB A Type PW6631 Function Assists with paper separation by removing the electric charges from the Drum at the time of the Separation Process Detects the toner density on the drum surface for the analog voltage adjustment on PW11620 2 DENS-S PH11 Toner Density Sensor GP2Y40010K0 F 4-15 K116sm4e2 .

Detects the paper at the Registration Area Detects and sets the cut sheet paper 4-16 K116sm4e2 .4 3 5 6 Item 3 Symbol M4 Signal name PRESS_M Name DC Motor Type DU2422-1 4 PH4 PRESS_S Sensor GP1A73A000J 5 6 PH1 PH5 REGIST_S MAN_IN Sensor Sensor PS117ED1 PS117ED1 Function Presses the Developer Unit against the Drum (Or keeps the Developer Unit away from the Drum) Detects the Developer Unit is pressed or kept away from the Drum.

7 Item 7 Symbol MS5 Signal name DOOROPEN Name Switch Type CS1A-B2CA Function Detection for the Roll Deck Open Error 4-17 K116sm4e2 .

4. 2. 7 Developer Unit 1 2 Item 1 2 Symbol TLS1 M3 Signal name TONER_S TONER_M Name Sensor DC Motor Type TSP15DA10C01 DU2431-2 Function Detects whether or not toner exists in the Developer Unit Drives the Toner Cartridge to supply the toner to the Developer Unit 4-18 K116sm4e3 .

2. 8 Fuser Unit 1 3 2 Item 1 2 3 Symbol TS1 TS2 TH1 TH2 Signal name Name Thermostat Thermistor Thermistor 3 TH1 TH2 Type CH-152-35170 FS-K0113 FS-K0113 Function Preventing over-heat Detects the temperature on the central area of Fuser Roller Detects the temperature on the driven side of Fuser Roller 4-19 K116sm4e3 .4.

5 4 6 Item 4 Symbol H1 Signal name 5 H2 6 PH3 HEAT_EXIT Name Lamp 120V : Z166800001 230V : Z166800003 Lamp 120V : Z166800002 230V : Z166800004 Sensor Type Function Heats up the central part of Fuser Roller Heats up the right and the left part of Fuser Roller GP1A73A000J Detects paper mis-feeds at the exit area 4-20 K116sm4e3 .

2.4. 9 Roll Deck 1 7 5 4 3 2 6 Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Symbol CL3 CL4 CL5 CL6 CL7 PH8 PH10 Signal name FEED_CL R1FD_CL R1BK_CL R2FD_CL R2BK_CL R1ENC_S R2ENC_S Name Clutch Clutch Clutch Clutch Clutch Sensor Sensor Type MIC5NE-45 MIC8NE-23 MIC8NE-09 MIC8NE-23 MIC8NE-09 GP1A73A000J GP1A73A000J Function Feeds roll paper from both Roll 1 and Roll 2 (Forward) Feeds Roll 1 (Forward) Rewinds Roll 1 (Reverse) Feeds Roll 2 (Forward) Rewinds Roll 2 (Reverse) Detects “paper end” of Roll 1 Detects “paper end” of Roll 2 4-21 K116sm4e3 .

Thermostat Controlling the temperature of Resister (The Resisters turn on when the Thermostat detects some decided temperature.5K 15W 2455RM-15837 Function Dehumidifies the roll paper with heat.8 8 9 9 Item 8 9 Symbol H3 H4 H5 H6 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 Signal name Name Resister Type 120V 1K 15W 230V 3. and they turn off when it detects another decided temperature.) 4-22 K116sm4e3 .

10 11 13 12 Item 10 11 12 13 Symbol PH6 PH7 PH12 PH9 Signal name R_EDGE R1SET_S FEED_ENC R2SET_S Name Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Type PS117ED1 PS117ED1 GP1A73A000J PS117ED1 Function Detects the trailing edge of the roll paper Detects the paper set position for Roll 1 Detects the length of the proceeding paper to be cut Detects the paper set position for Roll 2 4-23 K116sm4e3 .

2.4. 10 Cutter Unit 2 1 Item 1 2 Symbol M5 MS6 MS7 Signal name Name Cutter Motor Cutter Home Position Sensor Type - Function Moves the Cutter Blade Detects the Home Position of the Cutter Blade. 4-24 K116sm4e3 .

4. 2. 11 Inner Transport Unit 1 Item 1 Symbol PH2 Signal name STRIP_S Name Sensor Type GP1A73A000J Function Detects the paper mis-feed at the Separation Area 4-25 K116sm4e3 .

4. 2. Converts the analog data read by the CIS to the digital data Detects whether or not the Scanner Upper Unit is opened. And then it sends the processed image data to the IPS Controller. 4-26 K116sm4e3 . 12 Scanner Unit 2 1 3 2 Item 1 Symbol Signal name Name Data Controller Board Type 2 3 CIS Controller Board Sensor TLP1201A Function Data Controller Board makes several image processes to the digital data sent from the CIS Controller Board.

1 2 5 4 Item 1 Symbol Signal name Name Data Controller Board Type 2 4 5 CIS Controller Board Sensor Switch TLP1201A CS1A-B2CA Function Data Controller Board makes several image processes to the digital data sent from the CIS Controller Board. Emergency stop button (Stops original drive) 4-27 K116sm4e3 . Converts the analog data read by the CIS to the digital data Detects whether or not the Scanner Upper Unit is opened. And then it sends the processed image data to the IPS Controller.

Also it detects original widths A4.5” and 9”.6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Item 6 Symbol Signal name Name Sensor Type PS117ED1 7 8 9 10 11 12 Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor PS117ED1 PS117ED1 PS117ED1 PS117ED1 PS117ED1 PS117ED1 Function It detects the insertion of original. It detects original widths 34” and 36”. It detects original widths A2. and 30”. It detects original widths A3. It detects the original mis-feed. 8. It detects original widths A1. It is also used to detect the leading edge when the original is returned. 11” and 12”. It detects original widths A1. 4-28 K116sm4e3 . 17” and 18”. 22” and 24”.

Also it is the Driver Circuit of the Motor. +5V and +3.3V. and then sends the analog data to the CIS Controller Board Transports the original. Converts the +24V to each +12V.13 13 15 13 14 Item 13 Symbol Signal name Name CIS Unit Type CIPS218CF601 14 15 Motor Assembly Power Board Function CIS Units read the image of original. 4-29 K116sm4e3 .

(2) When the electric components such as motors or lamps don’t work properly during normal operation. Check Item Analog Voltage to the Image Corona Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona AC Component to the Separation Corona DC Component to the Separation Corona Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) Reference page 4-31 4-33 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-41 4-43 4-45 4-47 Reference Please try replacing PW11620 PCB or HV Power Supply PCB if you have the following kinds of problems. 4-30 K116sm4e4 . although such components have no problem. 3 4. PW11620 PCB (DC Controller) HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA) Please check the analog output for each of the following parts. PW11620 PCB (1) When the UI indicates abnormal indication although the UI has no problem. 1 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply Situations necessary to check the analog output It is necessary to check the analog output from High Voltage Power Supply after replacing the following parts. Go to the “Reference page” indicated on the list below to see how to check and adjust each item. HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA) When the output to the Image Corona / Transfer Corona / Separation Corona / Developer Roller / Toner Supply Roller / Regulation Roller and Cleaning Roller is abnormal. and adjust if they are out of the specified range.4. 3.

4. 1. Connect the “-” cable to ground. Check and adjust the output current in the following way. 3. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.05V.30 +/-0.05V. CP11 multimeter (DC) ground 2.30 +/-0. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print. Standard value of the output voltage to the Image Corona is 1. check the voltage with the multi-meter. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8. 4-31 K116sm4e4 . Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “CP11” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA). 2 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Image Corona is 1. And then.

3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy 1. rotate VR101 with a screwdriver. To adjust it. VR101 multimeter (DC) ground 4-32 K116sm4e4 .05V.30 +/-0.

00 +/-0.05V 1. Plain paper Tracing paper Film 1.4. Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition. CP21 CP22 multimeter (DC) 4-33 K116sm4e4 .00 +/-0. 1.20 +/-0.05V 1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “CP21” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA). 3. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Transfer Corona is specified to each type of paper as follows. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. And then. NOTE The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment. Connect the “-” cable to the “CP22” pin.05V Check and adjust the output current in the following way.

05V 3.029 to 034)] on page 8-47 for the details. (Refer to [8. Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.2. 029 030 031 032 033 034 Contents Transfer Voltage (Plain paper) Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper) Transfer Voltage (Film) Transfer Voltage (Plain paper : Special) Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper : Special) Transfer Voltage (Film : Special) 4-34 K116sm4e4 . Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy the above specifications.00 +/-0.) Sub Mode No. Select the Test Print Mode. tracing paper & Film).05V Tracing paper 1. and change the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies the above specifications. (Refer to [8. 4.13 Transfer Voltage (No.05V Film 1. and make a test print using each type of paper (plain paper.00 +/-0. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the high voltage is supplied to the Transfer Corona during the Test Print.20 +/-0. 5. Standard values of the output voltages to the Transfer Corona are: Plain paper 1. select each of following Sub Mode Numbers. check the voltage with the multi-meter.4).

4-35 K116sm4e4 . multimeter (DC) CP31 CPCOM 2. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8.05V. Standard value of the AC Component to the Separation Corona is 5. 4 Check & Adjustment of AC Component to the Separation Corona The standard value of the AC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Separation Corona is 5. And then.4. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print. Check and adjust the AC Component in the following way.00 +/-0. check the voltage with the multi-meter. Connect the “-” cable to the “CPCOM” pin. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “CP31” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA).00 +/-0. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 3.05V. 1.

3. multimeter (DC) VR302 4-36 K116sm4e4 . rotate VR302 with a screwdriver. To adjust it.00 +/-0.05V. Adjust the AC Component if it does not satisfy 5.

8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print. 5 Check & Adjustment of DC Component to the Separation Corona The standard value of the DC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V. check the voltage with the multi-meter. 4-37 K116sm4e4 . Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “CP33” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA). CP33 multimeter (DC) ground 2. Connect the “-” cable to ground. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 1. And then. 3. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8.4. Standard value of the DC Component to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V. Check and adjust the DC Component in the following way.

Adjust the DC Component if it does not satisfy -250 +/-5V.3. To adjust it. VR303 multimeter (DC) ground 4-38 K116sm4e4 . rotate VR303 with a screwdriver.

6 Check & Adjustment of Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller The Negative Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Print Cycle. And then. multimeter (DC) ground OUTPUT 2 4-39 K116sm4e4 . Plain paper Tracing paper Film -180 +/-5V against the ground -180 +/-5V against the ground -180 +/-5V against the ground Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way. The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias is as follows for each type of paper.4. Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition. 3. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. Connect the “-” cable to ground. NOTE The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment. 1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT2” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA).

5.5V” is correct when the above 2 digits corresponds to the Compensation Level showing “01”. Check the current Compensation Level. 03 Developer Bias -180 +/-5V -230 +/-5V Refer to [8. .13 Developer Bias (No. 2. 02. select each of following Sub Mode Numbers. check the voltage with the multi-meter. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160 for checking the current Density Compensation Level. If not.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.10) and Density Compensation Reset Mode (Sub Mode No. The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias for each type of media is: Plain paper Tracing paper Film -180 +/-5V against the ground -180 +/-5V against the ground -180 +/-5V against the ground If the above values are not satisfied. “02” or “03”. 7). Enter Clear Mode (Mode No.5V. (Refer to [8. If the value (voltage) is -230 +/. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller during the Test Print.652)] on page 8-129 for Density Compensation Process.2. Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No.4). 4.022 to 027)] on page 8-49 for details) Sub Mode No. go to the next step. 3. 5. the Developer Bias may be adjusted by the Density Compensation Process. B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 A voltage of “-230V +/. 10. 4. Current Compensation Level 00 01. go to the next step for the adjustment. 4. and change the setting value so that the output voltage satisfies -180 +/-5V against the ground. 022 023 024 025 026 027 Contents Developer Bias (Plain paper) Developer Bias (Tracing paper) Developer Bias (Film) Developer Bias (Plain paper : Special) Developer Bias (Tracing paper : Special) Developer Bias (Film : Special) 4-40 K116sm4e4 . Refer to [8. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8.

Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT2” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA).4. 3. And then. 7 Check & Adjustment of Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller The Positive Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Cleaning Cycle. The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is +350 +/-5V against the ground. 1. Connect the “-” cable to ground. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. multimeter (DC) ground OUTPUT 2 4-41 K116sm4e4 . Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.

go to the next step for the adjustment. 3. Check the voltage with the multi-meter during that period. If this is not satisfied. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) The Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller for some seconds after the printed paper has been ejected. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8.2. The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is +350 +/-5V against the ground. multimeter (DC) VR401 ground 4-42 K116sm4e4 . Adjust the Positive Developer Bias by rotating VR401 so that the output voltage satisfies +350 +/-5V against the ground.

check the Bias gap between them with the multi-meter. 8 Check & Adjustment of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is 120 +/-5V. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the Bias is supplied to both the Developer Roller and the Toner Supply Roller.4. The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is 120 +/-5V. Check and adjust it in the following way. 1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT3” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA). go to the next step for the adjustment. And then. multimeter (DC) OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 2 2. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8. 4-43 K116sm4e4 . 3. Also connect the “-” one to the “OUTPUT2” Pin. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. If the above value is not satisfied.

If the value (voltage) is 160 +/-5V or 200 +/. If not. the Regulation Bias may be adjusted by the Density Compensation Process.5V” is correct when the above 2 digits corresponds to the Compensation Level showing “02”. (Refer to [8. 2.652)] on page 8-129 for Density Compensation Process.) 4.102 Regulation Bias (No. 01 02 03 Regulation Bias 120 +/-5V 160 +/-5V 200 +/-5V Refer to [8.3. . Enter Clear Mode (Mode No. 5. 4. select Sub Mode No.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160 for checking the current Density Compensation Level. Check the current Compensation Level. go to the next step for the adjustment. 5.5V.5V” is correct when the digits show “03”. Select the Adjustment Mode (Mode No. 4.622)] on page 8-123 for the details) 4-44 K116sm4e4 . and “200V +/. and change the value so that the output voltage satisfies 120 +/-5V. Current Density Compensation Level 00.10) and Density Compensation Reset Mode (Sub Mode No. Refer to [8.4). 10. 7). 622. B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 A voltage of “160V +/.

The standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT 5” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (AHKG-067). 3. 1. Make a Test Print (Refer to [8. 4-45 K116sm4e4 . check the voltage value with the multi-meter. OUTPUT 5 multimeter (DC) ground 2. Standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V. 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) As the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is supplied during the Test Print.4. And then. 9 Check & Adjustment of Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) The Positive Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the Print Process. Check and adjust it in the following way. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. Connect the “-” cable to ground.

multimeter (DC) ground VR001 4-46 K116sm4e4 . Adjust the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy +450 +/-5V. rotate VR2 with a screwdriver.3. To adjust it.

Make a Test Print (Refer to [8. 4-47 K116sm4e4 . 8 Test Print Mode] on and after page 8-141) The Toner Collection Process works for some seconds after the printed paper has been ejected.4. Check and adjust it in the following way. Connect the “-” cable to ground. select the DC volt range on the multi-meter. 3. 1. The standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT 5” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA). Standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.10 Check & Adjustment of Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) The Negative Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the Toner Collection Process. And then. Check the voltage value with the multi-meter during that period. OUTPUT 5 multimeter (DC) ground 2. which is done after the completion of the Print Process.

multimeter (DC) ground VR002 4-48 K116sm4e4 . To adjust it. rotate VR1 with a screwdriver.3. Adjust the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy -550 +/-5V.

4. 3 Replacement of Roller Pressure 5. 5. 2. 1 Replacement of Cutter Assembly 5. 4.12 Installation of Dehumidify Heater Kit (Optional in USA) 5. 9 Replacement of Sensors (PH10) 5. 2 How to fix the Aluminum Blocks 5. 2 Installation of 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N: Z168080050) 5. 12. 3. 2.3 5. 4.Chapter 5 Mechanical 5. 2. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3. CL4 & CL5) of Roll 1 5. 3. 4.7 5. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components 5. PH7. 1 Removal of Side Covers 5. 3. 8 Readjustment of the pressure of Regulation Roller 5. 4 Replacement of Belt 4 page 5. 8 Replacement of Sensors (PH8) 5. 4. 2. 4.13 Installation of Roll Deck 2 Kit (Optional in USA) 5. 4. 3. 5 Replacement of Timing Belt 453 5. 3 Replacement of Toner Supply Roller 5. 4 Replacement of Screw Assy 5. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit 5. 5 Replacement of DC Motor 5. 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum 5. 7 Replacement of Sensors (PH6. 4. 2. 3. 2.3 5. 4 Replacement of Thermistors 5. 5. 3 Fuser Unit 5. 1. 6 Replacement of Exit Sensor 5. PH9 PH12) 5. 2 Removal of Cover 15 5. 12. 1 Installation of 1 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N: Z168080040) 5.6 5. 5. 4.11 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 2) 5. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum 5. 5 Replacement of Thermostat 5.7 5-10 5-33 5-36 5-44 5-46 5-47 5-53 5-67 5-67 5-71 5-86 5-96 5-98 5-100 5-102 5-102 5-105 5-107 5-109 5-112 5-114 5-115 5-118 5-119 5-120 5-123 5-127 5-127 5-136 5-141 5-155 5-155 5-163 5-169 5-170 5-1 K116sm5e1 . 1. 3 Removal of Cover 14 5. 4. 4. 3. 4 Roll Deck 5. 4. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit) 5. 2 Replacement of Fuser Unit Components 5. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1) 5. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit 5.5 5. 5 Photoconductive Drum 5. 4. 6 Replacement of Timing Belt 330 5. 2 Developer Unit 5.10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 1) 5. 5. 4. 4. 1. 2. 1 Outer Covers 5. 4 Replacement of Timing Belt 633 5. 2. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6 & CL7) of Roll 2 5.

12. 6.11. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires 5. Belt 7 5. 9 Engine Frame 5. 8.12. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3 & BL4) 5.10. 6 LED Head 5. 4 Replacement of Drive Rollers 1 and 2 5. 9. 1 Replacement of DC Motors (M1. 2.12. 8 Transfer / Separation Corona 5.11 Main Frame 5. 1 Replacement of the LED Head Unit 5. 2 Replacement of Belt 5. 7.10. 2 Replacement of Clutch (CL1) 5.12. 6.5.12. 2.11. 2 Positioning of the Aluminum Blocks 5. 7 Replacement of CIS 5. 3 Replacement of Blower (BL7) 5. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) & Registration Sensor (PH1) 5. 8 Replacement of Scan Glass Assy 5-171 5-171 5-179 5-179 5-180 5-191 5-197 5-197 5-204 5-209 5-209 5-211 5-214 5-214 5-218 5-220 5-221 5-223 5-223 5-224 5-227 5-227 5-235 5-239 5-240 5-241 5-241 5-247 5-249 5-252 5-259 5-262 5-265 5-269 5-2 K116sm5e1 . 2 LED focus adjustment 5. Belt8. 9. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit 5. Belt9. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit 5. 2.11. 7. 5 Replacement of Pinch Roller Assy 5. M2).12. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5 & BL6) 5. 4 Replacement of Fan (BL8) 5. 9. 6. 2 Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt 5. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona 5.12 Scanner Unit 5. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit 5. 1 Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and Developer Press Sensor (PH4) 5. 6.12.10 Inner Transport Unit 5.11. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy 5.12. 2 Replacement of the Corona Wire 5. 7 Image Corona 5. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers 5. 6 Replacement of Sensor 5. 6. 8. 9. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image 5.

1 Outer Covers Removal of Side Covers 1. 1 2. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit.5. Remove the screws (2) at both sides. 1 5. Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides. 2 2 3. 1. 3 3 5-3 K116sm5e2 .

2 Removal of Cover 15 1 1. 1. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 4 4 5. Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 3 2 5-4 K116sm5e2 . 5 6 5. loosen 4 pieces of screw (2). and then remove the Cover 15 (3). Remove 5 pieces of screw (4) at both sides.4. Remove 4 pieces of screw (1).

Loosen 4 pieces of screw (2) on the back. Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1). 2.5. 4 5-5 K116sm5e2 . 1. 2 3 3. Remove Cover 14 (4). and remove 4 pieces of screw (3) on the front. 3 Removal of Cover 14 1 1.

Remove Shield Cover N (6). 6 5-6 K116sm5e2 .4. 5 5 5. Remove 3 screws (5).

Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free. 1 Developer Unit Removal of the Developer Unit 1. 2 3 2 3 5-7 K116sm5e3 . 2 5. 1 2. Open the Cover 4 (1). 2.5.

Pull up the Lever 2 (5) to open the Engine Unit. 5 5. 6 5-8 K116sm5e3 . 4 4 1 4. There are Pins (4) at both sides.3. Pull them up and then slide them inward to remove the Cover 4 (1). Open the Bypass Feeder (6).

Refer to [5. 5-9 K116sm5e3 . and then open the Developer Press Unit (8). 2. remove the Developer Unit (11) from the machine. Close the Bypass Feeder (6).6. Remove 4 pieces of 4x8 screw (7). 7 7 7. Holding both Side Plates (10). 9 10 11 NOTE If you replace the whole Developer Unit. 8 6 8. 7 Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit)] on page 5-47. it is necessary to adjust the space between developer driving gears. Disconnect the connector (9).

2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components NOTE (1) The following parts are Developer Unit components. Remove the Developer Unit from the machine making reference to [5. 2. 2. 2. Disconnect the connector (1).5. (3) After replacing Developer / Blade Rollers. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit] on the page 5-7. This section shows how to replace all of them in one sequent operation. (2) Remove all the toner from Developer Unit before replacing the above parts. an applied Auto Adjustment Level should be reset manually with Service Mode . A periodic replacement for the following parts is recommended.Clear Mode. 1. Item Scraper Sheet Sheet 2 Roller Developer Sheet 3 Sheet 4 Blade Roller Seal R2 Assy Seal L2 Assy Seal 1 Seal 23 Seal 3 Seal 4 Number of article 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 Remarks All of these parts are contained in “Developer Maintenance Kit A” (Z160980030). 1 5-10 K116sm5e3 .

3. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (2) which fix the Hopper Assembly. 2

2

4. Remove the Hopper Assembly (3).

3

5-11

K116sm5e3

5. Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (4) to remove Cover (5). 4

5 6. Remove Separator (6). 6

6 7. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove Scraper Assembly (8).

7

7

8

8

5-12

K116sm5e3

8. Remove 10 pieces of screw (9), and then disassemble Scraper Assembly. Replace Scraper (10) with a new one.

9 9

10

NOTE
(1) Please install the new Scraper so that one of its 4 edges pointed by an arrow mark should touch the surface of Blade Roller. (2) The edge must be straight after the installation. Otherwise the toner will not be scraped off well. Arrow mark (3) Carry Scraper Assembly ends so that the touching edge to Blade Roller is in downward direction. 11

If Scraper falls or slips, Seal 5 (P/N: Z054601260) should be applied on Bracket 14 (11) so that Scraper Assembly housing catches Scraper firmly.

9. Remove all the toner from Developer Unit.

NOTE
Do not reuse the removed toner.

5-13

K116sm5e3

10. On the driving side, remove Retaining Ring-C (11: C6) to remove Gear Helical 30T (12), Parallel Pin (13: 2.5x10) and Collar 3 (14) from Blade Roller shaft. 12 14 13 12

11

NOTE
Blade Roller (15) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (16) by Bracket 4 (17) (on the driving side) and Bracket 5 (18) (on the electrode plate side). When reassembling, Blade Roller (15) should be pressed onto Roller Developer (16). Pressurizing will be required prior to reinstallation of Gear Helical 30T (12). 16 15 16 15

not pressurized

pressurized

18

17

Pressurize without Gear Helical 30T (12)

5-14

K116sm5e3

11. Remove 5 screws (19: M4x8) (20: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (21), Plate 9 (22), Collar (23).

20

23 20 19 21 22

12. Remove Washer (24: 8.1x14x0.5t) and Gear 29T-34T Assy (25)

24

25 24 13. Remove Gear Helical 30T (26) and Parallel Pin (27: 3x20) from Toner Supply Roller shaft. If you cannot remove Parallel Pin (27) at this time, remove it after the later step 15.

27 26 26

14. Remove Retaining Ring-E (28: E7) to remove Washer (29: 8.1x12x0.2t) and Gear Helical 28T Assy (30).

30 28 29 28

5-15

K116sm5e3

15. Remove Retaining Ring-E (31: E10) to remove Washer (32: 12.2x20x0.5t) and Counter Roller (33) from Developer Roller shaft. 31

33 32

31

16. Remove 2 screws (34: M4x8) to remove Bracket 4 (17) and Spring (35). At this time, Blade Roller on the driving side will be released from Roller Developer by unsecured Bracket 4 (17). 34

17 35

17. On the electrode plate side, remove 3 screws (36) to remove Holder 2 Assy (37).

36

37

18. Remove 3 screws (38: M4x6) and 2 Retaining Ring-E (39: E10) to remove Bracket 10 Assy (40) and Collar (41).

39 41 40 39

38

5-16

K116sm5e3

19. Remove Gear Helical 30T (42) and Parallel Pin (43: 3x16) from Toner Supply Roller shaft.

42

43 42

20. Remove Washer (44: 12.1x20x0.2t), Gear Helical 25T (45), Parallel Pin (46: 3x16), Counter Roller (47) from Roller Developer shaft. 44

47 45

46 44

21. Remove 2 screws (48: M4x6) to remove Bracket 5 (18) and Spring (49). At this time, Blade Roller on the electrode plate side will be released from Roller Developer by unsecured Bracket 5 (18).

48

18 49

22. Loosen 2 screws (50) to remove Bracket 19 (51). 50

51

5-17

K116sm5e4

23. On the driving side, remove 1 pan head screw (52: M4x8 W/ SW FW) to remove 1 flat washer (53: M4) and Bracket 6 Assy (54). 52

54 53

24. On the electrode plate side, remove 1 pan head screw (55: M4x8 W/ SW FW) and Retaining Ring-E (56: E8) to remove Washer (57: 10.1x16x0.5t), Flat Washer (58: M4), Bracket 7 Assy (59). 55

59 56 57

58

25. Remove Blade Roller (15) from Developer Unit. Replace Blade Roller with a new one.

15

15

15

(continued on the next page)

5-18

K116sm5e4

NOTE
(1) Attach both Sheet (60) / Sheet 2 (61) on each side of the new Blade Roller. 61

60 (2) Note the installation direction. The longer shaft should be placed to the driving side.

electrode plate side

driving side

(3) Seal 1 (62) on each side should be seated in position along the boss (63). 63 62 out of position

Correct

Wrong

5-19

K116sm5e4

26. On the driving side, remove 3 screws (64: M4x6) and Retaining Ring-E (65: E10) to remove Washers (66: 12.2 x 20 x 0.5t), Bracket 8 Assy (67).

64 65

67 66 65

64

27. On the electrode plate side, remove Retaining Ring-E (68: E10) to remove Washer (69: 12.2x20x0.5t), Bearing (70).

68

70 69

68

28. Remove Roller Developer (16). Replace Roller Developer with a new one.

16

16

16

(continued on the next page) 5-20
K116sm5e4

NOTE
(1) Attach both Sheet 4 (71) and Sheet 3 (72) on each side of the new Roller Developer. 72

71 (2) Note the installation direction. The shorter shaft should be placed to the driving side.

electrode plate side

driving side

(3) Seal 1 (62) on each side should be seated in position along the bosses. out of position

62

Correct (4) Push Roller Developer against Seal 1 on the electrode plate side (A) to hold and keep its original position when reassembling. (5) While installing toward (A) then (B), be careful not to damage Sheet 3 and Sheet 4 on Roller Developer shaft. C (6) Do not bump Roller Developer on the frame rim (C).

Wrong

A

B

5-21

K116sm5e4

29. On each side, remove 2 screws (73) to remove Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy (74) and Collar 5 (75). Replace Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy with new ones.

73 74

75

73

NOTE
Do not tighten the screws (73) so much as the seals will be transformed as the following bad example.

Seal is straight.

Seal is transformed.

Correct

Wrong

(2) Fix Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy (74) with the screws in proper clamping. Fixing them too tight may result in deform on Seal R2 Assy / Seal L2 Assy.

5-22

K116sm5e4

30. On each side, remove Seal 23 (75: upper), Seal 4 (76: lower), Seal 3 (77: under). Replace Seal 23, Seal 4 and Seal 3 with new ones. 75

77 76

NOTE
Align the bottom end of Seal 3 (77) to the rib inside the side plate. Align the far ends of Seal 23 (75) and Seal 4 (76) to the top and bottom ends of Seal 3 (77) respectively. 75

76 77

5-23

K116sm5e4

check that neither Scraper (10) nor Seal 1 (62) flips up on both sides. (2) After reinstalling Scraper Assembly. 8 7 7 5-24 K116sm5e4 . 10 62 (3) Tighten the screws (7) with pushing Scraper Assembly (8) to the arrow direction to be close to Blade Roller. please reinstall Scraper Assembly first and then locate Blade Roller in position later. This will avoid making Scraper’s edge waving. Reinstall Scraper Assembly.31. NOTE (1) For Scraper Assembly and Blade Roller.

10 62 15 (5) Blade Roller (15) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (16) by Bracket 4 (on the driving side) and Bracket 5 (on the electrode plate side).32. Sheet 2 (61) are not damaged or deformed. (Scraper Assembly omitted in the right picture) A B 15 (2) During locating toward (A) then (B). Reinstall Blade Roller. be careful not to damage Sheet (60) and Sheet 2 (61) on Blade Roller shaft. Now Blade Roller (15) has been located in position. 16 15 16 15 not pressurized 5-25 pressurized K116sm5e4 . check that Seal 1 (62). check that Scraper (10) is not wavy. 61 15 60 (3) After locating. (4) After locating. NOTE (1) Push Blade Roller (15) against Seal 1 (A) on the driving side to hold and keep its original position. Sheet (60). then push on the electrode plate side (B). it should be pressed onto Roller Developer (16) at the later step.

fully press down the top of Bracket 4 (17). tighten 2 screws (48) to secure Bracket 5 (18). loosen them. tighten 2 screws (34) to secure Bracket 4 (17). Replace all the components except Gear Helical 30T (12). 18 48 48 36. Separator (4) and Hopper Assy (3) in position.33. fully press down the top of Bracket 5 (18). On the driving side. With pressing. 48 34 55 52 35. Make sure that the 6 screws (48) (55) (34) (52) are installed loose. On the electrode plate side. If not. With pressing. 34 17 34 5-26 K116sm5e4 . 34.

37. Turn the screw (55) in just enough revolution to thrust its spring washer. Turn the screw (55) in just enough revolution to hold its spring washer. 52 spring washer on (52) held held 40. and this will make the toner layer on Roller Developer get thicker than required. Otherwise proper and even pressurization of Blade Roller between both the sides may be failed. 55 spring washer on (55) thrust held 5-27 thrust K116sm5e4 . 52 spring washer on (52) released held NOTE Do not tighten the screw (52) (55) firmly at this time. Turn the screw (52) in just enough revolution to thrust its spring washer. 38. 55 spring washer on (55) released 39. Turn the screw (52) in just enough revolution to hold its spring washer.

78 5-28 K116sm5e4 .41. 42. 12 14 44. 52 54 NOTE Do not tighten the screw (52) (55) quickly at this time. 55 57 43. reinstall Collar 3 (14). Slowly tighten the screw (52) to secure Bracket 6 Assy (54). and this will make the toner layer on Roller Developer get thicker than required. Otherwise proper and even pressurization of Blade Roller between both the sides may be failed. Slowly tighten the screw (55) to secure Bracket 7 Assy (57) in the same way with the previous step. Parallel Pin. Gear Helical 30T (12) and Retaining Ring-E to Blade Roller shaft. On the driving side. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (78) well. and evenly add the toner to Developer Unit.

6 6 to be placed along the guide NOTE (1) Be careful of the direction of Separator (6). gently place Separator (6) on the added toner. Do not push it in. 6 (2) Just put Separator (6) on the toner. Do not push it completely at this time. Do not install it in the wrong direction. Along the guide on the side plates. Doing so may damage the plastic screw mylars (79) on the 2 shafts Unseated 79 6 79 5-29 K116sm5e4 . It will be placed unseated.45.

Replace the Hopper Assembly (3) and connect the connector (1). Separator will sink in the toner.46. 3 1 5-30 K116sm5e4 . the plastic screw mylars may be damaged at the next step. Wrong: Unseated Correct: Seated 6 6 47. 80 80 NOTE (1) Slowly turn Developer Handle. If not in position. Insert Developer Handle (80) to the shaft of Roller Developer. and gently turn Developer Handle (80). Otherwise the toner may spill out. (2) Make sure that Separator (6) completely sinks in position by a 1/2 or more rotation of Developer Handle. Turn Developer Handle (80) until Separator sinks in position.

48. With pressing [MENU] on the sub UI. Refer to [5. 2. Rotate Roller Developer several times so that the roller surface is covered with the toner. 49. Pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way in this case. P r i n t er R1 : 36 r ea dy MENU ENTER 5-31 K116sm5e4 . Install Developer Handle (80) to Roller Developer shaft. the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Roller Developer in the above procedure 48. turn on the machine to unlock the sub UI operation. 80 NOTE If the pressures of Blade Roller on either or both sides are weaker than required. Reinstall Developer Unit to the machine. 8 Readjustment of the Pressure of Regulation Roller] on page 5-47. 50.

1 A 52. B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 After replacing Developer / Blade Rollers.51. With pressing [ * ]. 10. press [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] to enter Service Mode.Clear Mode. When it appears. 5. B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 54. 1. 4. press [Enter]. All segments on the sub UI LCD will light when you enter Service Mode. “02” or “03” show that the current Developer / Regulation Roller Bias are automatically adjusted by Density Compensation Process. Press [Menu] until “9 Clear Mode” appears. Relacing the rollers without adjustment reset may cause a darker image problem.652)] on page 8-129 • [8. because the adjustments was intended to suit the previously equipped rollers and will not suit the new rollers. Release [ * ] and the sub UI LCD displays ROM version. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160 5-32 K116sm5e4 . an applied Auto Adjustment Level should be reset manually with Service Mode . (The digits correspond to the current Auto Adjustment Level. Press [Menu] until “Bias 3 Count Clr” appears to reset the bias adjustment by Density Compensation Process. 11 6X0 2A FPG Ver .112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No. . B i a s3 Coun t C l r NOTE The 2 digits “01”. ( 9 ) C l ea r Mode 53. Refer to the related section for further details for the function. 2. Press [ * ] and [Enter] at the same time to reset. • [8.) . . ROM Ver .

2. 2 Replacement of Developer Unit Components] on the page 5-10. 1 2 1 3. Remove Retaining Ring-E (1: E10) to remove Bearing (2). remove Retaining Ring-E (3: E10) to remove Bearing (4). On the electrode plate side. 5-33 K116sm5e5 .5. Remove Blade Roller and Roller Developer from Developer Unit making reference to [5. 3 Replacement of Roller Supply 1. 2. Turn the whole Developer Unit frame to the arrow direction to be laid down. 2. 3 4 3 4.

5 5 6 6.5. 8 7 5-34 K116sm5e5 . Remove 2 screws (7) to remove Bracket Assy (8). Remove 9 screws (5) to remove Frame 2 (6).

(Be careful not to dispose them.) 10 11 (2) Note the installation direction. The shaft with three grooves should be placed to the driving side.7. Remove them from the old Roller Supply and then install them to the new Roller Supply. Remove Toner Supply Roller (9). Seal R Assy or Seal L Assy (12) are attached on each side shaft of Roller Supply. Sheet 5 (11). groove 12: reuse electrode plate side driving side 5-35 K116sm5e5 . 9 9 9 NOTE (1) Sheet 6 (10).

Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screws (3) which fix the Hopper Assembly (4). 2. 2 3. Disconnect the connector (2). 4 5-36 K116sm5e5 . 4 Replacement of Screw Assy 1. 3 3 4.5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit] on the page 5-7. 1 2. Remove the Hopper Assembly (4).

Collar (10). Remove Retaining Ring-E (11: E7) to remove Spacer (12). Gear 16T-34T (13). Remove 5 screws (6: M4x8) (7: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (8). 5 5 6. Plate (9). Remove all the toner from Developer Unit. 7 10 8 6 8 9 8. 13 11 12 11 5-37 K116sm5e5 . 7. NOTE Do not reuse the removed toner.5. Remove Separator (5).

Remove Retaining Ring-E (14: E5) (15: E7) to remove Washer (16). Remove Retaining Ring-E (25) to remove Washer (26) and Bush (27). 15 20 16 16 17 19 18 15 10. 20 22 21 20 11. remove 3 screws (23) to remove Holder 2 Assy (24).9. Gear 16T (18) and Parallel Pin (19). Gear 15T (17). 23 24 12. 25 27 26 25 5-38 K116sm5e5 . On the electrode plate side. Remove Retaining Ring-E (20) to remove Washer (21) and Bush (22).

Screw B Assy (29: far from Roller Supply). Remove Screw A Assy (28: near Roller Supply). Remove Side Seal (30) and Washer (31) on both ends of Screw A Assy (28) and Screw B Assy (29). 28 31 29 29 30 28 31 30 29 29 28 28 5-39 K116sm5e5 .13.

32 34 32 33 NOTE When replacing Screw A (33) / Screw B (34). please note the followings. Gently turn the screws (32) to fix Screw A (33) / Screw B (34). (2) Each Screw A (33) / Screw B (34) has a 3 twist between the screws (32). (1) Note the twisting direction around the shaft. Remove each 2 screws (32: M3x5) to remove Screw A (33) / Screw B (34). 32 32 (3) Screw A (33) / Screw B (34) are fragile.14. Screw B Assy (far from Roller Supply) 32 34 32 32 33 Screw A Assy (near Roller Supply) 32 5-40 K116sm5e5 .

Replace all the components except Separator (5) and Hopper Assy (4) in position. and evenly add the toner to Developer Unit. 35 5-41 K116sm5e5 .15. Shake the Starting Toner Bottle (35) well. 16.

gently place Separator (5) on the added toner. Along the guide on the side plates. It will be placed unseated. 5 5 to be placed along the guide NOTE (1) Be careful of the direction of Separator (5). Do not push it in. 5 (2) Just put Separator (5) on the toner.17. Do not install it in the wrong direction. Unseated 33 5 34 5-42 K116sm5e5 . Doing so may damage Screw A (33) and Screw B (34). Do not push it completely at this time.

18. (2) Make sure that Separator (5) completely sinks in position by a 1/2 or more rotation of Developer Handle. 36 36 NOTE (1) Slowly turn Developer Handle. the plastic screwing sheets may be damaged at the next step. and gently turn Developer Handle (36). Turn Developer Handle (36) until Separator sinks in position. 4 2 5-43 K116sm5e5 . Replace the Hopper Assembly (4) and connect the connector (2). Separator will sink in the toner. If not in position. Insert Developer Handle (36) to the shaft of Roller Developer. Otherwise the toner may spill out. Wrong: Unseated Correct: Seated 5 5 19.

Disconnect the connector (3). 4 4 3 3. Remove 3 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover 2 (2). remove the Joint R (6). and then remove the motor assembly. 5 6 5-44 K116sm5e6 .5. 5 Replacement of DC Motor 1. remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (4). Pressing the stoppers (5) inside. 1 2 2. 2.

4. Replace the DC Motor (9) with the new one. Remove 3 pieces of 3x20 screw (7) to remove the Bracket 19 (8). 9 7 8 5-45 K116sm5e6 .

Disconnect the connector (2). and then remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (3) to remove the Sensor (4). 1 Removal of the Developer Unit] on the page 5-6. Replace the Sensor (4) with the new one. 2. Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 2. 6 Replacement of Sensor (TLS1) 1.5. 1 2. 2 4 3 5-46 K116sm5e6 .

7 Adjustment of the space between gears (Necessary to adjust after replacing the Developer Unit) NOTE You do not have to adjust the space between gears basically as it has been adjusted in the factory.5. 5-47 K116sm5e6 . Not correct Correct Add Adjustment Plates. There is not enough space between gears. the gear may be broken. There must be a little mechanical play between these gears. The Developer Unit is driven by the Gear Helical 20T on the machine and the Gear Helical 28T on the Developer Unit. But please do it only when you replace the whole Developer Unit. (In another word there must be a little space between them. In this case it is necessary to add Adjustment Plates to keep a space. Refer to the next page how to add the Adjustment Plates. (Gears may be broken) Some space is kept between gears.) Gear Helical 20T Gear Helical 28T If there is no space between these gears. 2.

2. Remove 2 screws (2) to remove each Bracket 32 (3) on the left and Bracket 33 (4) on the right. 3 4 2 2 5 3 6 4 5-48 K116sm5e6 . 1 Removal of the Developer Unit] on the page 5-8. 1 2. You will find Adjustment Plate (5) and Adjustment Plate 2 (6).1. Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.

3. On the left side. 5 3 2 NOTE The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine. Spacer Spacer 5 Spacer 3 Z053101200 (thickness is 0. cover them with the Bracket 32 (3).1mm) Z053101330 (0.05mm) Z053101350 (0. and then fix with 2 screws (2).2mm) 5-49 K116sm5e6 . add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate (5) as required.

05mm) Z053101360 (0. On the right side.2mm) 5-50 K116sm5e6 . add (or remove) as many Adjustment Plate 2 (6) as required.1mm) Z053101340 (0. and then fix with 2 screws (2). Spacer 2 Spacer 6 Spacer 4 Z053101210 (thickness is 0.4. 6 3 2 NOTE The following 3 kinds of Spacers are used on the left side of the machine. cover them with the Bracket 33 (4).

Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8) are contacted each other when the Developer Unit is on the machine. There is Gear Helical 28T (7) on Developer Unit side. Gear Helical 34T (9) drives Gear Helical 20T (8). Put back the Developer Unit (1) to the machine. 1 6. There is Gear Helical 20T (8) on Engine Unit. (Top of Engine Unit) 7 8 9 (Bottom of Engine Unit) (continued on the next page) 5-51 K116sm5e6 . and also there is Gear Helical 34T (9) on Engine Unit.5.

it means there is not enough space between gears. There must be a little mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8).) If the gear could not be moved at all when you check them on the former procedure 6. (In another word there must be a little space between them. move the Gear Helical 34T (9) with another hand whether there is any mechanical play between Gear Helical 28T (7) and Gear Helical 20T (8). add more Adjustment Plates by the way instructed at the procedures 3 and 4. Move Gear Helical 34T (instead of Gear Helical 20T) with another hand. In this case. Hold the Gear Helical 28T with one hand. Add Adjustment Plates There is not enough space between gears. 7. (Gears become movable) 5-52 K116sm5e6 . (Gears are not movable) The space between gears becomes wider. The gear may be broken in this case.Holding the Gear Helical 28T (7) firmly with one hand.

1 2. 2 3. 3 3 5-53 K116sm5e7 . the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Developer Roller. 8 Readjustment of the Pressure of Regulation Roller If the pressure of Blade Roller is weak. Pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way as shown below in this case. Remove 4 screws (3).5. (You will not be able to pressurize it successfully by the usual way of pressurization once a too thick toner layer is created. 1.) To correct the pressure of Blade Roller against Developer Roller. Disconnect the connector (2). 2. 2. remove the thicker toner layer on the contact point between Blade Roller and Developer Roller. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit] on the page 5-7. Remove the Developer Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.

4. 5 6 6. 4 5. Remove 3 pieces of M4x6 screws (5) to remove Cover (6). Remove the Hopper Assembly (4). Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) to remove Scraper Assembly (8). 7 7 8 8 5-54 K116sm5e7 .

10 12 11 10 9 NOTE Blade Roller (13) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (14) by Bracket 4 (15) on the driving side.5x10) and Collar 3 (12) from Blade Roller shaft. On the driving side. repressurization should be required prior to reinstallation of Gear Helical 30T (10). 14 13 14 13 not pressurized pressurized 16 15 5-55 K116sm5e7 . by Bracket 5 (16) on the electrode plate side. Parallel Pin (11: 2. remove Retaining Ring-C (9: C6) to remove Gear Helical 30T (10).7. When reassembling.

8. If you cannot remove Parallel Pin (25) at this time.1x12x0. Remove Retaining Ring-E (26: E7) to remove Washer (27: 8. 28 26 27 26 5-56 K116sm5e7 . Remove 5 screws (17: M4x8) (18: M4x6) to remove Pin 4 (19). Collar (21). remove it after the later step 12. Remove Washer (22: 8. Remove Helical 30T (24) and Parallel Pin (25: 3x20) from Toner Supply Roller shaft. 18 21 18 17 19 20 9.2t) and Gear Helical 28T Assy (28).1x14x0. 25 24 25 11. Plate 9 (20).5t) and Gear 29T-34T Assy (23) 22 23 22 10.

remove 3 screws (34) to remove Holder 2 Assy (35). Remove Retaining Ring-E (29: E10) to remove Washer (30: 12. Remove 2 screws (32: M4x8) to remove Bracket 4 (15) and Spring (33). 29 31 30 29 13. 37 39 38 37 36 5-57 K116sm5e7 . Remove 3 screws (36: M4x6) and 2 Retaining Ring-E (37: E10) to remove Bracket 10 Assy (38) and Collar (39).5t) and Counter Roller (31) from Developer Roller shaft. On the electrode plate side. 34 35 15. 32 17 33 14.2x20x0.12.

46 16 47 19. Remove Gear Helical 30T (40) and Parallel Pin (41: 3x16) from Toner Supply Roller shaft.2t). Remove Washer (42: 12. 40 41 40 17.1x20x0. Gear Helical 25T (43). 42 45 43 44 42 18. Remove 2 screws (46: M4x6) to remove Bracket 5 (16) and Spring (47). 48 49 5-58 K116sm5e7 .16. Loosen 2 screws (48) to remove Bracket 19 (49). Counter Roller (45) from Developer Roller shaft. Parallel Pin (44: 3x16).

Flat Washer (56: M4). 13 13 13 5-59 K116sm5e7 . remove 1 pan head screw (50: M4x8 W/ SW FW) to remove 1 flat washer (51: M4) and Bracket 6 Assy (52). 53 57 54 55 56 22. remove 1 pan head screw (53: M4x8 W/ SW FW) and Retaining Ring-E (54: E8) to remove Washer (55: 10. Remove Blade Roller (13) from Developer Unit. Clean Blade Roller if it gets dirt. Bracket 7 Assy (59).20. 50 52 51 21. On the driving side. On the electrode plate side.5t).1x16x0.

59 58 (2) Note the reinstallation direction. electrode plate side driving side (2) Seal 1 (60) on each side should be seated in position along the boss (61). 60 61 out of position 0 Correct Wrong 5-60 K116sm5e7 .NOTE (1) During locating toward (A) then (B). be careful not to damage Sheet (58) and Sheet 2 (59) on Blade Roller shaft. The longer shaft should be placed to the driving side.

check that neither Scraper (62) nor Seal 1 (60) flips up on both sides. Reinstall Scraper Assembly (8). vacuum the toner around the contact point against Blade Roller (13). 62 60 (3) Tighten the screws (7) with pushing Scraper Assembly (8) to the arrow direction to be close to Blade Roller. 31. This will prevent a proper pressurization. NOTE (1) For Scraper Assembly and Blade Roller. please reinstall Scraper Assembly first and then locate Blade Roller in position later. Vacuum toner stuck around the contact area 13 14 NOTE If some toner remains on the surface of Roller Developer. 8 7 7 5-61 K116sm5e7 .23. the toner will cushion the pressure by Blade Roller. On Developer Roller (14). This will avoid making Scraper’s edge waving. (2) After reinstalling Scraper Assembly.

(Scraper Assembly omitted in the right picture) 60 A B 13 (2) During locating toward (A) then (B). then push on the electrode plate side (B). it should be pressed onto Roller Developer (14) at the later step.25. NOTE (1) Push Blade Roller (13) against Seal 1 (A) on the driving side to hold and keep its original position. check that Scraper (62) is not wavy. (4) After locating. Now Blade Roller (13) has been located in position. Sheet 2 (59) are not damaged or deformed. 14 13 14 13 not pressurized 5-62 pressurized K116sm5e7 . Sheet (58). Reinstall Blade Roller. check that Seal 1 (60). 59 13 58 (3) After locating. be careful not to damage Sheet (58) and Sheet 2 (59) on Blade Roller shaft. 62 61 13 (5) Blade Roller (13) is pressed onto / released from Developer Roller (14) by Bracket 4 (on the driving side) and Bracket 5 (on the electrode plate side).

With pressing. Make sure that the 6 screws (46) (53) (32) (50) are installed loose. 46 32 53 28. Replace all the components except Gear Helical 30T (10) and Hopper Assy (3) in position. tighten 2 screws (46) to secure Bracket 5 (16).26. 32 15 32 5-63 K116sm5e7 . On the electrode plate side. On the driving side. tighten 2 screws (32) to secure Bracket 4 (15). fully press down the top of Bracket 4 (15). 27. With pressing. fully press down the top of Bracket 5 (16). 50 46 16 46 29.

53 spring washer on (53) released 32. Turn the screw (53) in just enough revolution to thrust its spring washer. Otherwise proper and even pressurization of Blade Roller between both the sides may be failed. 50 spring washer on (50) held held 33. Turn the screw (50) in just enough revolution to hold its spring washer. 53 spring washer on (53) thrust held 5-64 thrust K116sm5e7 .30. and this will make the toner layer on Developer Roller get thicker than required. Turn the screw (50) in just enough revolution to thrust its spring washer. Turn the screw (53) in just enough revolution to hold its spring washer. 50 spring washer on (50) released held NOTE Do not tighten the screw (50) (53 on the next step) firmly at this time. 31.

10 12 5-65 K116sm5e7 . 53 57 36. 50 52 NOTE Do not tighten the screw (50) (53) quickly at this time. On the driving side. Slowly tighten the screw (50) to secure Bracket 6 Assy (52). and this will make the toner layer on Developer Roller get thicker than required. Slowly tighten the screw (53) to secure Bracket 7 Assy (57).34. Parallel Pin. 35. Gear Helical 30T (10) and Retaining Ring-E to Blade Roller shaft. reinstall Collar 3 (12). Otherwise proper and even pressurization of Blade Roller between both the sides may be failed.

Replace the Hopper Assembly (4) and connect the connector (2). 38. Retry to pressurize the Blade Roller in the correct way in this case. 63 NOTE If the pressures of Blade Roller on either or both sides are weaker than required. the toner layer on the Developer Unit will be much thicker than required when you rotate the Roller Developer. Install Developer Handle (63) to Developer Roller shaft. 4 2 5-66 K116sm5e7 .37. Rotate Developer Roller several times so that the roller surface is covered with the toner.

2 2 3.5. 1 Fuser Unit Removal of Fuser Unit 1. 3 5. 1 2. Remove 2 screws (2). Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 3. Remove 4 screws (3). 3 3 5-67 K116sm5e8 .

4 4 5. Disconnect 4 connectors (7). Remove 5 screws (4).4. Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 5 6 6. 7 7 5-68 K116sm5e8 .

Loosen 1 screw (12) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine. Open Cover Assembly (11). 2427 13 5-69 K116sm5e8 . With Engine Unit open. 9 10 8 8. Remove the screws (9) (10) to remove both Bracket (8). 12 11 9. remove Fuser Unit (13). There are 2 pieces of Bracket (8) on the back of the machine.7.

If the gears on Fuser Unit and Pulley (14) do not move together. rotate Pulley (14) again to obtain the correct engagement. mount Fuser Unit (13) to the machine. 12 11 13 (5) Replace Cover Assembly (11). Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 5-70 K116sm5e8 . rotate Pulley (14) counterclockwise to check the gear engagement between Fuser Unit and the machine. Close Engine Unit. (1) With Engine Unit open. the connectors (7). follow the instruction below. gears 13 14 13: Cover Assembly omitted 14 (3) Install Bracket (8) with the screws (9) (10). (2) On the left side of the machine. 9 8 10 (4) Open Cover Assembly (11) and tighten the screw (12) to fix Fuser Unit (13) to the machine. the engagement may fail. With pushing Fuser Unit (13) to the machine inside.NOTE To reinstall Fuser Unit.

Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit.5. This section shows how to replace all of them in one sequent operation. 2 Replacement of Fuser Unit Components NOTE The following parts are Fuser Unit components. Item Roller Fusing Bush Nail Stripping (Upper) Nail Lower Number of article 1 2 13 6 Remarks All of these parts are contained in “Fuser Maintenance Kit” (Z160980040) 1. 3 3 5-71 K116sm5e8 . 3. Remove 2 screws (2). Remove 4 screws (3). 2 2 3. A periodic replacement for them is recommended. 1 2.

4. Remove 5 screws (4). Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). Loosen 1 screw (9) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine. 9 8 5-72 K116sm5e8 . 7 7 7. 4 4 5. Open Cover Assembly (8). Disconnect 4 connectors (7). 5 6 6.

Remove the 4x6 screw (12) to remove each Nail Stripping Assembly (13). which is a symmetric part of Plate (11). 9.8. Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly. (2) There is the Plate 2 on the right side of machine. 10 11 NOTE (1) Please remove the Plate (11) while holding Cover Assembly (8). You may remove it instead of Plate (11). Remove the Cover Assembly (8). 8 8 10. Remove 1 screw (10: M4x6) to remove Plate (11) on the left side. 13 13 12 5-73 K116sm5e8 .

Remove the screws (16) to remove both Bracket (15). Disassemble the Nail Stripping Assembly as the following photo. 17 17 5-74 K116sm5e8 . remove Fuser Unit (71). Replace the Nail Stripping (14) with the new one. There are 2 pieces of the bracket (15) on the back of the machine. With Engine Unit open.11. 14 12. 16 16 15 13.

If the gears on Fuser Unit and Pulley (18) do not move together. rotate Pulley (18) again to obtain the correct engagement. mount Fuser Unit (17) to the machine. gears 17 18 17: Cover Assembly omitted 18 (3) Install Bracket (15) with the screws (16). 9 17 (5) Replace Cover Assembly (8). 16 15 16 (4) Tighten the screw (9) to fix Fuser Unit (17) to the machine. (1) With Engine Unit open. rotate Pulley (18) counterclockwise to check the gear engagement between Fuser Unit and the machine. Close Engine Unit. With pushing Fuser Unit (17) to the machine inside. Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). (2) On the left side of the machine.NOTE To reinstall Fuser Unit. the connectors (7). the engagement may fail. 5-75 K116sm5e8 . follow the instruction below.

15. Remove Cover (23) on both sides of Roller Fusing. Remove 2 screws (22) to release the connector brackets. 22 20 21 19 20 22 21 19 16. Remove 4 screws (20) to release IR Lamps (21). Gently pull IR Lamps (24: red) (25: white) toward either way to remove them. 23 23 24 24 25 25 5-76 K116sm5e8 . Disconnect the connectors (19).

IR Lamps will be broken because of the vibration or heat. One with red connectors (24) should be installed to the media entrance side. 26 27 5-77 K116sm5e8 . When the bubbles of both IR Lamps touch each other.NOTE (1) Do not touch the glass part of the Lamp with a bare hand. On the connector side. cross section of bubble part Correct Correct Wrong: touching 17. and the other with white connectors (25) to the media exit side. or please install the IR Lamps so that the bubbles will be located far from each other. 25 24 24 25 exit entrance entrance exit (3) There is a bubble on the glass part of IR Lamp. (2) Do not interchange the IR Lamps. Make sure to make these bubbles face to the other directions. remove 1 screw (26) to release Bracket 10 Assy (27).

Remove 2 screws (34) to remove Bracket 6 Assy (35). On both sides. On the connector side. Disconnect the harness (33). remove 4 grip rings (28) to remove Arm 4 (29) and Arm 3 (30). 28 29 30 28 19. remove 1 screw (31) to remove Cover 2 (32). 33 31 20. 32 34 35 35 5-78 K116sm5e9 .18.

39 38 23. 40 40 5-79 K116sm5e9 . 36 37 22.21. Remove 2 screws (38) to remove Bracket 7 Assy (39). Remove 2 screws (40) on the media exit side. remove 1 screw (36) to remove Bracket 20 (37). On the gear side.

(2) The 2 positioning bosses locate the bracket. (1) Fully push to slide the bracket to the arrow direction so that the fold portion on the bracket will fit into the notch on Fuser Upper Unit. loosen 1 screw (43) to release Bracket 3 (44). 42 42 41 25.24. 44 44 43 NOTE Reinstall Bracket 2 (42) and Bracket 3 (44) in the correct position. On the connector side. On the gear side. fold boss 5-80 K116sm5e9 . The bracket should not ride over them. loosen 1 screw (41) to release Bracket 2 (42).

26. On the media entrance side. 45 46 27. 48 49 5-81 K116sm5e9 . remove Retaining Ring-E (48) to remove Gear 30T (49). 28. Turn Fuser Upper Unit (47) to the back. Lift Fuser Upper Unit (47) upward to remove it. remove 2 screws (45) to release Thermostat Bracket (46). 47 47 NOTE Place Fuser Upper Unit in the direction as removed for protecting Thermostat / Thermistor. On the gear side of Fuser Upper Unit.

29. Remove Stopper (50) to remove Gear 60T (51). 51 50 50 51

30. Remove 2 screws (52) to remove Bearing Holder (53).

52 53

31. On the connector side of Fuser Upper Unit, remove 2 screws (54) to remove Bearing Holder (55).

54

55

32. On both sides, remove Bush (56). Replace Bush with new ones.

56

56

5-82

K116sm5e9

33. Remove Roller Fusing (57).

57

57

NOTE
Install Roller Fusing to the frame in the correct direction. One end with a cutting should be place to the gear side.

cutting

34. Remove 1 screw (58) to remove Collar (59) from Roller Fusing (60). Replace Roller Fusing with a new one. 60 59

58

5-83

K116sm5e9

35. On the media exit side of Fuser Lower Unit, remove 2 screws (61) to remove Guide Plate 2 Assy (62).

61

61

62

62

36. Remove 1 screw (63) to remove each Nail Lower Assy (64). 63 64

5-84

K116sm5e9

37. Turn Nail Lower (65) to remove it from the bracket. Replace Nail Lower with a new one.

65

65

5-85

K116sm5e9

5. 3. 3

Replacement of Roller Pressure

1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit.

1 2. Remove 2 screws (2).

2

2

3. Remove 4 screws (3).

3

3

4. Remove 5 screws (4).

4 4

5-86

K116sm5eA

5. Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6).

5

6

6. Disconnect 4 connectors (7).

7

7

7. Open Cover Assembly (8). Loosen 1 screw (9) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine.

9

8

5-87

K116sm5eA

8. Remove 1 screw (10: M4x6) to remove Plate (11) on the left side.

10

11

NOTE
(1) Please remove the Plate (11) while holding Cover Assembly (8). Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly. (2) There is the Plate 2 on the right side of machine, which is a symmetric part of Plate (11). You may remove it instead of Plate (11). 9. Remove the Cover Assembly (8).

8 8

5-88

K116sm5eA

10. There are 2 pieces of the brackets (12) on the back of the machine. Remove the screws (13) (14) to remove both Bracket (12).

14

13

12

11. With Engine Unit open, remove Fuser Unit (15).

15

15

5-89

K116sm5eA

NOTE
To reinstall Fuser Unit, follow the instruction below. (1) With Engine Unit open, mount Fuser Unit (15) to the machine. (2) On the left side of the machine, rotate Pulley (16) counterclockwise to check the gear engagement between Fuser Unit and the machine. If the gears on Fuser Unit and Pulley (16) do not move together, the engagement may fail. With pushing Fuser Unit (15) to the machine inside, rotate Pulley (16) again to obtain the correct engagement. gears

15 16

15:
Cover Assembly omitted

16

(3) Install Bracket (12) with the screws (13) (14). 13 12

14

(4) Tighten the screw (9) to fix Fuser Unit to the machine.

9

15

(5) Replace Cover Assembly (8), the connectors (7), Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). Close Engine Unit.

5-90

K116sm5eA

12. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (17) to release Bracket 10 Assy (18).

17

18

13. On the connector side, remove 1 screw (19) to remove Cover 2 (20). Disconnect the harness (21).

21 19 20

14. Remove 2 screws (22) on the media exit side.

22

22

5-91

K116sm5eA

15. On both sides, remove 4 grip rings (23) to remove Arm 4 (24) and Arm 3 (25).

24 23

23

25

16. On the connector side, loosen 1 screw (26) to release Bracket 2 (27). 27 27

26

17. On the gear side, loosen 1 screw (28) to release Bracket 3 (29). 29 29

28

5-92

K116sm5eA

NOTE
Reinstall Bracket 2 (27) and Bracket 3 (29) in the correct position. (1) Fully push the bracket to the arrow direction so that the fold portion on the bracket will fit into the notch on Fuser Upper Unit. (2) The 2 positioning bosses locate the bracket. The bracket should not ride over them. fold

boss

18. Turn Fuser Upper Unit (30) to the back. Lift Fuser Upper Unit upward to remove it.

30

30

NOTE
Place Fuser Upper Unit in the direction as removed for protecting Thermostat/Thermistor.

5-93

K116sm5eA

19. On the media exit side of Fuser Lower Unit, remove 2 screws (31) to remove Guide Plate 2 Assy (32).

31

31

32

32

20. Remove 2 screws (33) to remove Washer (34) and Guide Plate (35). 34

33

33

35

NOTE
When reassembling, make sure that the holes of Guide Plate fit the bosses on the frame.

5-94

K116sm5eA

21. Remove Retaining Ring-C (37) to remove Collar (38) (39: only on the gear side). Bearing (40) from each shaft end of Roller Pressure (41). Remove Pressure Roller Assy (36) from the unit. Replace Roller Pressure with a new one. 36 22. (gear side) (connector side) 37 37 39 37 38 40 41 40 38 37 5-95 K116sm5eA .

5. 3. Release the harness from the clapms (6). 2 5 3 4 2 3. 6 5-95 K116sm5eB . Release the harness from the clamps (2). 4 Replacement of Thermistor (TH1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. black) from Bracket 10 Assy (5). 3. 1 1 2. TH2) 1. Remove the connector (3: TH1. white) (4: TH2. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit] on the page 5-67.

7 8 9 5. short harness). 10 11 5-96 K116sm5eB . Remove 1 screw (7) to release Thermistor 3 Assy (8: TH1. NOTE Be careful of the direction of Thermistor when reassembling. long harness) and Thermistor Assy (9: TH3.4. Remove Thermistor form the bracket. Replace Thermistor or Thermistor 3 with a new one. The projection (10) nearer to the harness should be inserted to the positioning hole (11).

3. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit] on the page 5-61. Replace the Thermostat (5) with the new one. 4 4 5 5-97 K116sm5eB .5. Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (2) to remove Thermostat Assy (3). 3 2 3. 5 Replacement of Thermostat 1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. Remove 2 pieces of 3x4 screw (4) to remove the Thermostat (5). 1 2. 3.

2 2 3. 6 Replacement of Exit Sensor 1. 1 2. 3 3 4. 4 4 5-98 K116sm5eB . 3. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. Remove 4 screws (3). Remove 5 screws (4). Remove 2 screws (2).5.

5 6 6. Loosen 1 screw (9) fixing Fuser Unit inside the machine. 7 7 7.5. Disconnect 4 connectors (7). Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). Open Cover Assembly (8). 9 8 5-99 K116sm5eB .

(2) There is the Plate 2 on the right side of machine. Remove the Cover Assembly (8). Remove 1 screw (10: M4x6) to remove Plate (11) on the left side. Otherwise you may drop the Cover Assembly. 10 11 NOTE (1) Please remove the Plate (11) while holding Cover Assembly (8). 8 8 5-100 K116sm5eB . You may remove it instead of Plate (11).8. which is a symmetric part of Plate (11). 9.

Remove Exit Sensor (15) form Exit Sensor Assy (14). 12 14 13 15 5-101 K116sm5eB . Remove the harness (12) and remove the screw (13) to remove Exit Sensor Assy (14). Replace Exit Sensor with a new one.10.

1 2. Remove 4 screws (2) to remove Cover 1 (3). Draw out the Roll Deck (1). hook 5-102 K116sm5eC . 1 Roll Deck Replacement of Cutter Assembly 1. 2 3 NOTE Make sure to insert the hooking part to the slit as the following photo when you put back the Cover 1 (3).5. 4 5. 4.

step 5 frame 5. 6 7 5-103 K116sm5eC . 4 5 4 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (5) is inside the bottom frame.4. Open the wire saddle (6) and disconnect the connector (7) to release the harness. Remove 7 screws (4) to remove Cover 14 (5).

Replace Cutter Assy with a new one. If you put it with the Cutter Motor down. Good No good (2) There is the Height Guide (10) on the right side. 9 8 NOTE (1) Put the Cutter Assembly with the Cutter Motor up. Remove 2 screws on the front (8) to remove Cutter Assy (9). you will break the Cutter Motor Harness.6. Harness may be broken. 11 10 5-104 K116sm5eC . Please fix the Cutter Assembly aligning the plate (11) and the central line of Height Guide (10) each other.

step 3 frame 5-105 K116sm5eC . CL5) of Roll 1 1. 4. 1 2. 2 Replacement of Clutches (CL3. Remove 7 screws (2) to remove Cover 14 (3). Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2 3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (3) is inside the bottom frame.5. CL4.

Remove Retaining Ring-C (4) and disconnect the harness (5) to remove each Clutch (6: CL3) or Clutch (7: CL4). Replace Clutch with a new one. 4 6 5 4 7 5 6. 9 8 10 10 5-106 K116sm5eC .3. Remove 2 screws (8) and disconnect the harness (9) to remove Clutch (10: CL5). 7 4. Replace Clutch with a new one.

3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 16 (3) is inside the bottom frame. step 3 frame 5-107 K116sm5eC . Remove 3 screws (2) to remove Cover 16 (3). CL7) of Roll 2 1. Draw out the Roll Deck (1).5. 3 Replacement of Clutches (CL6. 1 2. 4.

3. 9 8 7 9 5-108 K116sm5eC . Replace Clutch with a new one. 6 5 4 6 4. Remove 2 screws (4) and disconnect the harness (5) to remove Clutch (6: CL6). Replace Clutch with a new one. Remove 2 screws (7) and disconnect the harness (8) to remove Clutch (9: CL7).

step 3 frame 5-109 K116sm5eC . 4 Replacement of Timing Belt 633 1. 4. Remove 7 screws (2) to remove Cover 14 (3).5. Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2 3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (3) is inside the bottom frame. 1 2.

4 5 5 6 6 4. 7 8 5. 10 9 9 5-110 K116sm5eC . Remove 4 screws (9) to remove Bracket 33 (10). Open 6 wire saddles (4) and release 4 connectors (5) to release the harness (6).3. Remove Retaining Ring-C (7) to remove Clutch (8: CL4).

Loosen 1 screw (13) to release Pulley 3 (14). Remove Timing Belt 633 (15). 12 11 7.6. Replace Timing Belt 633 with a new one. 16 14 5-111 K116sm5eC . tighten the screw (14). 13 15 14 14 15 NOTE You do not have to adjust the belt tension. As the Spring Coil 12 (16) gives a proper tension to the Timing Belt 480. Remove 3 screws (11) to remove Bracket 32 (12).

1 2. 4. 2 2 3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 22 (3) is inside the bottom frame. 5 Replacement of Timing Belt 453 1. Remove 7 screws (2) to remove Cover 22 (3). step frame 3 5-112 K116sm5eC . Draw out the Roll Deck (1).5.

tighten the screw (4). Move Pulley 3 (5) upward and fix it the screw (4) to release Timing Belt 453. Loosen 1 screw (4) to release Pulley 3 (5).3. 4 9 5-113 K116sm5eC . 5 4 4. Replace Timing Belt 453 (8) with a new one. 7 5 8 6 8 NOTE You do not have to adjust the belt tension. Remove 2 screws (6) to remove Bracket 12 (7). As the Spring Coil 11 (9) gives a proper tension to the Timing Belt 480.

2 2 3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 22 (3) is inside the bottom frame. Replace Timing Belt 330 with a new one. Remove Timing Belt 330 (6). step frame 3 3. Remove Retaining Ring-E (4) to remove Collar (5). Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 1 2. Remove 7 screws (2) to remove Cover 22 (3). 6 4 6 5 K116sm5eC 5-114 . 6 Replacement of Timing Belt 330 1.5. 4.

PH7. PH9. 7 Replacement of Sensor (PH6. Draw out the Roll Deck (1). Remove a roll media if mounted. 1 2.5. Remove 8 screws (4) to remove Plate (5). PH12) 1. 2 3 3. Remove 1 screw (2) to release the sensor bracket. 4. 4 5 4 5-115 K116sm5eD . Remove and replace Sensor (3: PH6) with a new one.

Remove and replace Sensor (9: PH7) with a new one. Remove 1 screw (8) to release the sensor bracket. 6 7 5.4. Remove 1 screw (6) to release the sensor bracket. Remove and replace Sensor (7: PH12) with a new one. 9 8 5-116 K116sm5eD .

6. Remove 1 screw (10) to release the sensor bracket. Remove and replace Sensor (11: PH9) with a new one. 11 10 5-117 K116sm5eD .

Remove 1 screw (4) and disconnect the harness (5). 2 3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (3) is inside the bottom frame. step 3 frame 3. 1 2. 6 5 4 5-118 K116sm5eD . Remove and replace Sensor (6: PH8) with a new one.5. Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 8 Replacement of Sensor (PH8) 1. 4. Remove 7 screws (2) to remove Cover 14 (3).

9 Replacement of Sensor (PH10) 1. 1 2. 5 6 4 5-119 K116sm5eD . 3 2 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 16 (3) is inside the bottom frame.5. Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 4. Remove 1 screw (4) and disconnect the harness (5). Remove 3 screws (2) to remove Cover (3). step 3 frame 3. Remove and replace Sensor (6: PH10) with a new one.

1 2. Remove a roll media if mounted. 2 3. 10 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 1) 1. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle. Remove 2 screws (3) to remove Cover 15 (4). 3 4 5-120 K116sm5eD .5. 4. Draw out the Roll Deck (1).

5 5 6 5 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 22 (6) is inside the bottom frame. Remove 7 screws (5) to remove Cover 22 (6).4. step frame 6 5. Disconnect 1 connector (7). 7 5-121 K116sm5eD .

Move Heater Assy 1 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it. Remove 2 screws (10) and 1 connector (11) from each Resistor (12). Remove 6 screws (8). 8 9 8 9 7. Replace Resistor with a new one. 12 10 12 11 10 10 11 5-122 K116sm5eD .6.

Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle. 2 5-123 K116sm5eD . 2 3. 1 2. Remove 2 screws (3). Remove a roll media if mounted. Draw out the Roll Deck (1).5. 4. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the far end. 11 Replacement of Dehumidify Heater (Roll 2) 1. 3 4.

5. Remove 1 screw (6) to move Cover 7 (7). 6 7 7 7. 4 5 6. Disconnect 1 connector (8). 8 5-124 K116sm5eD . Remove 2 screws (4) to remove Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5).

Move Cover 4 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it. 10 11 11 5-125 K116sm5eD . Move Case Assy (11) to the arrow direction to remove it. Remove 3 screws (10).8. 9 9 9.

Disconnect 1 connector (12). 12 12 13 13 5-126 K116sm5eD . Remove 2 screws (13). Remove and replace Resistor with a new one.10.

4.5. Confirm the following parts are included in the kit. 4. 1 Installation of Dehumidify Heater Kit (Optional in the US) Installation of 1 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N :Z168080040) 1. Item Case Assy Number of article 1 Item 4x6 Bind Screw Number of article 10 Bush 2 Bracket 23 Assy 1 Snap Band 3 Bracket Connector 2 Assy 1 Switch Label Label 1 1 Switch 1 4x6 Bind Screw (Fe+Ni) Tooth Washer 2 5-127 K116sm5eE . 12.12 5.

1 3. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle.2. 2 4. Draw out the Roll Deck (1). Remove 2 screws (3) to remove Cover 15 (4). Remove a roll media if mounted. 3 4 5-128 K116sm5eE .

Install Case Assy (5) to Roll Deck with 6 Bind Head Screws (6).5. 5 6 5 6 5-129 K116sm5eE .

6. Remove 7 screws (7) to remove Cover 22 (8). 10 9 5-130 K116sm5eE . 4 7. step frame 8 8. Remove 2 screws (9) to remove Cover 9 (10). Replace Cover 15 (4). 7 7 8 7 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 22 (8) is inside the bottom frame.

Attach 2 Bush (11) to the square holes on the right side of Roll Deck. 13 12 10. 11 rear front 10. Put the harness (12) of Bracket 23 Assy (13) through the rear bush to the bottom side. Install Bracket 23 Assy (13) with 2 Bind Head Screws (14). Put the harness (12) through the front bush to the upper side. front 12 5-131 K116sm5eE .9. 13 14 12.

13. 17 15. Connect J109 connector (15) to the connector of Heater Assy 1 (16). 18 5-132 K116sm5eE . Replace Cover 9 (10). Pull up the Lever 2 (18) to open the Engine Unit. 10 16. Tie the harness firmly with the snap bands (17). 16 15 15 14.

19 19 19 20 18. Remove 2 screws (21: M3x6) to remove Cover 5 (22). 21 22 5-133 K116sm5eE . Remove 5 screws (19) to remove Cover 3 (20).17.

19. Install Bracket Connector 2 Assy (23) with 2 Bind Head Screws (24). Install Switch (27) to the square hole.) 27 25 26 25 27 26 27 5-134 K116sm5eE . Apply Switch Label (25) and Label (26). 23 23 24 20. (The white dot should be upside.

31 30 23. Put the harness (28) of Bracket Connector 2 Assy through the square hole from rear to front. Fix the ground wires (30) with 2 Tooth Washer Screws (31). Replace all the parts in position. 5-135 K116sm5eE . 28 29 28 22.21. Connect the connectors (29).

Confirm the following parts are included in the kit. Item Case Assy Number of article 1 Item Bush Number of article 1 AC Paper Harness 2 1 4x6 Bind Screw 3 2. 1 3. Remove a roll media if mounted. Draw out the Roll Deck (1). 2 5-136 K116sm5eE . 4. Move Slide Guide (2) toward the middle. 2 Installation of 2 Roll Dehumidify Kit (P/N :Z168080050) 1. 12.5.

Move Slide Guide (2) toward the far end. 6 7 7 5-137 K116sm5eE . Remove 2 screws (3). 4 5 7.4. 2 6. 3 5. Remove 2 screws (4) to remove Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5). Remove 1 screw (6) to move Cover 7 (7).

9 9 9.8. 10 11 10 5-138 K116sm5eE . Move Cover 4 (9) to the arrow direction to remove it. Install Case Assy (10) to Roll Deck with 3 Bind Head Screws (11).

Attach Bush (14) to the square holes on the right side of Roll Deck.10. Remove 7 screws (12) to remove Cover 22 (13). 12 12 13 12 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 22 (13) is inside the bottom frame. 5 9 11. 14 14 5-139 K116sm5eE . step frame 13 12. Replace Cover 4 (9) and Slide Guide 2 R Assy (5).

5-140 K116sm5eE . Pass AC Paper Harness 2 (15) through and connect its J125 connector to the connector (16). Please connect “J125” to the connector. Replace all the parts in position.13. 16 15 NOTE There are labels at both sides of the AC Paper Harness 2. 14. 17 15. Connect the other end of AC Paper Harness 2 to the connector (17) of Case Assy.

5.5. it is possible to add one more unit optionally. If your KIP 3100 is installed with only one unit. Confirm the following parts are included in the kit. 1.13 Installation of Roll Deck 2 Kit (Optional in the US) It is possible to install two Roll Deck Units to the KIP 3100 in maximum.058)] on the page 8-60. NOTE After installing the Kit it is necessary to make the KIP 3100 recognize the Roll Deck 2 in the Service Mode.31 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No. 4. which you can do in the Item Number 058 of the Adjustment Mode.4. Refer to [8. Item Roll Deck 2 Drive Assy Number of article 1 Item Roll Deck 2 Assy Number of article 1 Guide Plate 1 Bracket 7 1 Bracket 9 Assy 1 Bracket 45 Assy 1 Spring 11 Bracket 5 Assy 1 Timing Belt 453 1 1 5-141 K116sm5eF .

1 2. 2 2 5-142 K116sm5eF . Pull up Lever 2 (1) to open Engine Unit.Item Bracket 12 Number of article 1 Item Cover 16 Number of article 1 Bind Head Screw (M4x6) 26 Cap Assy 2 The machine will have the same 4 Cap Assy totally. 1. Remove 2 screws (2) on the front.

Close Engine Unit.3. Remove 4 screws (3) on the sides. 5-143 K116sm5eF . 5 6 6. Remove 5 screws (4) on the rear. 4 4 5. 3 3 4. Remove Cover 2 (5) and Cover 14 (6).

Draw out the Roll Deck (7). Turn Bracket 26 (10) on the screw (9) in a 180 degree arc like the arrow direction. 9 9 10 10 5-144 K116sm5eF . 7 8.7. Remove a roll media if mounted. 9 9 8 8 9. Remove 1 screw (8) and loosen 1 screw (9) on each side.

You can not open the Roll Deck so widely in this situation because the Stopper restricts to do so. Fix Bracket 26 in the free position with the screws (8) (9). You can open the Roll Deck widely in this situation.NOTE This is the “limited position” of Bracket 26 (10). Limited position vacant 10 This is the “free position” of Bracket 26 (10). 8 8 9 9 5-145 K116sm5eF . Free position 10 vacant 10.

step 12 frame 12. 11 12 11 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 14 (12) is inside the bottom frame.11. Remove 7 screws (13) to remove Cover 22 (14). Remove 7 screws (11) to remove Cover 14 (12). step frame 14 5-146 K116sm5eF . 13 13 14 13 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 22 (14) is inside the bottom frame.

16 15 NOTE Make sure to insert the hooking part (17) to the slit as the following photo when you put back the Cover 1.13. Remove 4 screws (15) to remove Cover 1 (16). 17 5-147 K116sm5eF .

18 18 NOTE Be careful not to hit the gear (19) to the cutting on the frame. 20 5-148 K116sm5eF . Mount Roll Deck 2 Drive Assy (18) onto the railing at the front bottom of Roll Deck. Secure Roll Deck 2 Drive Assy with 2 Bind Head Screws (20).14. 19 15.

Mount Roll Deck 2 Assy (23) to the rails of the back of Roll Deck 1. 24 24 5-149 K116sm5eF . Remove 1 screw (21) to remove Cover 7 (22) from Roll Deck 2 Assy (23). Secure Roll Deck 2 Assy to the rails with 2 Bind Head Screws (24) from the upper. 21 23 22 17.16. 23 23 18.

21 22 22 20. 25 25 Left: from rear Right: from front 21. 27 27 26 5-150 K116sm5eF . Install Cover 7 (22) to the original position with the screw (21). secure it to the rear frame of Roll Deck 1 with 2 Bind Head Screws (25). Install Guide Plate (26) on the joint of the decks and fix it with 8 Bind Head Screws (27). Pushing Roll Deck 2 Assy toward the front.19.

22. Install Bracket 9 Assy (30) on the left side with 2 Bind Head Screws (31) 31 30 5-151 K116sm5eF . 28 29 23. Install Bracket 7 (28) with 1 Bind Head Screw (29).

37 36 5-152 K116sm5eF . fix it with the screw (34). Connect the harness (32) on Roll Deck 2 Assy to the connector of the rail. Install Bracket 45 Assy (33) with 1 Bind Head Screw (34). Hook Spring 11 (35) on between Bracket 45 Assy (33) and the latch.24. With pushing the pulley upward. Place Bracket 5 Assy (36) and route Timing Belt 453 (37) on the gears. 32 25. 34 33 35 34 26.

38 36 38 38 28.27. Install Bracket 12 (39) to the gears with 2 Bind Head Screws (40). Loosen the screw (34) to apply tension to Timing Belt 453 (37). 34 34 37: slack 37: tensioned 5-153 K116sm5eF . After tensioning. Secure Bracket 5 Assy (36) with 3 Bind Head Screws (38). tighten the screw (34). 39 40 29.

058)] on the page 8-60. Refer to [8. Replace all the removed parts in position.31 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No. 5-154 K116sm5eF .4. NOTE After installing the Kit it is necessary to make the KIP 3100 recognize the Roll Deck 2 in the Service Mode.30. Install Cover 16 (41) with 3 Bind Head Screws (42). which you can do in the Item Number 058 of the Adjustment Mode.5. 42 41 NOTE Make sure that the step part on the bottom side of Cover 16 (41) is inside the bottom frame. step 41 frame 31.

5 5. Remove the screws (2) at both sides. Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides. 2 2 3. 3 3 5-155 K116sm5eG .5. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 5. 1 2. 1 Photoconductive Drum Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum 1.

(2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 4 4 5. 5 6 6. Remove the Guides 3 (7).4. 7 5-156 K116sm5eG . Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 7. Close the Engine Unit. Remove 5 pieces of screw (4) at both sides.

12 5-157 K116sm5eG . Open the Cover 4 (12). 10. Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (11) together. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9). 11 10 11 NOTE Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (11) in the way the above picture shows.8. 8 9 8 9. and open the wire saddles (11) to release the harness. Disconnect the connector (10).

Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. which lock the LED Head Frame. 15 14 13.11. 13 13 14 12. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. 16 17 Lock position Unlock position 5-158 K116sm5eG .

18 NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. 15. 20 5-159 K116sm5eG . Open the LED Head Frame (18). Pull up the Lever 2 (20) to open the Engine Unit. 19 Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you will close the LED Head Frame.14.

24 5-160 K116sm5eG . It will be strained if you close the Engine Unit. Remove the 4x6 screw (21).16. 21 22 23 NOTE The Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed if you open the Engine Unit. and remove the Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23).

So please reuse it.5. 5-161 K116sm5eG . Refer to [5. 25 NOTE The new (spare) Drum Assembly does not include the Collar (25).17. There are 2 pieces of screw (26) on the left which fix the Block (27). Loosen these screws (26) and rotate the Block (27) as the arrow marks. 26 27 NOTE Loosen the screws (26) and (28: to be introduced in the next step) in a quarter turn to release Block (27). An excess turn will prevent Block form efficient relocation.2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks] on page 5-163. Remove the Collar (25) from the left Drum Shaft. 18.

and replace it with the new one. 28 29 20. Therefore it is necessary to re-position them correctly after replacing the Photoconductive Drum.2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks] on the page 5-163. 5-162 K116sm5eG .5. Remove the Photoconductive Drum (30). Please fix them making reference to [5. 30 NOTE The Aluminium Block (27) and (29) maintain the focus of the LED Head.19. Similarly loosen 2 pieces of screw (28) on the right and rotate the Block 2 (29) as the arrow marks.

Good (Gray looks uniform) No good (Gray looks not uniform) Density of halftone is different among image blocks. 2 How to fix the Aluminium Blocks There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft.3 to check if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at the correct position. As they maintain the focus of LED Head. fix the Aluminium Blocks properly making reference to the next page.5. If the focus of LED Head is not good. 5-163 K116sm5eG . But the density of halftone is different among image blocks as the following right image if blocks are not fixed correctly (focus is not good). it is necessary to re-position them correctly after replacing the Photoconductive Drum. 5. The density of halftone is uniform as the following left image if the Aluminium Blocks are fixed at the correct positions (focus is good). Aluminium Blocks Print out the Test Pattern No.

b) When you tighten 2 screws (C) (D) to fix each Aluminium Block. 2 4 Drum 1 Left side Aluminium Blocks 3 Right side NOTE The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements.There are Aluminium Blocks (A) (B) at both sides. Tighten in the order as 1 to 4 necessarily. 5-164 K116sm5eG . Refer to the later pages for greater details. a) Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left (A) first and then right (B). Left side Right side A B D C C D Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly. The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. always tighten the lower one (C) first and then the upper one (D). and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (C) (D).

Correct Incorrect (Seen from the top of machine) Space 2. Loosen the screws (2) (3) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (1).1. With holding Block (1). A B A 1 no gap 3 2 1 (Seen from the top of machine) (Seen from the outside of machine) NOTE There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape opening. 1 3 2 5-165 K116sm5eG . This will remove any gap between Block (1) and the side frame of the machine. Rotate the left Block (1) fully to the arrow direction (A: to front) and also press it to the arrow direction (B: to outside). The LED focus will become defective if there is any space. Check that no excessive backlash to sideways appears. tighten the screws (2) (3) just enough turn to fix Block (1) temporarily.

Put the other finger on the pin (5) of the frame. 1 4 4 5 5 C 1 3 2 5-166 K116sm5eG . tighten the lower screw (2) and then the upper screw (3) to secure Block (1). Push the fingers toward each other (C: inside). Note that the entire Block (1) is shifted towards the pin (5) by the finger at the U-shape opening (4).3. Put your finger inside the U-shape opening (4) of Block (1). While pushing and holding.

With holding Block (6). tighten the screws (7) (8) just enough turn to fix Block (6) temporarily. This will remove any gap between Block (6) and the side frame of the machine.4. rotate the right Block (6) fully to the arrow direction (D: to front) and also press it to the arrow direction (E: to outside). Loosen the screws (7) (8) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (6). Similarly to step 1. Check that no excessive backlash to sideways appears. D E D 6 no gap 7 8 6 (Seen from the top of machine) (Seen from the outside of machine) 5. 6 8 7 5-167 K116sm5eG .

9 6 9 10 10 F 6 8 7 7. and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform. While pushing and holding. fix Blocks again. Similarly to step 3. Push the fingers toward each other (F: inside). Print out the Test Pattern No. If it is still not uniform. Note that the entire Block (6) is shifted towards the pin (10) by the finger at the U-shape opening (9).6. tighten the lower screw (7) and then the upper screw (8) to secure Block (6). Good (Gray looks uniform) No good (Gray looks not uniform) 5-168 K116sm5eG .3. put your finger inside the U-shape opening (9) of Block (6) and put the other finger on the pin (10) of the frame.

Put back the Drum to the machine. You will damage the Drum if you wipe in other ways. 6. 3 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum 1. If the toner strongly sticks on the surface and it is impossible to remove it. 2. wipe with the cloth impregnated with the alcohol. 4. NOTE (1) A defective image may be printed right after the cleaning (about 10 to 20 sheets of A0). 1 Replacement of the Photoconductive Drum] on the page 5-155. After using the alcohol. (2) Wipe the surface always to one direction. 5. 5. 5. Good No good No good No good 5-169 K116sm5eG .5. wipe all surface of Drum with a cloth impregnated with water so that there should be no unevenness of cleaning. Wipe the surface of Photoconductive Drum with a dry cloth. Wipe all surface of Drum with a dry cloth. Remove the Photoconductive Drum from the machine making reference to [5. and dry the Drum leaving in a dark place for about 10 minutes. 3. but it will be fixed naturally as the time passes.

Remove the Belt 4 (4). Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 1 2. 5.5. 4 Replacement of Belt 4 1. 5-170 K116sm5eG . Remove 6 screws (2) to remove Cover 2 (3). 4 NOTE Belt 4 is automatically unfastened if only you open the Engine Unit. 2 2 3 2 3.

6. Remove the screws (2) at both sides. 6 5. Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides. 1 LED Head Replacement of the LED Head Unit 1. 1 2. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit.5. 2 2 3. 3 3 5-171 K116sm5eH .

(2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 4 4 5. Remove the Guides 3 (7). Remove 5 pieces of screw (4) at both sides. 7. Close the Engine Unit.4. 5 6 6. Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 7 5-172 K116sm5eH .

and open the wire saddles (11) to release the harness.8. Open the Cover 4 (12). Disconnect the connector (10). Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (11) together. 12 5-173 K116sm5eH . 11 10 11 NOTE Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (11) in the way the above picture shows. 10. 8 9 8 9. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9).

16 17 Lock position Unlock position 5-174 K116sm5eH . Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). 15 14 13.11. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides. which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. 13 13 14 12. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward.

14. Open the LED Head Frame (18). 5-175 K116sm5eH . 18 NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. 19 Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you will close the LED Head Frame.

Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make the Plate (23) enough movable. 23 22 22 5-176 K116sm5eH . because it is a part required only before the delivery of machine. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right. 16.15. 20 21 NOTE You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly.

Then remove the Image Corona Unit (25). 26 5-177 K116sm5eH . Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (24) of Corona Block. Disconnect 3 connectors (26).17. 25 23 25 24 25 18.

2 LED focus adjustment] on the page 5-179. Replace the LED Head Unit (29) with the new one. and then slide the whole unit to the right.19. 5-178 K116sm5eH . 6. Remove the screw (27) to remove the Bracket 2 (28). Refer to [5. 29 29 NOTE It is necessary to check and adjust the focus of LED Head after its replacement. 27 28 20. Move the right end of LED Head Unit (29) a little to the front side.

and check its halftone image. 6. Adjust the focus by the following 3 steps. Good No good (Adjustment is required. 2 Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks] on the next page in this case.5. 2. Also adjust it if you have lost the correct focus by some reason.) Density of halftone is different among image blocks. Go to [5. 6. 1 Check of the Test Pattern Image Print out the Test Pattern No. (1) Check of the Test Pattern Image (2) Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks (3) Focus Adjustment with Spacers 5. 2 LED focus adjustment Please adjust the focus of LED Head after the replacement of LED Head. it is necessary to adjust the focus. you do not have to make anything because the focus is correctly adjusted. If the density of halftone is uniform as the following left image. 6. But it is different among image blocks as the following right image.3 in the Service Mode. 2. 5-179 K116sm5eH .

2. at first it is necessary to place them at the correct positions in the following way. Remove the screws (2) at both sides. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. Aluminium Blocks 1. 2 Positioning of the Aluminium Blocks There are Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft. 6. If the LED focus is not correct. which adjust the distance between LED Head and Drum.5. 1 2. 2 2 5-180 K116sm5eH .

3. 5-181 K116sm5eH . Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). Remove 5 pieces of screw (4) at both sides. Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides. 5 6 6. 3 3 4. Close the Engine Unit. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 4 4 5.

7. Remove the Guides 3 (7). Open the Cover 4 (12). and open the wire saddles (11) to release the harness. 8 9 8 9. Disconnect the connector (10). 12 5-182 K116sm5eH . Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (11) together. 11 10 11 NOTE Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (11) in the way the above picture shows. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9). 7 8. 10.

13 13 14 12. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides. 16 17 Lock position Unlock position 5-183 K116sm5eH .11. which lock the LED Head Frame. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. 15 14 13. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14).

Pull up the Lever 2 (20) to open the Engine Unit. 20 5-184 K116sm5eH . 19 Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you will close the LED Head Frame.14. 18 NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. 15. Open the LED Head Frame (18).

It will be strained if you close the Engine Unit. and remove the Plate (22) and Pulley Gear (23). 24 5-185 K116sm5eH .16. Remove the 4x6 screw (21). 21 22 23 NOTE The Belt 4 (24) is automatically loosed if you open the Engine Unit.

always tighten the lower one (C) first and then the upper one (D).17. Tighten in the order as 1 to 4 necessarily. The following picture shows the order to tighten the screws. There are Aluminium Blocks (A) (B) at both sides and each of them is fixed with 2 screws (C) (D). b) When you tighten 2 screws (C) (D) to fix each Aluminium Block. Left side Right side A B D C C D Do as follows to fix the Aluminium Blocks correctly. a) Always fix the Aluminium Block of the left (A) first and then right (B). Refer to the later pages for greater details. 5-186 K116sm5eH . 2 4 Drum 1 Left side Aluminium Blocks 3 Right side NOTE The focus of LED Head will become defective if you do not satisfy the above requirements.

17-1. A B A 25 no gap 27 26 25 (Seen from the top of machine) (Seen from the outside of machine) NOTE There should be no space between the Bearing and U-shape notch. Loosen the screws (26) (27) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (25). Check that no excessive backlash to sideways appears. This will remove any gap between Block (25) and the side frame of the machine. tighten the screws (26) (27) just enough turn to fix Block (1) temporarily. The LED focus will become defective if there is any space. Rotate the left Block (25) fully to the arrow direction (A: to front) and also press it to the arrow direction (B: to outside). 25 27 26 5-187 K116sm5eH . With holding Block (25). Correct Incorrect (Seen from the top of machine) Space 17-2.

17-3. tighten the lower screw (26) and then the upper screw (27) to secure Block (25). Note that the entire Block (25) is shifted towards the pin (29) by the finger at the U-shape opening (28). While pushing and holding. Put your finger inside the U-shape opening (28) of Block (25). 25 28 28 29 29 C 25 27 26 5-188 K116sm5eH . Put the other finger on the pin (29) of the frame. Push the fingers toward each other (C: inside).

rotate the right Block (30) fully to the arrow direction (D: to front) and also press it to the arrow direction (E: to outside). With holding Block (30). Similarly to step 17-1.17-4. This will remove any gap between Block (30) and the side frame of the machine. Check that no excessive backlash to sideways appears. tighten the screws (31) (32) just enough turn to fix Block (30) temporarily. D E D 30 32 no gap 31 30 (Seen from the top of machine) (Seen from the outside of machine) 17-5. Loosen the screws (31) (32) in a (approximately) quarter turn to release Block (30). 30 32 31 5-189 K116sm5eH .

Reassemble the machine in the reversed order. Similarly to step 17-3. 5-190 K116sm5eH . put your finger inside the U-shape opening (33) of Block (30) and put the other finger on the pin (34) of the frame.17-6. Note that the entire Block (30) is shifted towards the pin (34) by the finger at the U-shape opening (33). Push the fingers toward each other (F: inside). tighten the lower screw (31) and then the upper screw (32) to secure Block (30). 33 30 33 34 34 F 30 32 31 18. While pushing and holding.

3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers There may be the case that the focus of LED is not correct even if you have placed the Aluminium Blocks at both sides of the Drum Shaft correctly. Print out the Test Pattern No. 3 Focus Adjustment with Spacers] on the next section in this case. 2. This is because the height of the LED is mechanically different between left and right by some reason. 1 2. 1. it is necessary to make focus adjustment with Spacers. In this case adjust the height by adding or removing the Spacers. 2. Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (2) to remove the Cover 10 (3). 6.19. 3 2 5-191 K116sm5eH . Remove the Guides 3 (1). 6.3. Go to [5. 5. Good (Gray looks uniform) No good (Gray looks not uniform) Density of halftone is different If it is still not uniform although you have fixed the Aluminium Blocks correctly. and confirm that the density of halftone is uniform.

Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (5) together. Open the Cover 4 (6). 7 7 8 8 5-192 K116sm5eH . Disconnect the connector (4).3. 6 5. 4. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (7) and 2 pieces of washer screw (8). and open the wire saddles (5) to release the harness. 5 4 5 NOTE Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (5) in the way the above picture shows.

Slide the Scanner Unit (9) fully backward. There are 2 pieces of Stopper (10) at both sides. Loosen the screw (11) and then slide the Stoppers (10) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame.6. 10 11 Lock position Unlock position 5-193 K116sm5eH . which lock the LED Head Frame. 9 7.

12 NOTE The Stopper 2 (13) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. 13 Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you will close the LED Head Frame.8. Open the LED Head Frame (12). 5-194 K116sm5eH .

9. 14 15 14 14 NOTE (1) The number of Spacers initially installed is individually different machine to machine. and remove all Spacers (14) at first. Please find the best combination by making several times of trial.1mm”.08mm” and “0.05mm 5-195 K116sm5eH . “0. Remove the screw (15).1mm 0. 0.05mm ones) must be held between the 0. There are Spacers (14) on each Aluminium Block at both sides.08mm & 0.1mm Spacer as the right picture.08mm & 0. The height of the LED Head can be adjusted by adding more Spacer or removing some of them. (3) Basically thinner Spacers (0. (2) There are 3 kinds of spacers such as “0. And then adjust the height of LED Head adding or removing the Spacers (14).05mm” in thickness.

Removal of Spacer (Worse result) Addition of Spacer (Better result) “Addition of Spacer” is the better way. 5-196 K116sm5eH . (Even if the defective image caused by the focus problem looks same. it is fixed by “addition” in some case but in another case it is fixed by “removal”. Only the way to find the best focus is just “trial”. Please try both “removal” and “addition” to find which way the image becomes better. try several combinations of Spacers to find the best height. for example. Try several combinations of Spacers by adding the Spacers gradually. After finding the better way.NOTE (4) It is quite not clear which of “addition” or “removal” of Spacer is effective to solve the focus problem.

Remove 4 pieces of screw (3) at both sides. 1 Image Corona Removal of the Image Corona Unit 1.5. 1 2. 7 5. Remove the screws (2) at both sides. 7. 2 2 3. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 3 3 5-197 K116sm5eI .

Remove 5 pieces of screw (4) at both sides. (2 pieces on the right and 3 pieces on the left) 4 4 5. Remove the Guides 3 (7). 7. Close the Engine Unit.4. 5 6 6. Remove both Cover 2 (5) and Cover 3 (6). 7 5-198 K116sm5eI .

8. Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (11) together. 10. 11 10 11 NOTE Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (11) in the way the above picture shows. Open the Cover 4 (12). Disconnect the connector (10). 8 9 8 9. and open the wire saddles (11) to release the harness. 12 5-199 K116sm5eI . Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (8) to remove the Cover 10 (9).

13 13 14 12.11. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (13) and 2 pieces of washer screw (14). There are 2 pieces of Stopper (16) at both sides. Loosen the screw (17) and then slide the Stoppers (16) outside to unlock the LED Head Frame. 16 17 Lock position Unlock position 5-200 K116sm5eI . 15 14 13. Slide the Scanner Unit (15) fully backward. which lock the LED Head Frame.

Open the LED Head Frame (18). 18 NOTE The Stopper 2 (19) comes out automatically to prevent the LED Head Frame from falling down. 19 Press the Stopper 2 as the right photo if you will close the LED Head Frame.14. 5-201 K116sm5eI .

23 22 22 5-202 K116sm5eI . 20 21 NOTE You do not have to put back the Fixing Bracket (21) at the time of reassembly.15. 16. because it is a part required only before the delivery of machine. Remove the 4x6 screw (20) to remove the Fixing Bracket (21) on the right. Loosen 2 pieces of 4x10 screw (22) to make the Plate (23) enough movable.

25 25 23 24 25 5-203 K116sm5eI . Then remove the Image Corona Unit (25). Move the Plate (23) to the right to release the pin (24) of Corona Block.17.

2 Replacement of the Corona Wire NOTE A periodical replacement for the following parts is recommended. Item Corona Wire (1) Assy Spring 2 Number of article 1 1 Remarks All of these parts are contained in “Corona Wire Kit” (Z160980200) 1.5. Loosen the Set Screw (2) with hexagon wrench. 2 3 5-204 K116sm5eI . 7. 1 2. Remove the Image Corona Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 1 Removal of the Image Corona Unit] on the page 5-197. 7. The Block 3 (3) moves to the arrow mark and the Grid Plate is unfastened.

5 1 1 5 Correct: no slack in Grid Plate 5 Incorrect: slack in Grid Plate 5 5-205 K116sm5eI . Rotate a hexagon wrench in either direction with pressing down Grid Plate (5).5mm 0. Make sure that Grid Plate (5) has no excess slack (in less than 1mm) on the middle of the housing.5mm press down 4 5 5 3 3 4 (2) Carry Image Corona Unit (1) by both corona blocks so that Grid Plate (5) faces the floor.NOTE Check the following when reassembling. 0.5mm short of the side face (4) of the corona block for a proper tension. (1) The side edge of Block 3 (3) should stop at 0.

Loosen 3 pieces of 3x6 screw (6). and then remove Corona Housing (7) and Plate Electrode (8). Remove the Grid Plate (5). Dry it well after washing. 5 NOTE If Grid Plate is dirty. 4.3. 6 7 8 5-206 K116sm5eI . wash it with the neutral detergent and then with water.

(It becomes easy to remove the Corona Wire as it is unfastened by this treatment. Remove the Flush Head Screw (9).) 12 12 5-207 K116sm5eI . and remove each Cover (10) and Cover 2 (11). Loosen the screws (12) to lower the Height Adjuster. 9 9 10 11 6.5.

Remove Spring 2 (13) and Corona Wire 1 Assy (14). Replace Spring 2 (13) and Corona Wire 1 Assy (14) with new ones. 11mm (2) Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of Height Adjuster (15). 14 13 NOTE (1) Please keep 11mm between Corona Wire (14) and bottom plate of the Corona Unit after the replacement. Also fit the beads (16) into the correct positions. 15 16 5-208 K116sm5eI .7.

5. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 8. Holding both Corona Blocks (2). 1 Transfer / Separation Corona Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona 1. 1 2. 2 2 (continued on the next page) 5-209 K116sm5eJ . 8 5. remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (3) from the machine.

3 NOTE There is the Drum above the Transfer / Separation Corona. 5-210 K116sm5eJ . Do not touch it.

5. 4 2 3 NOTE Do not replace the position of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) at the time of reassembly. There are 5 pieces of Corona Guards A (2) and Corona Guards B (3) on the housing. 2 Replacement of Corona Wires NOTE A periodical replacement for the following parts is recommended. 8. Remove them pressing the stoppers (4) with such tool as a screwdriver. 8. Remove the Transfer / Separation Corona (1) making reference to [5. 1 2. 5-211 K116sm5eJ . Item Corona Wire Wire Spring Number of article 2 4 Remarks All of these parts are contained in “Corona Wire Kit” (Z160980200) 1. 1 Removal of the Transfer / Separation Corona] on the page 5-209.

5 6 5-212 K116sm5eJ .3. Remove both Covers 3 (5) (6) pulling their sides outward.

Replace Wire Springs (7) and Corona Wires (8) with new ones. To adjust the distance. rotate the screws (9) with a flathead screwdriver. 7 7 8 8 NOTE (1) Keep 11mm distance (height) between each Corona Wire and bottom plate of the housing. 10 11 5-213 K116sm5eJ . Also fit the beads (11) into the correct positions. 9 (2) Fit the Corona Wire into the groove of Height Adjuster (10).4. Remove 4 pieces of Wire Springs (7) and Corona Wires (8).

1 2. 1 Engine Frame Replacement of DC Motor (M4) and Developer Press Sensor (PH4) 1. Remove the 4x6 screws and washers (2) at both sides to make the Bands (3) free. 9 5. 2 3 2 3 5-214 K116sm5eJ . Open the Cover 4 (1). 9.5.

5 5. 4 4 1 4. Slide them inside to remove the Cover 4 (1).3. There are Pins (4) at both sides. Open the Bypass Feeder (5). Remove 4 pieces of 4x8 screw (6). 6 6 5-215 K116sm5eJ .

8 9 10 5-216 K116sm5eJ . and then open the Developer Press Unit (7). Close the Bypass Feeder.6. Disconnect the connector (8) and remove 3 pieces of screw (9). and remove the DC Motor (10). 7 7. Replace the DC Motor (10) with the new one.

Replace the Developer Press Sensor (15) with the new one.8. Pressing the stoppers (14) with such tool as a screwdriver. remove the Developer Press Sensor (15). and disconnect the connector (13). 5-217 K116sm5eJ . release the harness from the Edge Saddle (12). Remove the 4x6 screw (11). 12 11 13 9.

2. Remove the Developer Unit from the machine making reference to [5. 2. 1 Removal of the Developer Unit] on the page 5-8.5. 3 2 5-218 K116sm5eJ . Remove 2 pieces of 3x6 screw (2). and then turn over the Bracket 11 (3). 9. 2 Replacement of Manual Set Sensor (PH5) & Registration Sensor (PH1) 1.

4 6 5 6 5-219 K116sm5eJ .3. Remove the screw (4) and disconnect the connector (5) to remove each Sensor (6 : Manual Set Sensor or Registration Sensor). Replace the Sensor (15) with the new one.

9. 1 2. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit] on the page 5-66. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. Remove 2 screws from the bracket and replace the Fan (4 : BL5 & BL6) with the new one. 3 2 4 5-220 K116sm5eJ . 3. and remove each Fan (4 : BL5 & BL6) with the bracket. 3 Replacement of Fans (BL5 & BL6) 1.5. Disconnect the connector (2). remove 2 pieces of screw (3).

Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (1) to remove the Cover 10 (2). Moving the stopper levers (4) to the inside.5. 9. 4 5 5-221 K116sm5eJ . remove each Duct 5 (5) with Filter 4. 4 Replacement of Blowers (BL3 & BL4) 1. 3 3. Open the Cover Assembly (3). 2 1 2.

Remove the Blower (9 : BL3 & BL4) moving as the following photos. and then slide the Duct 6 (7) to the left.4. 7 6 7 5. 9 9 5-222 K116sm5eJ . Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (6). Remove 3 pieces of 4x35 screw (8). 8 6.

5. and then remove the Inner Transport Unit (4). Remove 2 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). 3 4 5-223 K116sm5eJ . 2 3. 10 Inner Transport Unit 5. 10. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit 1. Remove the Fuser Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 1 2. 1 Removal of the Fuser Unit] on the page 5-66. Disconnect the connector on the left (3). 3.

5. 2 Replacement of Sensor (PH2) & Belt 1. 1 Removal of the Inner Transport Unit] on the page 5-223. 10. Remove the Inner Transport Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. Tuck the rim of Belts (2) under Guide Plate (3) 1 3 2 3. 1 2.10. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (4) to remove Guide Plate (5). 4 5 4 5-224 K116sm5eJ .

Remove 1 screw (6) and the harness (7) to release the sensor bracket. Remove Retaining Ring-E (9) to remove Gear (10) and Parallel Pin (11).4. 7 6 8 5. 13 12 5-225 K116sm5eJ . Remove Sensor (8) from the bracket and replace Sensor with a new one. 11 9 10 6. Remove Retaining Ring-E in the middle (12) to release Bearing (13).

Remove and replace Belt (16) with new ones. Outside Inside 5-226 K116sm5eJ . The smooth and shiny side of it should be inside. 14 15 15 16 NOTE Be careful of the outside/inside of the Belt (16). Release the shorter shaft (14) to remove the longer shaft (15) from the unit.7.

Belt 8. M2). 1 2. Belt 7 1. Belt 9. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 11. Remove 6 screws (2) to remove Cover 2 (3).5. 2 2 3 2 5-227 K116sm5eK . 1 Replacement of DC Motors (M1. 11 Main Frame 5.

9 5-228 K116sm5eK . 7 8 7 5. 4 6 5 4. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (4). and then remove the Cover 15 (6). Remove 5 screws (7) to remove Case 5 (8).3. Disconnect 4 connectors (9). loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (5).

The Belt 8 is driven by the motor. a) Giving the spring tension to the Belt 8. The slack of Belt 8 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension Spring pulls the Pulley 3. the Belt 8 may slip because the tension is not correct. b) Turn on the machine. move the Pulley 3 (11) toward the arrow mark to slacken Belt 8 (12: 90S3M756). c) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3. If you do not make the following works. do as follows. 11 10 12 NOTE To adjust the tension of the Belt 8. and then turn it off some seconds later. Loosen the 4x6 screw (10). and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this time.6. tighten the screw of each Pulley 3. Then tighten the screw again. 5-229 K116sm5eK .

7. 13 15 14 13 12 5-230 K116sm5eK . Remove 2 screws (13) and Bearing (14) to remove Bracket (15). Replace the Belt 8 (12: 90S3M756) with the new one.

If you do not make the following works. c) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3. The belts are driven by the motor. 5-231 K116sm5eK . and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this time. a) Giving the spring tension to the belts.8. move the Pulley (17) (18) toward the arrow mark to slacken Belt 9 (22: 90S3M576) and Belt 7 (19: 90S3M699). and then turn it off some seconds later. b) Turn on the machine. 17 18 19 20 16 16 NOTE To adjust the tension of the Belt 9 and Belt 7. The slack of the belts generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension Spring pulls the Pulley 3. the belts may slip because the tension is not correct. tighten the screw of each Pulley 3. Then tighten the screw again. Loosen 2 screws (16). do as follows.

21 21 22 21 22 23 19 20 5-232 K116sm5eK . Remove and replace Belt 9 (19: 90S3M576) and Belt 7 (20: 90S3M699) with new ones. Retaining Ring-C and Bearing (22) to remove Bracket (23). Remove 5 screws (21).9.

24 24 25 NOTE When reassembling.10. Remove 7 pieces of 4x10 screw (24) to remove the Plate 6 Assembly (25). Do not hit here 26 26 5-233 K116sm5eK . do not bump DC Motor (26) and its PCB on the frame rim.

not sticked out 12. Remove 4 pieces of 4x10 screws (29) to remove each DC Motor (30: Main) (31: Fuser). 27 28 NOTE The tip of the motor shaft should be aligned with the outside surface of Pulley 4. 29 29 31 30 29 29 5-234 K116sm5eK .11. Remove Set Screws (27) on the side surface to remove each Pulley 4 (28). Replace each DC Motor (30) (31) with new ones.

Remove 6 screws (2) to remove Cover 2 (3).5. 2 Replacement of Clutch (CL1) 1. Pull up the Lever 2 (1) to open the Engine Unit. 2 2 3 2 5-235 K116sm5eK . 1 2. 11.

do as follows. Loosen the 4x6 screw (4). tighten the screw of each Pulley 3. The slack of Belt 8 generated by the above b) is removed because the Tension Spring pulls the Pulley 3. 5-236 K116sm5eK . the Belt 8 may slip because the tension is not correct. a) Giving the spring tension to the Belt 8.3. and it may be slackened around the Pulley 3 at this time. If you do not make the following works. Then tighten the screw again. and then turn it off some seconds later. b) Turn on the machine. 6 4 5 NOTE To adjust the tension of the Belt 8. move the Pulley 3 (5) toward the arrow mark to slacken Belt 8 (6: 90S3M756) and remove it. The Belt 8 is driven by the motor. c) Loosen the screw to release the Pulley 3. Replace the Belt 8 (6) with the new one.

7 9 8 7 5-237 K116sm5eK .4. Remove 2 screws (7) and Bearing (8) to remove Bracket (9).

Replace Clutch (16) with the new one. Disconnect the connector (12). Bush (15). and remove the 4x6 screw (13) to remove Bracket Clutch (14).5. 10 11 6. Remove the Hex. Cap Screw (10) to remove the Pulley 13 (11). 13 12 14 15 16 5-238 K116sm5eK .Clutch (16).

1 3 2 2. and then remove the Cover 15 (3).5. 4 5 4 3. Remove and replace Blower (10) with the new one. remove 1 screw (8). 3 Replacement of Blower (BL7) 1. 11. Remove 5 screws (4) to remove Case 5 (5). and then remove the Bracket Blower (9). Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (1). 8 7 9 10 5-239 K116sm5eK . Disconnect the connector (7). loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2).

Remove and replace Fan (7) with the new one. 4 Replacement of Fan (BL8) 1. Disconnect the connector (4). and then remove the Fan Blower (6). loosen 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (2). and then remove the Cover 15 (3). 1 3 2 2. Remove 4 pieces of 4x6 screw (1). remove 1 screw (5). 11.5. 5 4 6 7 5-240 K116sm5eK .

5. 2 3 3. Remove 2 pieces of Guide 3 (1). 12. 1 Scanner Unit Removal of Scanner Unit 1 1. 12 5. and remove 4 pieces of screw (3) on the front. Remove Cover 14 (4). Loosen 4 pieces of screw (2) on the back. 4 5-241 K116sm5eL . 2.

6 6. Remove 3 screws (5). Remove 2 screws (6) to remove Cover 10 (7) 7 6 6 5-242 K116sm5eL .4. Remove Shield Cover N (6). 5 5 5.

Remove Cover 2 (10). 9 9 9 9. 10 5-243 K116sm5eL .7. Remove 5 screws (9). 8 8. Pull up Lever 2 (8) to open the Engine Unit.

12 12 13 12 12 12 12. 17 18 16 5-244 K116sm5eL . 11 11 11. 14 14 14 15 14 14 13. Remove 4 screws (14) to remove Bracket Left (15) on the left. Remove 4 screws (12) to remove Bracket Right (13) on the right. Open Cover 4 (11). Loosen 4 screws (16) and remove 4 screws (17) to remove Cover 15 (18).10.

19 21 21 19 16. Open the Wire Saddles (21) to release the USB Cable (19). and open the wire saddles (23) to release the harness. Open Wire Saddle (20) to release USB Cable. Do not bundle the 2 cables in any of the wire saddles (23) together.14. Disconnect the connector (22). Disconnect the USB Connector (19) from the IPS. 19 20 15. 5-245 K116sm5eL . 23 22 23 NOTE Wind excessive length of the harnesses into loop with the wire saddles (23) in the way the above picture shows. which runs from the Scanner Unit.

Otherwise the Scanner Unit may fall down and damage. (Right side) (Left side) 24 24 19. 5-246 K116sm5eL . CAUTION Be sure to close the Engine Unit before removing the screws which fix the Scanner Unit. 25 25 CAUTION Please carry the Scanner Unit by 2 persons as it is heavy. Remove 4 screws (24) which fix the Scanner Unit. 18.17. Close the Engine Unit. Remove the Scanner Unit (25) from the machine.

2 Replacement of Belt 1. 1 2. Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 12. Replace Belt (5) with a new one. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241. 2 3.5.12. Pull up the Levers (2) and open Upper Unit. Remove Spring (3) and loose 1 screw (4) to remove Belt (5). 3 5 4 5-247 K116sm5eM .

) 3 (4) Move Bracket (6) to the arrow direction until it stops against Spring Hook (7).NOTE Belt (5) requires its tensioning when reassembling. (A proper tension is applied to Belt. (2) Place Belt (5) in the original routing position. Press down Upper Unit on both sides to close it. (No tension is applied to Belt at this time. Not doing so may prevent a proper tensioning.) 5 (3) Replace Spring (3) in the original position. Pressing only on the left side may result in twisting the frame. Tighten the screw (4) to secure Bracket (6). (1) Be sure to close Upper Unit prior to tensioning. 7 4 6 5-248 K116sm5eM .

1 Removal of the Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241. 2 3.12. Remove Spring (3) and loose 1 screw (4) to remove Belt (5).5. Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 1 2. 3 Replacement of Motor Assy 1. 12. 3 5 4 5-249 K116sm5eM . Pull up the Levers (2) and open Upper Unit.

(No tension is applied to Belt at this time. (2) Place Belt (5) in the original routing position. (A proper tension is applied to Belt.) 5 (3) Replace Spring (3) in the original position. Press down Upper Unit on both sides to close it. (1) Be sure to close Upper Unit prior to tensioning.) 3 (4) Move Bracket (6) to the arrow direction until it stops against Spring Hook (7).NOTE Belt (5) requires its tensioning when reassembling. Pressing only on the left side may result in twisting the frame. 7 4 6 5-250 K116sm5eM . Not doing so may prevent a proper tensioning. Tighten the screw (4) to secure Bracket (6).

Replace Motor Assembly with a new one. 12 11 5-251 K116sm5eM . Disconnect the harness (10) from Motor Assy (11). Remove 2 screws (12) to remove Motor Assembly (11). Remove 6 screws (8) to remove Sheet Guide (9).4. 11 10 6. 8 8 8 9 5.

Remove Spring (3) and loose 1 screw (4) to remove Belt (5). 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241. 4 Replacement of Drive Rollers 1 and 2 1.5. 12. Pull up the Levers (2) and open Upper Unit. Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 1 2. 3 5 4 5-252 K116sm5eM . 2 3.12.

(A proper tension is applied to Belt. (No tension is applied to Belt at this time. Press down Upper Unit on both sides to close it. 7 4 6 5-253 K116sm5eM .NOTE Belt (5) requires its tensioning when reassembling. Tighten the screw (4) to secure Bracket (6). Not doing so may prevent a proper tensioning. (1) Be sure to close Upper Unit prior to tensioning. Pressing only on the left side may result in twisting the frame.) 3 (4) Move Bracket (6) to the arrow direction until it stops against Spring Hook (7). (2) Place Belt (5) in the original routing position.) 5 (3) Replace Spring (3) in the original position.

8 9 5.4. Remove 1 screw (8) to remove Stay (9) Open Upper Unit fully. 10 11 5-254 K116sm5eM . Remove 7 screws (10) to remove Gap Roller Assy (11).

Bearing (17) from each roller shaft. 13 12 17 16 15 14 5-255 K116sm5eM . remove Retaining Ring-E (12). On the left side. Pulley (15: on 2).6. Set Screw (13) to remove Pulley (14: on 1). Spacer (16).

Bearing (20) from each roller shaft. remove Retaining Ring-E (18) to remove Washer (19).7. On the right side. 18 20 19 5-256 K116sm5eM .

Replace Drive Roller 1 and Drive Roller 2 with new ones. slide Drive Roller 1 (22: front) and Drive Roller 2 (23: rear) to the motor side and remove it. 22 20 23 20 23 22 5-257 K116sm5eM .8. Pressing Roller Holder Assy (21) down.

NOTE (1) The longer thin end of Drive Rollers should be placed at the left. Perform Feed Distance adjustment. 5-258 K116sm5eM . The 2 Rollers have different rubber belt pattern. Install Scanner Unit to the machine. Connect the USB cable of Scanner Unit to your PC. Refer to [8. 23 22 23 22 Left Right (2) Install Drive Roller 1 (22) and Drive Roller 2 (23) in place correctly. Replace all the parts in position. Use alcohol. 9. 20: 2 bands 40 19: 4 bands (3) Do not use water for cleaning Drive Rollers. 10. 12 KIP Scanner Utility] on page 8-184 for adjustment. NOTE Replacement of Drive Rollers requires Feed Distance adjustment. 11.

Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 2 5-259 K116sm5eN .5. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241. 12. 5 Replacement of Pinch Roller Assy 1. Remove Retaining Ring-E (2) from the shaft of Pinch Roller.12. 1 2.

follow the instruction below.NOTE For Pinch Rollers located under Data Controller PCB. 5 4 6 5 5-260 K116sm5eN . 3 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 (2) Remove 6 screws (5) to remove Data Controller PCB (4) and Shield Sheet (6). (1) Remove all the connectors (3) from Data Controller PCB (4). The location of the relevant Pinch Rollers is shown as follows.

3. Put your hand in between Upper and Lower Unit and hold the Pinch Roller Assy (8) not to fall its Spring (9) inside Upper Unit. Remove Pinch Roller Assy (8) and Spring (9). 7 9 9 8 8 5-261 K116sm5eN . Pull up the Levers (7) and open Upper Unit slightly. Replace Pinch Roller Assy with a new one.

5. 1 2. Remove screws (2) to release the concerning sensor bracket (3) (4) (5) (6) (7). 12. 6 Replacement of Sensor 1. 2 3 2 4 (Data Controller PCB omitted) 5 6 2 7 5-262 K116sm5eN . Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5.12. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241.

8 8 9 8 8 8 8 8 8 (2) Remove 6 screws (10) to remove Data Controller PCB (9) and Shield Sheet (11). The location of the relevant sensor bracket (3) is shown as follows.NOTE For the sensor bracket (3) located under Data Controller PCB. 10 9 11 10 5-263 K116sm5eN . follow the instruction. (1) Remove all the connectors (8) from Data Controller PCB (9).

12 12 5-264 K116sm5eN . Remove the Sensor (12) from the sensor bracket.3. Replace Sensor with a new one.

1 5-265 K116sm5eN . color quality and etc) among image blocks. 1 Removal of the Scanner Unit] on the page 5-241.5. Remove the Scanner Unit (1) from the machine making reference to [5. 12. Equipped CIS class can be checked with the label on the rear of the scanner. 7 Replacement of CIS NOTE A CIS is classified into classes according to wavelength variations of their LED. Label 1. Be sure to check which CIS class is used to the scanner before replacing to avoid class mixing. Class CIS Sensor A CIS Sensor B CIS Sensor C CIS Sensor D CIS Sensor E CIS Sensor F CIS Sensor G CIS Sensor H Part Number Z168300410 Z168300420 Z168300430 Z168300440 Z168300450 Z168300460 Z168300470 Z168300480 Class CIS Sensor I CIS Sensor J CIS Sensor K CIS Sensor L CIS Sensor M CIS Sensor N CIS Sensor O CIS Sensor P Part Number Z168300490 Z168300500 Z168300510 Z168300520 Z168300530 Z168300540 Z168300550 Z168300560 All the 5 pieces of CIS on a certain scanner should be the same class to assure even image quality (brightness.12. Otherwise even image quality can not be expected.

4 3 5 4 5-266 K116sm5eN . Remove 6 screws (4).2. Remove Data Controller PCB (3) and Shield Sheet (5). 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 3. Remove all the connectors (2) from Data Controller PCB (3).

Remove 9 screws (8) and open 1 wire saddle (9) to release Base Plate (10). 7 6 5.4. Remove the harnesses (6) from each CIS Controller PCB (7). 8 9 8 8 10 5-267 K116sm5eN .

Position adjustments. Remove the flexible cable (11) from CIS Controller PCB (7). 8.6. 9. 12 KIP Scanner Utility] on page 8-184 for adjustment. Position adjustments. Otherwise a correct CIS position may lose. NOTE Replacement of CIS requires Shading. Connect the USB cable of Scanner Unit to your PC. Perform Shading. Install Scanner Unit to the machine. 5-268 K116sm5eN . Remove 4 screws (12) to remove CIS Bracket (13). Replace CIS (14) with a new one. Replace all the parts in position. fix CIS Bracket (13) with pushing to the left. Refer to [8. 13 12 14 7 11 12 13 11 NOTE When reassembling. 13 7.

3 3 4 4 5 5-269 K116sm5eN . Lean Monitor Assy (5) back. Remove 2 screws (3) and loosen 2 screws (4) to release Monitor Assy (5). Remove 1 screw (1) on top of Cover (2) and put it aside. 1 2 2. Scan Glass Assy can be removed without dismounting Scanner Unit. 1. 8 Replacement of Scan Glass Assy Reference For more efficient operation. 12.5.

Remove 1 screw (7) to remove Stay (8) Open Upper Unit fully. 7 8 5. Pull up the Levers (6) and open Upper Unit.3. 9 10 9 5-270 K116sm5eN . 6 4. Replace Scan Glass Assy with a new one. Remove 4 screws (9) to remove Scan Glass Assy (10).

2. 2 Recommended Periodic Maintenance Lubrication 6.Chapter 6 Maintenance 6.2 6.4 6.5 6.4 6. 2. 1 Drive Gears 6. 1 6. 3 6-1 K116sm6e1 .6 6. 2 Dev / Other PM Procedure page 6.

Please perform PMs as scheduled -As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned.PM Schedule -Please keep this form with the KIP 3100 .Kit Lube Gears Fuser Fingers Pressure Roller Thermostat Thermistor Exterior Covers / GUI # = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry @ = Clean with vacuum 1 1 1 1 SUP3000-101 SUP9810-104 SUP3820-106 SUP3820-106 # # # # # # # # 1 Z160980020 @ @ @ C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C L C C 1 1 Z160980220 Z160980040 C C C C L C C C C L C R C C C C C L C C C C C C C C C L C C C # C C = Clean I = Inspect C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C R = Replace A = Adjust position L = Lubricate Subject to change without notice Actual intervals may vary due to customer requirements / installation location Complete .Kit Roll Compartment & Interior Knife Filters .KIP 3100 . please denote with an "X" in the Confirmation box. Part / Description Qty Part Number Complete Complete Complete Complete Code Square Feet X 1000 Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete r1 50 C 100 C C C C C C C C L 150 C 200 C C R R R C C C L R 250 C 300 C C C C C C C C L 350 C R C C C C 400 C C R R R C C C L R 450 C 500 C C C C C C C C L R Document Glass ( scanner ) Document Rollers ( scanner ) Photoreceptor Main Charge Wire Transfer Wire Separation Wire Grid Screen LED Head Developer Space Discs Lube Gears Developer Roller .Kit Fuser . Please note nomenclature below.

KIP 3100 . Part / Description Qty Part Number Complete Complete Complete Complete Code Square Feet X 1000 Complete Complete Complete Complete Complete r1 550 C 600 C C R R R C C C L R 650 C 700 C C R C C C C L 750 C 800 C C R R R C C C L R C C C C L 850 C 900 C C C C C C C C L 950 C 1000 C C R R R C C C L R Document Glass ( scanner ) Document Rollers ( scanner ) Photoreceptor Main Charge Wire Transfer Wire Separation Wire Grid Screen LED Head Developer Space Discs Lube Gears Developer Roller .Kit Lube Gears Fuser Fingers Pressure Roller Thermostat Thermistor Exterior Covers / GUI # = Clean with glass cleaner and wipe dry @ = Clean with vacuum 1 1 1 1 SUP3000-101 SUP9810-104 SUP3820-106 SUP3820-106 # # # # # # # # 1 Z050980280 @ @ @ C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C R C C C R L C C C C C C C 1 1 Z050980050 Z050980060 C C C C L C C C C L C C C C C C L C # C C = Clean I = Inspect C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C R = Replace A = Adjust position L = Lubricate Subject to change without notice Actual intervals may vary due to customer requirements / installation location Complete . Please note nomenclature below. Please perform PMs as scheduled -As the PM comes due and items replaced or cleaned. please denote with an "X" in the Confirmation box.PM Schedule -Please keep this form with the KIP 3100 .Kit Roll Compartment & Interior Knife Filter .Kit Fuser .

Developer Unit removed 4 From rear.2. Apply grease to Gear 3 (1). Gear Helical 34T (2). Recommended lubrication term is in every 18. 2. 6. Lubrication Please apply an adequate amount of grease to the components shown in the following section.1 Driving Gears on Machine Frame Remove Developer Unit and Fuser Unit. Developer Unit removed Engine Unit from bottom. 2 3 1 Engine Unit from top.6. Fuser Unit removed 6-4 K116sm6e1 .000m. Gear Helical 20T (3). Apply heat-proof grease to Gear 36T (4).

Apply grease to Gear Helical 28T (2). 1 1 6-5 K116sm6e1 . 2. Apply conductive grease to the contacting points for Developer / Regulation / Toner Supply Roller on the metal plates (1). 1 1 2 Other . Apply conductive grease to the contacting points for Photoconductive Drum / Cleaning Roller on the metal plates (1).6.Terminal Plates on Machine Frame Open Engine Unit. 2 Developer Unit Remove Developer Unit.

then rinse with water) let dry on paper towel. Transfer guide plates etc. Replace noted items as this procedure progresses.Development Unit. Step #13 Make copies / prints Step #14 Speak with key operator on your evaluation / status.KIP 3100 Preventative Maintenance Procedure .Fuser Section. Clean original rollers Step #12 Clean Panels and Covers. Step #10 Run test pattern #1 and #3 and verify print quality. Clean and lube gears. Ask User on Printer Performance / Image Quality Run Test Print Locate the “KIP 3100 PM Schedule” Form And check as each item completed. Separation fans / air guides. Transport belts. . Inspect media spools. Clean Selfoc lens. Step #5 . Remove Drum (into Box) Remove side and top covers. 6-6 K116sm6e1 . Clean upper Nails.LED Print Head.see Chapter 6 in Service Manual) Step #9 . Confirm all fans and blowers are clean.Cutter Assembly. (Glass cleaner. Vacuum around toner hopper inlet.Clean Interior of Printer. Vacuum Ozone Filters.000 square feet Step #1 .Paper Decks.Corona Units Clean Grid Screen (Simple Green. (as needed with High temp. Vacuum any toner dust from ends of developer unit. grease .) Step #4 . Clean lower Nails. Step #7 . Step #8 . Vacuum paper dust. (save prints) Step #11 Scanner Remove all glass and clean both sides. Clean paper dust. Clean spacing rollers. Clean 1st Charge wires and case (Glass cleaner) Clean transfer / separation wires and case.see Chapter 6 in Service Manual) Step #6 .every 50.Prepare Machine. Step #2 . (Glass cleaner) Step #3 . Clean /` lube gears ( only as needed with G501 grease / Lithium grease.Air Flow.

9 Deck Open 7. 4 Main Motor Error (E-010) 7. 1. “Stay” (J-0206) “Early” (J-0306). 2. 2. 1. 2. 1. 1.9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-13 7-14 7-15 7-15 7-16 7-16 7-17 7-17 7-18 7-18 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-19 7-20 7-20 7-21 7-21 7-23 7-24 7-25 7-25 7-26 7-26 7-27 7-28 7-29 7-29 K116sm7e1 7. 2. E-002 & E-004) 7. 1.10 Cutter Error (E-040) 7. 2 Countermeasures . 1. 1.11 FPGA Error (E-050) 7.4 7. 9 Bias Output Error (E-034) 7. 1.7 7.7 7. 5 Fuser Motor Error (E-011) 7.Call Operator Errors 7. 2. 1 Roll 2 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0101) 7. 8 Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200) 7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light 7. 2. 2.8 7.7 7. 2 Roll 1 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0102) 7. 2. 2 Fuser Error (E-001) 7.13 Density Sensor Error (E-080) 7. 5 Internal Jam “Delay” (J-0106). 1. 5 Totally appeared foggy image 7. 1. 1.13 The door opened during the print cycle 7. Jam “Delay” (J-0104). 1.5 7. 1. 2. 1. 2. 1.6 7. 1 Troubleshooting . 1. “Stay” (J-0204) “Early” (J-0304).11 Defective fusing 7-1 . 1. 1. 1. 4 Density is uneven 7. 1 Basic Image Adjustment 7. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical) 7.Call Service Errors 7. 2. 1. 1. 6 Developer Press Motor Error (E-012) 7.12 Toner Empty 7. 1. 2. 2. 1 Fuser Error (E-000. 2. 1. 2. 2. 9 Void of image 7. 1. 2. 1. 1 Halftone is too light 7. 1 Countermeasures .Printer Errors 7.10 Dirt on the back of the print 7. 2. 6 Fuser Jam “Delay” (J-0107). 2. 8 White line (Vertical) 7. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light 7. 2. 2. 2. 2.Image Quality Defects 7.14 Density Sensor Output Error (E-081) 7. 2. 2. 1. 1. 7 Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100) 7. 1. 2. 1. 1. “Remained” (J-1007) 7. 2.11 Manual Set NG 7. “Remained” (J-1004) 7. 2. 3 Fuser Error (E-003) 7.3 7. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical) 7. 1.10 Deck Jam 7. 2.3 7. 3 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0103) & “Early” (J-0303) 7.12 Developer Error (E-070) 7. 1. “Remained” (J-1006) 7. 1. 8 High Voltage Output Error (E-031. 2. 1. 2 Countermeasures . 1. 2 Troubleshooting .Image Quality Defects 7. “Stay” (J-0207) “Early” (J-0307). 1. 1. 1. 1.3 7. 2.Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Page 7. E-032 & E-033) 7. 7 Counter Error (E-020) 7. 1. 4 Reg. 2.6 7. 1. 2. 1. 2.7 7. 2. 2.

4 Original is mis-fed 7. 1. 2.16 7. No Leading Edge Jitter Image looks not sharp Uneven image density (vertical) Completely white (No image) Completely black Crease of paper Double image Dirt on the print (Offset) 7-30 7-30 7-31 7-31 7-32 7-32 7-33 7-34 7-35 7-36 7-36 7-36 7-36 7-36 7-37 7-37 7-37 7-38 7-38 7-38 7-39 7-39 7-39 7-39 7-39 7-40 7.17 7. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks 7. 3. 2.Scanner Defects 7. 2. 2 Vertical black lines 7. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks 7. 2. 2 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position 7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration 7-2 K116sm7e1 .scanner image quality 7. 2. 3 Troubleshooting . 1. 2.12 7.scanner operation 7. 5 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on 7. 7 Density is different between left and right 7. 3. 6 Scanner is not recognized 7. 2. 3.14 7. 1 Countermeasures . 3. 3. 3 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop) 7.18 7. 1 Completely black 7. 2. 2. 1. 3. 2 Countermeasures . 2. 3. 1. 3. 2.15 7. 6 Image quality is not good 7. 2. 3.13 7. 2. 2. 1.20 Defective image placement. 3. 2. 2.7. 2. 3.19 7. 2. 3. 2. 2. 3 Vertical white lines 7. 2. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport) 7. 2. 2. 3. 2. 3. 3.

) Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode while making the following operation.Printer Errors Countermeasures . 2. Yes 7-3 K116sm7e1 . 1 7.7. 2. Does the status change from “L” to “H” when the machine is transporting the paper? No Main Motor (M1) 4 No 1. 1. Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. and then re-install it to the machine correctly. Replace the Roll 2 Set Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Replace the Roll 2 Feed Clutch if there is no problem with the wire. 2. 1 7. : Paper exists on the sensor for a longer time than required. Close the Roll Deck. Remove the whole Roll Deck. Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the roll paper correctly installed in Roll Deck 2? Check the status of Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. (Leading edge must not pass over the Roll 2 Set Sensor. 3. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 2 Set Sensor. Set the leading edge of roll 2 between feeding rollers. Signal Code : 106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) Is the status “H” when the roll paper is set? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode. 1. Roll 2 Feed Clutch (CL6) 3 Check the operation of Roll 2 Feed Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch) Does the clutch operate when you change the output signal from “L” to “H”? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode. Replace the Main Motor if there is no problem with the wire. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Main Motor. 1. 1 Troubleshooting .Call Operator Errors Roll 2 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0101) Reference Delay Stay Early Remained Cause Installation of roll paper Roll 2 Set Sensor (PH9) : Paper arrives at the sensor much later than required timing. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 2 Feed Clutch. 3.) 2. : Paper exists on the sensor when turning on the machine. (Signal Code : 106) 1. 1. : Paper arrives at the sensor much earlier than required timing.) Result No No Treatment Install it correctly. Check the driving belts on the Roll Deck. 1.

1. Replace the Roll 1 Feed Clutch if there is no problem with the wire. Check the driving belts on the Roll Deck. Replace the Roll 1 Set Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. 3. Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. 1. (Leading edge must not pass over the Roll 1 Set Sensor. 1. Close the Roll Deck. Device Code : 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch) Does the clutch operate when you change the output signal from “L” to “H”? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode. 2. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Main Motor. Replace the Main Motor if there is no problem with the wire.) Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode while making the following operation. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 1 Set Sensor. and then re-install it to the machine correctly. 3. Set the leading edge of roll 1 between feeding rollers.) Result No No Treatment Install it correctly. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Roll 1 Feed Clutch. Remove the whole Roll Deck. Yes 7-4 K116sm7e1 . Installation of roll paper Roll 1 Set Sensor (PH7) Roll 1 Feed Clutch (CL4) 3 Check the operation of Roll 1 Feed Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. 2 Cause Roll 1 Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0102) Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the roll paper correctly installed in Roll Deck 2? Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. 1.) 2. Signal Code : 105 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) Is the status “H” when the roll paper is set? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.7. Does the status change from “L” to “H” when the machine is transporting the paper? No Main Motor (M1) 4 No 1. 2. 2. 1. (Signal Code : 105) 1.

7-5 K116sm7e1 . 1. 1. Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. Signal Code : 108 (Feed Sensor) Is the status “L” when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode. 1.) Check the operation of Feed Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Cutter Home Position Sensor. Mis-feed of paper Feed Sensor (PH6) Cutter Home Position Sensor (MS6 & MS7) 3 Check the status of Cutter Home Position Sensors in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Replace the Feed Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Feed Sensor. 1. Does each Feed Clutch and Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode. 3. 2. Replace the Cutter Home Position Sensors if there is no problem with the wire.) Result Yes No Treatment Remove the mis-fed paper. 3 Cause Feeding Jam “Delay” (J-0103) & “Early” (J-0303) Checking order 1 2 Checking Does the paper mis-fed occur between Roll 1 Set Sensor and Feed Sensor? Check the status of Feed Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 094 (Cutter Home Position Right) 095 (Cutter Home Position Left) Is the status “H” when the Cutter is at each home position? And is it “L” when the Cutter is not at the home position? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.7. and check if the Main Motor rotates correctly.) No Driving mechanism 4 No Replace the Feed Clutch or Main Motor if it is defective. Device Code : 10 (Feed Clutch) Also open and close the Roll Deck. 2.

7. 1. 1. 4
Cause

Reg. Jam “Delay” (J-0104), “Stay” (J-0204) “Early” (J-0304), “Remained” (J-1004)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Does the paper mis-fed occur around the Registration Roller? Check the status of Registration Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 100 (Registration Sensor) Is the status “L” when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is locked? (Is the pressure around the Registration Roller correct?) 2. Replace the Registration Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Result Yes No Treatment Remove the mis-fed paper. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Registration Sensor.

Mis-feed of paper Registration Sensor (PH1)

Engine Unit

3

No

1. Close the Engine Unit firmly. 2. Adjust the pressure around the Registration Roller. Replace the Registration Clutch or Main Motor if it is defective.

Driving mechanism

4

Check the operation of Registration Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch) Also open and close the Roll Deck, and check if the Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each Registration Clutch and Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.)

No

7. 1. 1. 5
Cause

Internal Jam “Delay” (J-0106), “Stay” (J-0206) “Early” (J-0306), “Remained” (J-1006)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Does the paper mis-fed occur around the separation area? Check the status of Separation Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 010 (Separation Sensor) Is the status “L” when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit installed to the machine correctly? Is the Corona Wire broken? Is the output from the HV Power Supply to the Separation Corona correct? 2. Replace the Separation Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Result Yes No Treatment Remove the mis-fed paper. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Separation Sensor.

Mis-feed of paper Separation Sensor (PH2)

Transfer / Separation Corona

3

Yes

HV Power Supply

4

Yes No

Install the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit correctly. Replace the Corona Wire. Replace the HV Power Supply.

7-6

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 1. 6
Cause

Fuser Jam “Delay” (J-0107), “Stay” (J-0207) “Early” (J-0307), “Remained” (J-1007)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Does the paper mis-fed occur around the fuser area? Check the status of Exit Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 011 (Exit Sensor) Is the status “L” when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Result Yes No Treatment Remove the mis-fed paper. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Exit Sensor. 2. Replace the Exit Sensor if there is no problem with the wire.

Mis-feed of paper Exit Sensor (PH3)

7. 1. 1. 7
Cause Opening the Roll Deck

Paper jam by opening the Roll Deck during printing (J-1100)
Checking order 1 Checking Did you open the Roll Deck before the completion of printing? (Roll paper will be rewound after printing. J-1100 will be indicated if you open the deck at that time.) Is the Roll Deck firmly locked? Result Yes Treatment Wait until the roll paper is completely rewound.

Lock of Roll Deck

2

No

Close it firmly.

7. 1. 1. 8
Cause Opening the Exit Cover

Paper jam by opening the Exit Cover during printing (J-1200)
Checking order 1 Checking Did you open the Exit Cover during printing? Result Yes Treatment Do not open it during printing.

7. 1. 1. 9
Cause Roll Deck Switch (MS5)

Deck Open
Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the Roll Deck opened? Check the status of the following signal in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open) Is the status “L” when the Roll Deck is closed? And is it “H” when the Roll Deck is opened? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) 2. Replace the Switch (MS5) if there is no problem with the wire. Result Yes No Treatment Close it firmly. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Switch (MS5).

7-7

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 1.10
Cause Mis-feed of paper Installation of roll paper Roll 1 Set Sensor (PH7) Roll 2 Set Sensor (PH9)

Deck Jam
Checking order 1 2 3 Checking Does the paper mis-fed occur in the Roll Deck? Is the roll paper correctly installed to the Roll Deck 2? Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 105 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) 106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) Is the status of each sensor “H” when you set the roll paper? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Result Yes No No Treatment Remove the mis-fed paper. Install it correctly. 1. Is there any problem with the Drawer Connector which connects the machine and the Roll Deck. 2. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to each sensor. 3. Replace the concerning sensor if there is no problem with the wire. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to each clutch. 2. Replace the concerning clutch if there is no problem with the wire.

Roll 1 Feed Clutch (CL4) Roll 2 Feed Clutch (CL6) Roll 1 Back Clutch (CL5) Roll 2 Back Clutch (CL7)

4

Check the operation of the following clutches in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 06 (Roll 1 Feed Clutch) 07 (Roll 1 Back Clutch) 08 (Roll 2 Feed Clutch) 09 (Roll 2 Back Clutch) Does each clutch operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.) Check the status of Roll 1 Set Sensor and Roll 2 Set Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode while making the following operation. Signal Code : 105 (Roll 1 Set Sensor) 106 (Roll 2 Set Sensor) 1. Set the leading edge of each roll paper between the concerning feeding rollers. (Leading edge must not pass over each Roll 1 (2) Set Sensor.) 2. Close the Roll Deck. Does the status change from “L” to “H” when the machine is transporting the paper?

No

Main Motor (M1)

5

No

1. Check the driving belts on the Roll Deck. 2. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Main Motor. 3. Replace the Main Motor if there is no problem with the wire. 1. Remove the whole Roll Deck, and then re-install it to the machine correctly.

Yes

7-8

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 1.11
Cause Mis-feed

Manual Set NG
Checking order 1 Checking Have you already set the cut sheet paper to the Bypass Feeder before you turned on the machine? Check the status of Manual Feed Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 008 (Manual Set Sensor) Is the status “L” when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Check the status of Registration Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 100 (Registration Sensor) Is the status “L” when the paper is not passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” when the paper is passing beside the sensor? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Is the Engine Unit closed firmly until it is locked? (Is the pressure around the Registration Roller correct?) 2. Replace the Manual Set Sensor if there is no problem with the wire. Result Yes Treatment Remove the paper.

Manual Set Sensor

2

No

1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Manual Set Sensor.

Registration Sensor

3

No

1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Registration Sensor. 2. Replace the Registration Sensor if there is no problem with the wire.

Engine Unit

4

No

1. Close the Engine Unit firmly. 2. Adjust the pressure around the Registration Roller. Replace the Registration Clutch or Main Motor if it is defective.

Driving mechanism

5

Check the operation of Registration Clutch in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch) Also open and close the Roll Deck, and check if the Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each Registration Clutch and Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.)

No

7-9

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 1.12
Cause Toner Cartridge Toner Supply Motor (M3)

Toner Empty
Checking order 1 2 Checking Is there enough toner in the Toner Cartridge? Check the operation of Toner Supply Motor by the following 2 ways. 1. Turn on the machine, and check the action of the Toner Supply Motor. 2. Select the Factory Adjustment Mode, and carry out the Sub Mode No.05. Press the [ * ] Key when the machine is operating. (The Toner Supply Motor rotates when you are pressing the [ * ] Key.) Does the Toner Supply Motor operate correctly in both cases? (Refer to page 8-152 for the Factory Adjustment Mode.) Confirm that the Toner Sensor is not buried in the toner. Then check the status of Toner Sensor in the Input/Output Mode of the Service Mode. I/O Signal Code : 107 (Toner Sensor) Is the status “H” when the Toner Sensor is covered with the toner? And is it “L” when the sensor is not covered? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Result No No Treatment Replace the Toner Cartridge. 1. Check if there is any problem with the wires among the Toner Supply Motor, Driver PCB B and PW11620 PCB. 2. Replace the Toner Supply Motor if there is no problem with the wires.

Toner Sensor (TLS1)

3

No Yes

Replace the Toner Sensor. Replace the PW11620 PCB.

7. 1. 1.13
Cause

The door opened during the print cycle
Checking order 1 Checking Is there paper anywhere in the machine? Result Yes Treatment Open the Exit Cover and the Engine Unit, and then remove the paper. (Cut the paper manually if it has not been cut yet.) 1. Check if there is any problem with the wire connected to the Switch (MS5). 2. Replace the Switch (MS5) if there is no problem with the wire.

Mis-feed of paper

Switch (MS5)

2

Check the status of the following signal in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open) Is the status “L” when the Roll Deck is closed? And is it “H” when the Roll Deck is opened? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Does fuse (F2) have proper conductivity?

No

Fuse

3

No

Replace the fuse (F2).

7-10

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 2

Countermeasures - Call Service Errors

The following are the names of the Service Call Errors and the conditions that cause them to occur. Error Code E-000 E-001 E-002 Error Indication Fuser Temperature Rising Error Fuser Over Temperature Error Fuser Low Temperature Error Conditions Fuser Temperature does not reach 50 oC within 120 seconds after turning on. Fuser Temperature reaches over 230 oC. 1. Fuser Temperature at the time of turning on was 50 to 100 oC, but it does not rise up to 120 oC within 80 seconds after that. 2. Fuser Temperature at the time of turning on was higher than 100 oC, but it does not rise up to the setting temperature within 330 seconds after that. The difference of temperature between the center and side of the fuser becomes 50 oC or more. The Lamp of fuser lights (Signal HEAT1 is “H”) to heat up the Fuser Roller in the ready condition, but even 1 oC of temperature rise can not be accomplished within 15 seconds. The Main Motor Output Detection Signal (MAINM_LD) continues to be “H” for 3 seconds or longer when the Main Motor is rotating. The Fuser Motor Output Detection Signal (HEATM_LD) continues to be “H” for 3 seconds or longer when the Fuser Motor is rotating. The Developer Press Sensor Signal (PRESS_S) does not change to “L” within 30 seconds after turning on. The Counter Connection Detection Signal (COUNT_OPN) continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer after turning on. The Image Corona Output Detection Signal (IM_LD) continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer when the Image Corona is ON. The Separation Corona Output Detection Signal (AC_LD) continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer when the Separation Corona is ON. The Transfer Corona Output Detection Signal (TR_LD) continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer when the Transfer Corona is ON.

E-003

Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error

E-004

E-010

Main Motor Error

E-011

Fuser Motor Error

E-012

Developer Press Motor Error

E-020

Counter Error

E-031

Image Corona Output Error

E-032

Separation Corona Output Error

E-033

Transfer Corona Output Error

7-11

K116sm7e1

Error Code E-034

Error Indication Bias Output Error

E-040

Cutter Error

E-050 E-070

FPGA Error Developer Error

E-080

Density Sensor Error

E-081

Density Sensor Output Error

Conditions Bias Output Detection Signal (BIAS_LD) continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer when a specified bias is supplied to the corresponding Developer Unit components. 1. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal (MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not change to “H” within 100 millisecond since the Cutter has started the operation. 2. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal (MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not change to “L” within 1 second since the Cutter has started the operation. Initialization of FPGA failed after turning on the machine. 1. The Connector J-253 is not connected. 2. The Switch (MS4) indicates an “open” Condition. (MS4) detects open/close of the Engine Unit or Toner Hatch. The default output of the Density Sensor reaches less than 0.1V or more than 1.3V. The gap between the default output and the standard output of the Density Sensor reaches less than 2V.

7-12

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 2. 1

Fuser Error (E-000, E-002 & E-004)

E-000 : Fuser Temperature Rising Error E-002 : Fuser Low Temperature Error E-004 : Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error
Cause Error clearance Checking order 1 Checking Have you cleared the fuser error in the Error Clear Mode? (Refer to page 8-154 for the Error Clear Mode.) Are wires among Lamp (H1, H2), Solid State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 & TH2) connected properly? Unplug the machine, and then check the resistance of Lamp (H1, H2) with the multi-meter. Is it 15k ohm or lower? Select the Information Mode, and then check the temperature of fuser detected by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2). Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1) 01 (Fuser temperature 2) Is each temperature normal? (Refer to page 8-12 for the Information Mode.) Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange wire (J220-4). Is it 24V? Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? Select the Device Operation Mode, and then change the signal of the following signal to “H”. Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay) And check the resistance between the following points. Between RY1-2 and RY1-4 Between RY1-6 and RY1-8 Is the each resistance almost 0 ohm? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.) Result Yes Treatment Wait until the Fuser Unit has cooled down enough. Then select the Error Clear Mode and clear the concerning error. Connect them properly.

Wires

2

No

Lamp (H1, H2)

3

No

Replace the Lamp.

Thermistors (TH1 & TH2)

4

No

Replace the concerning Thermistor.

DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse

5

No

Replace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires.

Yes

Replace the Fuse.

Relay (RY1)

6

No

Replace the Relay.

7-13

K116sm7e1

Cause Solid State Relay (SSR1)

Checking order 7

Checking Select the Device Operation Mode, and then change the signal of the following signals to “H”. Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay) 21 (Fuser Lamp 1) Then check the voltage between J105-1 and J105-2. Is it 0V? Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.)

Result Yes No

Treatment Replace the Solid State Relay Replace the PW11620 PCB.

CAUTION Change the signal of “21” (Fuser Lamp 1) back to “L” after checking!

7. 1. 2. 2
Cause Error clearance

Fuser Error (E-001)
Checking order 1 Checking Have you cleared the fuser error in the Error Clear Mode? (Refer to page 8-154 for the Error Clear Mode.) Are wires among Lamp (H1, H2), Solid State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 & TH2) connected properly? Does the error occur again even if you have cleared it in the Error Clear Mode? Select the Information Mode, and then check the temperature of fuser detected by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2). Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1) 01 (Fuser temperature 2) Is each temperature normal? (Refer to page 8-12 for the Information Mode.) Result Yes Treatment Wait until the Fuser Unit has cooled down enough. Then select the Error Clear Mode and clear the concerning error. Connect them properly.

Wires

2

No

Solid State Relay (SSR1) Thermistors (TH1 & TH2)

3 4

Yes No

Replace the Solid State Relay. Replace the concerning Thermistor.

7-14

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 2. 3
Cause Error clearance

Fuser Error (E-003)
Checking order 1 Checking Have you cleared the fuser error in the Error Clear Mode? (Refer to page 8-154 for the Error Clear Mode.) Are wires among Lamp (H1, H2), Solid State Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 & TH2) connected properly? Select the Information Mode, and then check the temperature of fuser detected by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2). Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1) 01 (Fuser temperature 2) Is each temperature normal? (Refer to page 8-12 for the Information Mode.) Result Yes Treatment Wait until the Fuser Unit has cooled down enough. Then select the Error Clear Mode and clear the concerning error. Connect them properly.

Wires

2

No

Thermistors (TH1 & TH2)

3

No

Replace the concerning Thermistor.

7. 1. 2. 4
Cause Wires

Main Motor Error (E-010)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the wire between the Main Motor and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange wire (J220-4). Is it 24V? Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? Check the operation of Main Motor in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 00 (Main Motor) Does the Main Motor operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.) Result No No Treatment Connect it properly. Replace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires.

DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse

Yes

Replace the Fuse.

Main Motor (M1)

3

No

Replace the Main Motor.

7-15

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 2. 5
Cause Wires

Fuser Motor Error (E-011)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the wire between the Fuser Motor and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange wire (J220-4). Is it 24V? Confirm that the machine is turned off, and then check whether or not each Fuse is broken. Is any Fuse broken? Check the operation of Fuser Motor in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 01 (Fuser Motor) Does the Fuser Motor operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.) Result No No Treatment Connect it properly. Replace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires.

DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse

Yes

Replace the Fuse.

Fuser Motor (M2)

3

No

Replace the Fuser Motor.

7. 1. 2. 6
Cause Wires

Developer Press Motor Error (E-012)
Checking order 1 Checking Are the wires among Developer Press Sensor (PH4), PW11620 PCB, Driver PCB B (PW6654) and Developer Press Motor (M4) connected properly? Turn off the machine, and then turn it on again. Did the Developer Unit move to the Drum side? Select the Signal Code “104” (Developer Press Sensor) in the Signal Status Mode, and then turn on the machine again. Does the status change from “H” to “L” after turning on? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Does the fuse (F3) have proper conductivity? Result No Treatment Connect them properly.

Developer Press Motor (M4) Driver PCB B (PW6654) Developer Press Sensor (PH4)

2

No

Replace the Developer Press Motor or Driver PCB B. Replace the Developer Press Sensor.

3

No

Fuse

4

No

Replace the fuse (F3).

7-16

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 2. 7
Cause Wires

Counter Error (E-020)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the wire between the Counter and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Confirm that the machine is turned on, and then check the voltage of the orange wire (J220-5). Is it 24V? Turn off the machine. Does the fuse (F1) have proper conductivity? Result No No Treatment Connect it properly. Replace the DC Power Supply if there is no problem with the wires.

DC Power Supply (DCP1) or Fuse

No

Replace the fuse (F1).

Counter

3

Check the operation of the Counter in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 26 (Counter) Does the Counter operate correctly? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.)

No

Replace the Counter.

7. 1. 2. 8

High Voltage Output Error (E-031, E-032 & E-033)

E-031 : Image Corona Output Error E-032 : Separation Corona Output Error E-033 : Transfer Corona Output Error
Cause Wires Checking order 1 Checking Are wires among Image Corona, HV Power Supply PCB and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Is the Image Corona dirty? Is the Corona Wire broken? Is the Transfer Corona dirty? Is the Corona Wire broken? Is the Separation Corona dirty? Is the Corona Wire broken? Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply? Result No Treatment Connect them properly.

Image Corona

2

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Transfer Corona

3

Separation Corona

4

HV Power Supply

5

Clean each Corona Wire, Grid Plate and housing. Replace the Corona Wire. Clean each Corona Wire and housing. Replace the Corona Wire. Clean each Corona Wire and housing. Replace the Corona Wire. OK

7-17

K116sm7e1

7. 1. 2. 9
Cause Wires

Bias Output Error (E-034)
Checking order 1 Checking Are wires among Developer Unit, HV Power Supply PCB and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Is the toner spilling out from the Developer Unit? (Or is there any similar problem?) Is the high voltage for the Regulation Roller leaking? (The resistance between the central part of the Regulation Roller and the Ground is 5 mega ohm or smaller if its leaking.) GND Result No Treatment Connect them properly.

Developer Unit

2

Yes

Clean each Corona Wire, Grid Plate and housing. Replace the Regulation Roller.

Yes

Multi-meter

HV Power Supply

3

Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply?

Yes

OK

7. 1. 2. 10
Cause Wires Cutter Home Position Sensors (MS6 & MS7)

Cutter Error (E-040)
Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the wire between the Cutter Unit and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Check the status of the following signals in the Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. Signal Code : 094 (Cutter Home Position Right) 095 (Cutter Home Position Left) Is the status “L” when the Cutter is at each home position? (Refer to page 8-9 for the Signal Status Mode.) Check the operation of Cutter in the Device Operation Mode of the Service Mode. Device Code : 27 (Cutter Motor 1) 28 (Cutter Motor 2) Does the Cutter operate? (Refer to page 8-16 for the Device Operation Mode.) Result No No Treatment Connect it properly. Replace the Cutter Unit.

Developer Press Sensor (PH4)

3

No

Replace the Cutter Unit.

7-18

K116sm7e1

Density Sensor (PH11) PW11620 PCB 2 3 Yes No OK OK 7.7. 11 Cause PW11620 PCB FPGA Error (E-050) Checking order 1 Checking Can you fix the problem if you replace the PW11620 PCB? Result Yes OK Treatment 7. 2. Density Sensor (PH11) PW11620 PCB 2 3 Yes No OK OK 7-19 K116sm7e1 . 2. 13 Cause Wires Density Sensor Error (E-080) Checking order 1 Checking Is the wire between the Toner Density Sensor and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Can you fix the problem if you replace the Density Sensor? Can you fix the problem if you replace PW11620 PCB? Result No Treatment Connect it properly. 7. Adjust the position of the Switch (or Toner Hatch and Engine Unit). 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. 2. 12 Cause Wires Switch (MS4) Developer Error (E-070) Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the wire between Developer Unit and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Is the actuator of the Switch correctly pressed down when you close the Engine Unit or Toner Hatch? Result No No Treatment Connect it properly. 14 Cause Wires Density Sensor Output Error (E-081) Checking order 1 Checking Is the wire between the Toner Density Sensor and PW11620 PCB connected properly? Can you fix the problem if you replace the Density Sensor? Can you fix the problem if you replace PW11620 PCB? Result No Treatment Connect it properly.

0 +/-0.2 +/-0.05VDC other media: 1.3 +/-0. 1 Troubleshooting .Image Quality Basic Image Adjustment The following are the settings specified for the image creation components. 2 7.05VDC VR201 Service Mode 04-029 (Plain) 04-030 (Tracing) 04-031 (Film) 11 mm Separation Corona (AC) CP31 (+) CPCOM (-) 5. please check whether or not these settings are satisfied first.7.0 +/-0.05V VR302 11mm Separation Corona (DC) Negative Developer Roller Bias CP33 (+) Ground (-) OUTPUT2 (+) Ground (-) -250 +/-5VDC -180 +/-5VDC VR303 Service Mode 04-022 (Plain) 04-023 (Tracing) 04-024 (Film) VR401 - Positive Developer Roller Bias Toner Supply Roller Bias (On printing) Toner Supply Roller Bias (print interval) Regulation Roller Bias Positive Cleaning Roller Bias Negative Cleaning Roller Bias OUTPUT2 (+) Ground (-) OUTPUT1 (+) OUTPUT2 (-) OUTPUT1 (+) OUTPUT2 (-) OUTPUT2 (+) OUTPUT3 (-) OUTPUT5 (+) Ground (-) OUTPUT5 (+) Ground (-) +350 +/-5VDC the same voltage as Developer Bias the same voltage as Developer Bias -120 +/-5VDC +450 +/-5VDC -550 +/-5VDC - Service Mode 04-622 OUT5 (+) OUT5 (-) 7-20 K116sm7e2 . 2. When a defective image is printed out.05VDC Way of adjustment VR101 Height of Corona Wire 11mm Transfer Corona CP21 (+) CP22 (-) Plain paper: 1. Component Image Corona Checking Point (PW11620) CP11 (+) CPCOM (-) Designated voltage 1.

If the paper was not the specified one. Is the problem fixed? Is the Lens Array of LED Head dirty? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Result Yes OK Treatment LED Head Paper 2 3 Yes Yes Image Corona 4 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Is the input voltage to the Image Corona correct? No Eraser Lamp 5 Does the Eraser Lamp light properly? No Separation Lamp 6 Does the Separation Lamp light properly? No Transfer Corona 7 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty? Is the input voltage to the Transfer Corona correct? Yes No Contact points of Developer Bias 8 Is each Electrode Plate on the right of the Developer Unit making contact to the Electrode Plate on the machine side? No HV Power Supply PCB 9 Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply PCB? Yes Clean it. Check or replace the Separation Lamp. Check the wire connected to the Separation Lamp. 2. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. Cause Checking order 1 Checking Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7. Grid Plate and housing.Image Quality Halftone is too light Check the following matters with Test Pattern No.2. 3. 2. 2. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona] on page 4-33. 2 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Image Corona] on page 4-31. If the paper was humidified. Clean each Corona Wire.1 Basic Image Adjustment] on page 7-20. Readjust the input voltage. OK 7-21 K116sm7e2 . And supply the conductive grease to the Electrode Plates.7. 1 Countermeasures . Check the wire connected to the Eraser Lamp. 2. 2. Readjust the input voltage. 1. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. If necessary use other Test Patterns. explain to the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. 3. 2. 2 7. instruct the customer to properly store the paper. Refer to [4. or replace the Corona Wire if it is too dirty.1 and No. 1.3. or replace the Corona Wire if it is too dirty. Try to install the Developer Unit so that they are contacted to each other. 1. Check or replace the Eraser Lamp. Clean each Corona Wire and housing. Refer to [4.

Cause Installation of Developer Unit Checking order 10 Checking Is the driving gear on the left of the Developer Unit meshed with the driving mechanism on machine side? Result No Treatment Check whether or not the Cam of Developer Press Unit surely presses the Developer Unit. Check the whole Developer Unit to find the cause. Replace the Photoconductive Drum. Check the concerning gears. Developer Unit 11 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with toner? No Yes 7-22 K116sm7e2 .

1 and No. Check the wire or the connector connected to the Toner Sensor. Paper 4 Lead Wire 5 Input voltage to the Transfer Corona 6 Is the resistance of the Lead Wire about 10 kilo ohm? This wire connects between the HV Power Supply and the Transfer Corona. If necessary use other Test Patterns. and then install it to the machine correctly. Does the toner image look normal? Is the Transfer/Separation Corona installed to the machine correctly? Is the high voltage to the Transfer Corona leaking? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Result Yes OK Treatment 2 Yes No Go on to the step 3.1 Basic Image Adjustment] on page 7-20. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona] on page 4-33. Remove the Developer Unit. Replace the Photoconductive Drum. If the paper was not the specified one. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. and then check the toner image on the Drum. 1.3. Clean the Transfer Corona. 2. 3.7. 2. 1. Installation of Developer Unit 10 No Toner Sensor 11 Is there enough toner in the Developer Unit? No Yes 7-23 K116sm7e2 . Transfer Corona 3 No Yes Yes Install it correctly. Check the concerning gears. Replace the Lead Wire. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No. instruct the customer on the proper way to store the paper. 2. Clean it. 2. Check the Toner Sensor. Go on to the step 7. Check the whole Developer Unit to find the cause. Is the correct voltage supplied from the HV Power Supply to the Transfer Corona? No No Dirt of the LED Head Developer Unit 7 8 9 Is the LED Head dirty? Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with toner? Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed toward the Drum? (Are the Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller touching the Drum Unit?) Is the driving gear on the left of the Developer Unit meshing properly to the driving mechanism on machine side? Yes No No Readjust the input voltage. Cause Checking order 1 Checking Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7. Check whether or not the Cam of Developer Press Unit surely presses the Developer Unit. If the paper was humidified. Refer to [4.2. Is the problem fixed? Turn off the machine in the middle of printing. Check the Developer Press Unit. explain to the customer that some image problem may occur in that case.

If necessary use other Test Patterns. Connect the Lead Wire correctly. instruct the customer on the proper way to store the paper. and then install it to the machine correctly. and also check the HV Power Supply. Is the correct voltage inputted from the HV Power Supply to the Transfer Corona? Yes No 1. Remove the Developer Unit.1 and No.7. Go on to the step 4. Refer to [4. Lead Wire Developer Bias 9 10 No No 7-24 K116sm7e2 . Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB. If the paper was humidified. Cause Checking order 1 Checking Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7. 3 The whole image is extremely light Check the following matters with Test Pattern No.1 Basic Image Adjustment] on page 7-20. Is the problem fixed? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Result Yes OK Treatment Paper 2 Yes Do you have the problem only when you use film? Yes 3 Turn off the machine in the middle of printing. Lead Wire 5 Input voltage to the Transfer Corona 6 No Driving mechanism of Developer Unit Developer Unit 7 8 Is the Developer Unit driving normally? Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed toward the Drum? (Are the Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller touching the Drum Unit?) Is the Lead Wire that supplies the Developer Bias correctly connected? Is the Developer Unit supplied with the Developer Bias correctly? No No Readjust the input voltage. Check the driving mechanism. Does the toner image look normal? Is the Transfer/Separation Corona installed to the machine correctly? Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona leaking? Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 kilo ohm? This wire connects between the HV Power Supply and the Transfer Corona. 3. so that the Separation Lamp works for the film. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona] on page 4-33.2.3. Check the contact points of Developer Bias. Go on to the step 8. 2. 2.067 (Transfer Assist Setting) in the Adjustment Mode of Service Mode. Change the setting of Item No. If the paper was not the specified one. Clean the Transfer Corona. and then check the toner image on the Drum. 2. explain the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. Replace the Lead Wire. Transfer Corona 4 No Yes No Install it correctly.

If it is not correct. 2. 2. 2. Remove the Developer Unit. Replace the PW11620 PCB. 5 Totally appeared foggy image Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. 2.7. Reinstall Scraper. 1.3. Level the machine correctly. 2. readjust it. or replace the Corona Wire. Installation of Developer Unit 2 LED Head Eraser Lamp 3 4 Yes No Developer Unit 5 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with toner? Is the toner accumulating evenly in the Developer Unit? No No 7. 4 Density is uneven Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Cause Checking order 1 Checking Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7. and then install it to the machine correctly. Check the Developer Press Unit. Adjust the height properly.1 Basic Image Adjustment] on page 7-20.1 and No.2. Replace the Eraser Lamp. 2. Check the output voltage from the HV Power Supply to the Developer Unit.4. readjust it. If necessary use other Test Patterns. If it is not correct. Is the problem fixed? Is the Developer Roller insulated from ground? Is the foggy image printed even if you print a completely white pattern? Result Yes OK Treatment Developer Unit Image Corona 2 3 No Yes Developer Bias 4 Is the Developer Unit supplied with the correct Developer Bias during the printing process? No Photoconductive Drum 5 Have you used the Photoconductive Drum longer than its part life? Yes Check the Developer Roller and connector.1 and No. Or replace the HV Power Supply PCB Replace the Photoconductive Drum. Check the output voltage from the HV Power Supply to the Image Corona. Clean the Regulation Roller. If necessary use other Test Patterns. Clean it. Cause Image Corona Checking order 1 Checking Is the Image Corona dirty? Is the height of Corona Wire different between left and right? Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed toward the Drum? (Are the Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller touching the Drum Unit?) Is the Lens Array dirty Are all LED of the Eraser Lamp light properly during the print? Result Yes Yes No Treatment Clean the Image Corona. 1. 7-25 K116sm7e2 .

Cause Light from the outside Image Corona Developer Unit Checking order 1 2 3 Checking Is any light from the outside thrown onto the Drum? Is the Image Corona dirty? Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with toner? Result Yes Yes No Treatment Install the outer cover correctly. If not. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical) Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Yes Yes Foreign substance 2 Clean the Image Corona.1 and No. which is contacting the Drum? Is the Image Corona dirty? Is there some foreign substance on each Corona Unit or LED Head. Remove it.1 and No. or replace the Corona Wire. 7-26 K116sm7e2 . 2. If necessary use other Test Patterns. If necessary use other Test Patterns.4. 5. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical) Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. or replace the Corona Wire. which is contacting the Drum? Are there any black lines or damage on the Drum which corresponds with the positions of black lines on the print? Result Yes Treatment Remove it.4. 2. Clean the Image Corona. Be sure to find the cause of the damage. Replace the Drum if it is damaged. 2 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum]. 2. fix it at the correct position.7. 7. Cause Image Corona Checking order 1 Checking Is there something like a filament on the Grid Plate. 2. Photoconductive Drum 3 Yes Clean the Drum. Check if the Regulation Roller is fixed at the proper position. Refer to [5.

which is contacting the Drum? Can you fix the problem if you clean the LED Head? Is there any foreign substance or dirt on the Transfer/Separation Corona? Is the Developer Roller evenly covered with the toner? Result Yes Treatment Remove it. Cause Image Corona Checking order 1 Checking Is there something like a filament on the Grid Plate. 8 White line (Vertical) Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Be sure to find the cause of the damage. Dirt of the LED Head Transfer/Separation Corona Developer Unit 2 3 4 Yes Yes No OK Clean the Transfer / Separation Corona. which runs to the direction of Drum rotation. 5. Replace the Drum if it is damaged. Check whether or not there is damage or foreign substance on the Regulation Roller.3. If necessary use other Test Patterns. 2 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum]. Yes Yes Clean the Drum Refer to [5. 2.7. Clean it off Entrance of Fuser Unit Photoconductive Drum 5 6 Is there any foreign substance or dirt around the entrance area of the Fuser Unit? Is there any damage on the Drum. 7-27 K116sm7e2 . 2.1 and No.

Check if there is enough toner in the Developer Unit. 5. 1. check the distance between the Transfer Guide and Drum.7. Is the problem fixed? Are the Transfer Guides of the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty with the toner? Result Yes OK Treatment Transfer Guides 2 Yes Developer Unit Inner Transport Unit Fuser Unit 3 4 5 Is too much toner accumulating under the Developer Roller? Is the Inner Transport Unit dirty with the toner? Is the Fuser Entrance Guide Plate dirty with toner? Are the Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller dirty with toner? Yes Yes Yes Yes Clean them.6 to 0. 2. Clean them 7-28 K116sm7e2 . replace the Toner Sensor. Paper Developer Unit 3 Does the void of image appear on the print constantly keeping about 160mm of interval? Yes Does the void of image mainly run vertically as follows? Yes Photoconductive Drum 4 Does the void of image appear on the print constantly keeping about 251mm of interval? Yes Clean the Drum. 9 Void of image Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Be sure to find the cause of the damage. (It should be 0.7 (halftone). explain to the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. 2. 2 Cleaning of Photoconductive Drum]. 7. If not. Replace Drum if damaged. Wipe the Developer Roller with a dry cloth. Refer to [5. 1. and also find where the toner came from.10 Dirt on the back of the print Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. 2.7. Can you find voided image on the print? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Result Yes Yes Treatment Go to the step 2. Cause Checking order 1 2 Checking Print out the Test Patter No. After that. Clean it. instruct the customer on the proper way to store the paper. If the paper was not the specified one. It must be “L” when the toner is not covering the Toner Sensor.1 and No.) Clean the Developer Unit. 3. Clean the Counter Rollers at both sides of the Developer Roller. 1. 2. If necessary use other Test Patterns.4. 2. Clean it. 2.2. Also select the Device Status Mode and check the Toner Sensor Signal (Device Code: 107). If the paper was humidified. 2. If necessary use other Test Patterns.1 Basic Image Adjustment] on page 7-20. Cause Checking order 1 Checking Try to readjust each image creation component according to [7.7mm. Replace the Developer Roller if damaged.1 and No.

1.5 to 9. If the paper was not the specified one. If the paper was humidified. and turn off the machine in the middle of printing. Adjust the fusing pressure correctly. 1.0mm 7-29 K116sm7e2 . Cause Fuser Unit Checking order 1 Checking Is the Fuser Roller properly heated up after turning on the machine? Result No Treatment Refer to [7.11 Defective fusing Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. 2. Is it 8.3. Remove the print from the machine and check the “nip width”. 2. Paper 2 Is the type of paper selected on the UI match the installed paper? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? No Yes Fusing temperature setting 3 Does the fusing temperature specified in the Service Mode suit the weight (gram/square meter) of paper? Yes No Fusing pressure (Nip) 4 Print the Test Pattern No.1 and No. instruct the customer on the proper way to store the paper. Select the correct paper type on the UI. Set the fusing temperature correctly. Is there any part which is burnt? Replace the part that’s burnt.) 2mm 2mm No 8.0mm? (Measure at 2 mm from the edges. 1 Fuser Error (E-001. explain to the customer that some image problem may occur in that case.7. E-002 & E-004)] to check the Fuser Unit. If necessary use other Test Patterns. 2. 2.2 with tracing paper (36” or A0).5 to 9.

6. No Leading Edge Correct leading margin is 5mm (+/-2mm). 2. Developer Roller 2 Developer Unit 3 Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 3mm of interval? Does a void of image appear on the print constantly Keeping about 160mm of interval? Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 6. Check if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (16T) on the left side. Adjust (slightly slower) the corresponding Fuser Motor Speed 1 and 2.1 and No. 7.1 and No. If necessary use other Test Patterns. 2.0mm of interval? Yes Yes Yes Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 6. 35T & 25T) on the left side.1mm of interval? Fuser Unit 4 Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 155mm of interval? Yes Yes 7-30 K116sm7e2 . Check the following matters with Test Pattern No.12 Defective image placement. 22T & 24T) on the right side.6. Cause Setting of Leading Registration Feed rollers Registration Clutch Checking order 1 2 3 Checking Is the Leading Registration properly adjusted in the Service Mode? Have you used the feeding rollers for a very long term? Does the Registration Clutch operate correctly without slipping? Result No Yes No Treatment Adjust it properly.7. 2. Check if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (80T & 50T). Check if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (25/34T & 16/30T) on the left side.6mm of interval? Yes Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 16. Check if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (28T. Cause Photoconductive Drum and its driving mechanism Checking order 1 Checking Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 251mm of interval? Result Yes Treatment 1.4mm of interval? Yes Does the jitter appear on the print constantly Keeping about 8. 30T. Replace the Registration Clutch. Replace them. 2. If necessary use other Test Patterns. Check if there is any damage or foreign substance on the driving gears (32T. Check if there is any foreign substance between Drum and Counter Rollers of Developer Unit. 2. replace it.13 Jitter Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Check and correct the engagement of Pulley Gear on the Drum with Belt 4. If the Developer Roller is damaged.

7.15 Uneven image density (vertical) Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. 8mm 7-31 K116sm7e2 . and then reinstall it to the machine. and then reinstall it to the machine.8. If necessary use other Test Patterns. 5 Is the width of abnormal density area about 8mm as follows? Yes Replace the LED Head. If necessary use other Test Patterns. 2. Treatment Transfer / Separation Corona 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona dirty? Yes 7. Is the problem fixed? Is the density of any image block different from that of other blocks? Result Yes Yes Yes Clean it. Clean it. Cause Dirt on the LED Head Installation of LED Head Checking order 1 2 Checking Is the LED Head dirty? Remove the LED Head.14 Image looks not sharp Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Clean it. OK Adjust the gap between LED Head and Drum by adding or removing the thin plates on the Aluminium Block at both sides of the Drum. Is the problem fixed? Result Yes Yes No Clean it. 2. OK Treatment 4 Yes Adjust the gap between LED Head and Drum by adding or removing the Spacers on the Aluminium Block.1 and No.1 and No. Cause Image Corona Transfer/Separation Corona Installation of LED Head Checking order 1 2 3 Checking Is the Image Corona dirty? Is the Transfer/Separation Corona dirty? Remove the LED Head. 2.6. 2.

If necessary use other Test Patterns. 2.1. Cause Image Corona or HV Power Supply PCB Checking order 1 Checking Is the Image Corona Wire broken? Is the tension of the Corona Wire correct? Is the Corona Wire correctly stretched with the springs? Is a proper high voltage supplied to the Image Corona? Is the housing of the Image Corona insulated from the ground? Can you fix the problem if you replace the PW11620 PCB? Result Yes No No No Treatment Replace it. or replace the HV Power Supply PCB Replace the Zener PCB. LED Head 4 Are connectors of the signal cable firmly connected to the LED Head? Turn off the machine in the middle of printing. Connect them firmly. Cause Developer Press Unit Driving mechanism of Developer Unit Developer Bias Checking order 1 2 3 Checking Is the Developer Unit correctly pressed to the Drum? Does the Developer Roller rotate during the print process? Is each Electrode Plate on the right of the Developer Unit surely contacted to the Electrode Plate on the machine side? Result No No No Treatment Check the Developer Press Unit. And supply the conductive grease to the Electrode Plates.1 and No. Connect it correctly.4. Install it correctly. Check the driving mechanism of Process Unit. Is there any toner image on the Drum? Is the Transfer Corona Wire broken? Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit correctly installed to the machine? If the high voltage leaking from the Transfer Corona? Is the connection of Lead Wire correct? No No Transfer/Separation Corona 5 Yes No Yes Replace it. Adjust the high voltage. Yes Yes OK OK 7. Check the Transfer / Separation Corona to find the cause for leaking.16 Completely white (No image) Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. Can you fix the problem if you replace the HV Power Supply? Can you fix the problem if you replace the PW11620 PCB? No Replace the Lead Wire. If necessary use other Test Patterns. Replace the LED Head. Check whether or not the springs are deformed. 2. 2.7. 2. Replace it. Try to install the Developer Unit so that they are contacting each other. OK No Yes PW11620 PCB 2 7-32 K116sm7e2 . Lead Wire of Transfer Corona 6 No HV Power Supply PW11620 PCB 7 8 Is the resistance of the Lead Wire about 10 kilo ohm? This wire connects between the HV Power Supply and the Transfer Corona.17 Completely black Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. and then check the toner image on the Drum.

5 to 59.0mm? (Measure at 2 mm from the edge.2 with tracing paper (36” or A0). 7-33 K116sm7e2 . If the paper was humidified. Cause Checking order 1 Checking Make several prints continuously. 2. Is this Blower working properly when printing wide prints (30”/ 34”/ 36”/ A0)? This blower cools down the Fuser. Paper 2 No Yes Lamp (H1. Middle : 60.5 to 9.18 Crease of paper Check the following matters with Test Pattern No.7. Is it 8. Remove the print from the machine and check the “nip width”. H2) of Fuser Blower (Separation) 3 4 Is the Dehumidify Heater ON although the air is not humid.0mm Fuser Motor speed 8 Is the paper slackened during the transportation when you make a long print? Yes Make the Fuser Motor speed faster. Replace it.8. 8. No Turn the adjuster screw(s) to reach the correct height.0mm Side : 58. 6 Yes Clean or replace it. and turn off the machine in the middle of printing. If necessary use other Test Patterns. Blower (Fuser Cooler) Fuser Entrance Guide 5 No Replace it. 2.1 and No. Is the Fuser Entrance Guide deformed? Or Is there anything on the Fuser Entrance Guide? Remove the Pressure Roller and measure the height of the Fuser Entrance Guide.0mm Print the Test Patter No. Replace it. explain to the customer that some image problem may occur in that case. 2.) 2mm 2mm Yes No No Select the correct paper type on the UI.5 to 61. 1. Fusing pressure (Nip) 7 No Adjust the fusing pressure correctly.5 to 9. Can you find the crease on the 2nd or later prints? Does the type of paper selected on the UI match the installed paper? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Result Yes Treatment Go to the following “8”. Does the Lamp light correctly? Is this Blower working properly while printing? This Blower helps paper transportation. Turn off the Dehumidify Heater. Is the height correct? From the frame bottom surface. If the paper was not the specified one. instruct the customer on the proper way to store the paper.

No 7-34 K116sm7e2 . Replace it. 2. instruct the customer on the proper way to store the paper. 1. Is the height correct? From the frame bottom surface.5 to 61. 5 Yes Clean or replace it. Replace it. Remove the print from the machine and check the “nip width”. Is it 8. Cause Paper Checking order 1 Checking Does the type of paper selected on the UI match the installed paper? Can you fix the problem if you use a newly unpacked paper? Result No Yes Treatment Select the correct paper type on the UI.) 2mm 2mm No No Blower (Fuser Cooler) Fuser Entrance Guide 4 No Replace it. explain to the customer that some image problem may occur in that case.1.0mm Fusing Temperature 7 Does the fusing temperature specified in the Service Mode suit the weight (gram/square meter) of paper? Yes Is there any part which is burnt? Replace the part that’s burnt. If the paper was not the specified one. H2) of Fuser Blower (Separation) 2 3 Does the Lamp light correctly? Is this Blower working properly while printing? This blower helps paper transportation. If necessary use other Test Patterns.5 to 9.0mm Print the Test Patter No. and turn off the machine in the middle of printing.19 Double Image Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. If the paper was humidified. Is this Blower working properly when printing wide prints (30”/ 34”/ 36”/ A0)? This blower cools down the Fuser? Is the Fuser Entrance Guide deformed? Or Is there anything on the Fuser Entrance Guide? Remove the Pressure Roller and measure the height of the Fuser Entrance Guide.2 with tracing paper (36” or A0). No Turn the adjuster screw(s) to reach the correct height.0mm Side : 58. 2.7. Fusing Pressure (Nip) 6 No Adjust the fusing pressure correctly. Lamp (H1.0mm? (Measure at 2 mm from the edge. Middle : 60. 2. Set the fusing temperature correctly.5 to 9.5 to 59. 8.

Decrease the setting value of fusing temperature (-3 to 5).7. 2. Cause Paper Developer Unit or Transfer/Separation Corona Fuser Unit Checking order 1 2 Checking Does the type of paper selected on the UI match the installed paper? Does the paper have dirt on it before it enters the Fuser Unit? Clean the Fuser Roller. If necessary use other Test Patterns. Check the Developer Unit or Transfer/Separation Corona to find the cause.2.20 Dirt on the print (Offset) Check the following matters with Test Pattern No. 2. OK 3 Yes No 7-35 K116sm7e2 . Do you still have the problem even after the cleaning? Result No Yes Treatment Select the correct paper type on the UI.

1 Cause Sensor Troubleshooting . 3. If broken replace it. 1 7. 3.Scanner Defects Countermeasures . Connect it correctly. USB Cable Data Controller Board 2 3 Is the USB Cable connected correctly? Can you fix the problem if you replace the Data Controller Board? No Yes Check this sensor. OK Foreign substance Motor +24VDC Data Controller Board 4 Can you fix the problem if you replace the Data Controller Board? Yes 7. 3 7. OK 7. 3 Cause Sensor Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop) Checking order 1 Checking Is any sensor broken? Result Yes Treatment Replace it. 1. Check the Motor. 3.Scanner operation Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport) Checking order 1 Checking Is the original detected? (Is it shown on the UI?) Result No Treatment Check the sensor which detects the leading edge of original. 7-36 K116sm7e2 . 1. 2 Cause Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position Checking order 1 2 3 Checking Is there any foreign substance under the Upper Unit? Does the Motor rotate? Is +24VDC supplied to the scanner? Result Yes No No Treatment Remove it. 1. Replace it if broken. 3. Check the DC Power Supply on the printer part. and replace it if broken.7.

7-37 K116sm7e2 . such as breakage. short-circuit or damage to connector pin? Is the DC Power Supply on the printer part normal? Prepare another PC which can recognize another type of USB Scanner. 4 Cause Original is mis-fed Checking order 1 Checking Is there any foreign substance under the Upper Unit? Result Yes Treatment Remove it.7. 1. Foreign substance 7. Replace the USB Cable. Is it also impossible to recognize the scanner (of KIP 3100) with this PC? Result 1 Yes Treatment Check the USB Driver in Device Manager. 3. 3. Foreign substance 7. which blocks the light to the sensor? Result Yes Treatment Remove it. 6 Cause USB Driver USB Cable Scanner is not recognized Checking order 1 2 Checking Does the PC recognize USB? Is there any problem with the USB cable. 1. 1. DC Power Supply Data Controller Board 3 4 No Yes Replace the DC Power Supply. 3. Replace the Data Controller PCB. 5 Cause Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on Checking order 1 Checking Is there any foreign substance under the Upper Unit.

1 Shading]. 1. 2.4. 2.4.) Is the cable of each CIS connected properly? Is the LED of each CIS lighting? Result Yes OK Treatment Cable of CIS 2 No LED of CIS 3 No Connect it properly.1 Shading]. 2. 2 7. 3. 2. 3. Check the DC Power Supply (+24V) in the printer. OK 7-38 K116sm7e2 . 3. Replace the CIS. 3. OK 7. or replace the cable if it is broken.12. 3 Cause Scan Glass Calibration Vertical white lines Checking order 1 2 Checking Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Glass? Can you fix the problem if you complete the Shading (Calibration)? (Refer to [8.4. 7.) Are the feeding rollers dirty? Can you fix the problem if you replace the CIS? Result Yes Yes Treatment Clean / replace it. OK Feeding rollers CIS 3 4 Yes Yes Clean them. 3. Replace it if broken.) Are the feeding rollers dirty? Can you fix the problem if you replace the CIS? Result Yes Yes Treatment Clean / replace it.12.12. 2 Cause Scan Glass Calibration Vertical black lines Checking order 1 2 Checking Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Glass? Can you fix the problem if you complete the Shading (Calibration)? (Refer to [8.1 Shading]. 1 Cause Calibration Countermeasures – Scan Image Quality Completely black Checking order 1 Checking Can you fix the problem if you complete the Shading (Calibration)? (Refer to [8.7. OK Feeding rollers CIS 3 4 Yes Yes Clean them. Replace the Data Controller Board.

6 Cause Scan Glass Resolution Image quality is not good Checking order 1 2 Checking Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Glass? Is the resolution setting proper? Result Yes No Treatment Clean / replace it.12. 7.3 Position].) Result Yes OK Treatment 7.) Result Yes OK Treatment 7. 5 Cause Calibration Vertical image gap between Image Blocks Checking order 1 Checking Can you fix the problem if you complete the Position adjustment? (Refer to [8.7.4. 2. 2.4.4. 3.12.) Result Yes OK Treatment 7-39 K116sm7e2 . 2. 2. 4 Cause Calibration Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks Checking order 1 Checking Can you fix the problem if you complete the Position adjustment? (Refer to [8.1 Shading]. 3. 7 Cause Calibration Density is different between left and right Checking order 1 Checking Can you fix the problem if you complete the Shading (Calibration)? (Refer to [8. Adjust it properly. 3.3 Position]. 3.12.

7-40 K116sm7e3 .7. Press [?] at the lower right on the screen. 2. Press [Service] to enter Service Configuration screen. 4 Touch Screen Calibration If the cursor position in the screen does not correctly match the tapped position on the panel. the touch screen should be calibrated so that the cursor is located directly underneath your finger or a stylus. 1.

Press [Reset] to close UI operation window. Press [OK]. 4. Type “8495107” and press [Enter]. 5. 7-41 K116sm7e3 .3. A password entry window will pop up. Make sure that a wrench symbol is indicated at the upper right of the screen. Service Configuration screen is displayed.

Tap Diagnostics folder twice as a double-click. 7-42 K116sm7e3 . 7. Select [Tools] tab. Run the shortcut “TouchScreen Configure Utility” for touch screen calibration.6.

Press [Draw Test] to check that the touch screen correctly detects a tapped position. 9. NOTE Using a stylus is recommended for easy and accurate touch screen calibration. Do not use any sharp instrument. 7-43 K116sm7e3 . Test screen will appear.8.

Cursor does not match the tap point Cursor Tap point 7-44 K116sm7e3 . Cursor matches the tap point Cursor Tap point If the cursor appears at an unintended position. Tap a certain point and check if the cursor appears directly underneath the stylus. For example. Tap this cross The cursor will appear just underneath the tapped point in a correct condition (calibration is not necessary). the touch screen should be calibrated. suppose you tap the point shown the next figure.10.

a blinking X symbol appears on the bottom left corner.11. 7-45 K116sm7e3 . On the Calibration screen. 12. NOTE Press the X symbol for several seconds before the progress bar at the bottom reaches the end. 13. Tap [Quit] to close Test screen. Press [4 Points Calibration]. Press the X until it stops blinking with a beep.

When all the 4 points are pressed successfully. 16. 15. Press [OK]. Press [OK] to finish touch screen calibration. top right. Perform the same way for the other 3 points. top left.14. The X disappears and the next one will come in the following order: bottom right. 7-46 K116sm7e3 . Calibration screen disappears and the following dialog appears.

17. 7-47 K116sm7e3 . Run the shortcut “Restart KIP UI” for KIP UI operation.

5.18 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No.19 Print . 4. 5.039 to 044) 8.16 Separation Corona ON Timing (No.6 8.9 8.035) 8.10 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-18 8-18 8-18 8-20 8-36 8-36 8-36 8-37 8-38 8-39 8-41 8-43 8-44 8-44 8-45 8-47 8-48 8-49 8-50 8-50 8-51 8-51 8-52 8-53 8-54 8-54 8-55 8-56 8-56 K116sm8e1 8.037) 8. 5. 4. 2 Indication and Operation 8.9 8.019) 8.046) 8.051) . 4. 2 Signal Status Mode 8. 4. 5.028) 8. 2 Indication and Operation 8.8 8. 2.022 to 027) 8. 4. 4. 3 Setting Item list 8. 5.11 Leading Margin (No. 4. 5. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 4. 4. 4 Explanation for each Setting Item 8. 5. 5. 4. 4. 5. 4 Side Registration (No. 2. 4. 4.13 Developer Bias (No. 2 Trailing Margin (No. 1. 5. 4. 5 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block (No. 1 Outline of Service Mode 8.020) 8.9 8. 1 Function 8. 5.15 Transfer Voltage (No. 4.12 Cut Length 4 (Compensation of a long print) (No. 5.10 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of a long print) (No. 004) 8.011 to 013) 8.018) 8.17 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No.7 8.23 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No.6 8. 5. 5.029 to 034) 8. 5. 1 Function 8. 1. 7 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Blocks (No. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode 8. 2 Indication and Operation 8.017) 8.22 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No. 3 Side Margin (Left & Right) (No. 4. 4 Device Operation Mode 8. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode 8.038) 8. 5. 5. 6 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block (No.Fuser Temperature Center (No. 002 & 003) 8. 1 Function 8.1st Drum revolution (No.20 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No. 4.050) 8. 5. 5. 3 Device Signal List 8.014 & 015) 8. 8 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) (No. 5. 1 Leading Registration (No. 1. 5. 000 & 001) 8.21 Warm Sleep – Fuser Temperature (No. 1 Entering Service Mode 8. 5. 5. 4. 3. 4. 4. 3 Information Mode 8. 4. 4. 5. 5. 4. 1 Function 8. 005 to 007) 8.008 to 010) 8.Chapter 8 Service Mode / KIP Scanner Utility Page 8. 5.24 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No. 2.016) 8. 5. 3. 5.045) 8. 4. 5 Adjustment Mode 8. 4.14 Developer Bias compensation . 4. 9 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) (No.048 & 049) 8.

12” & 11”) (No.067) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A3.37 8. 12” & 11”) (No. 679) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A3. 5. 4. 4. 5.076 to 081. 12” & 11”) (No.55 8.106 to 111. 690.178 to 183.56 8.48 8. 36” & 34”) (No. 4.062) Cut Length 5 & 6 (Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film) (No.50 8. 704. 12” & 11”) (No.166 to 171.065) Fuser Motor Reverse Setting (No. 4.53 8. 4. 18” & 17”) (No. 710. 5. 5.59 8.41 8.055) Language (No. 703) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A1. 698. 719) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A0. 712. 5. 701) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A1. 714.057) Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No. 5.053 & 054) Metric or Inch (No.51 8. 5. 718. 705) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A1. 5. 4. 4.052) Feed Clutch (CL3) OFF time applied to long print (No. 24” & 22”) (No. 692.154 to 159. 4. 5. 36” & 34”) (No. 4. 4. 680.39 8. 5. 4. 4. 5. 4.060) Stacking Device setting (No.058) Counter Value (No.8. 707) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A1.100 to 105.066) Operation of Separation Lamp (No. 681) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A3. 4. 720. 5. 5. 24 & 22”) (No.25 8.184 to 189. 5.136 to 141.070 to 075. 693) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A2. 4.60 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No.142 to 147. 5.38 8. 706.148 to 153.33 8. 686. 700. 5. 5. 5. 24” & 22”) (No. 4. 4.160 to 165. 708. 5. 18” & 17”) (No. 5. 702. 5. 36” & 34”) (No.061) Operation of Fuser Roller (No. 691) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A2. 696. 697) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A2. 24” & 22”) (No. 721) 8-57 8-58 8-59 8-59 8-59 8-59 8-59 8-60 8-60 8-60 8-61 8-62 8-62 8-63 8-64 8-67 8-68 8-69 8-70 8-71 8-72 8-73 8-74 8-75 8-76 8-77 8-78 8-79 8-80 8-81 8-82 8-83 8-84 8-85 8-86 8-87 8-1 K116sm8e1 .54 8.059) Maximum Length (No. 683) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A3. 688. 5. 715) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A0.112 to 117.44 8.094 to 099. 687) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A3.190 to 195.36 8. 18” & 17”) (No. 4.34 8. 678. 24” & 22”) (No. 4. 5. 5.118 to 123. 5. 5. 5.32 8.42 8. 713) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A0.49 8. 709) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A1.31 8.40 8.196 to 201.58 8. 4.172 to 177. 18” & 17”) (No. 063 & 064) Drum Reverse Rotation Period (No.26 8. 4. 4.52 8.43 8. 5. 24” & 22”) (No. 5.45 8. 5. 18” & 17”) (No. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 717) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A0. 4. 4. 689) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A2. 4.124 to 129. 18” & 17”) (No. 694. 4. 699) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A2. 5.29 8. 711) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A1.082 to 087.35 8.47 8. 716. 4. 5. 5.088 to 093.056) Interface Communication Setting (No.46 8. 685) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A3. 36 & 34”) (No. 4.57 8. 5. 684. 12” & 11”) (No. 12” & 11”) (No. 5.28 8.27 8. 5.30 8.130 to 135. 695) Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A2. 4. 682.

4. 5. 5. 5. 24” & 22”) (No. 5. 5.63 Main Motor Speed (No.80 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A0.83 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A0. 36” & 34”) (No. 24” & 22”) (No. 36” & 34”) (No.62 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A0. 722. 12”.78 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A0.85 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / 30”) (No.79 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A0. 732.75 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A1. 4. 18” & 17”) (No. 5. 4. 24” & 22”) (No. 4. 4.66 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A3.82 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A0. 11”. 5.424 to 429) 8. 5. 11”.430 to 435) 8. 733) 8. 4. 4. 4. 4. 36 & 34”) (No.88 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.448 to 453. 5.400 to 405) 8. 18” & 17”) (No. A2.382 to 387) 8.436 to 441.346 to 351) 8. 24” & 22”) (No. 5.376 to 381) 8. 4. 5. 18” & 17”) (No. 5. 5. 735) 8. 5.316 to 321) 8. 5.73 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A1. 5. 18” & 17”) (No.8. 12”.74 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A1. 730.418 to 423) 8. 4.340 to 345) 8. 4. 737) 8. 24” & 22”) (No.328 to 333) 8.87 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / 30”) (No.69 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A3. 5. 723) 8.310 to 315) 8.460 to 465. 11”. 5. 5. 4. 12”.412 to 417) 8. 4.76 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A1.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36”/34”/30”/24”/22”/A0/B1/A1) (No. A2.322 to 327) 8. 731) 8. 11”.406 to 411) 8.352 to 357) 8. 11”.358 to 363) 8. 4. 12”. A2.472 to 477) 8. 734. 5. 36” & 34”) (No. 36” & 34”) (No.91 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / 30”) (No.208 to 213. 5. 5.68 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A3. 729) 8. 4.364 to 369) 8.71 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A3. 4.84 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / 30”) (No. A2. 18” & 17”) (No.466 to 471.202 to 207. 18” & 17”) (No. 36” & 34”) (No. 4. 36” & 34”) (No. 4. 4.86 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / 30”) (No. A2.72 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A1. 4. 4. 4. 4.388 to 393) 8. 5. 725) 8. A2. 736. 5. 4.61 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A0.90 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / 30”) (No. 724.334 to 339) 8.454 to 459. 5. 5. 24” & 22”) (No.89 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / 30”) (No. 36” & 34”) (No. 4.65 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No. 5.70 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A3. 12”. 12”.370 to 375) 8.478 to 483) 8-88 8-89 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-91 8-92 8-93 8-94 8-95 8-96 8-97 8-98 8-99 8-100 8-101 8-102 8-103 8-104 8-105 8-106 8-107 8-108 8-109 8-110 8-111 8-112 8-113 8-114 8-115 8-116 8-2 K116sm8e1 . 11”.67 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A3. 5. 4. 5. 4.394 to 399) 8. 4. 728. 726. 5. 4.81 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A0.77 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A1. 5. 4. 727) 8.442 to 447.

650) 8.625 to 630) 8.94 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.105 Print .106 Print .678 to 736) 8.Fuser Temperature (No. 4. 8.643 to 648) 8.118 Ready . 4.Fuser Temperature Side (No. 2. 4.511 to 513) 8.617 to 620) 8. 5. 5. 2 Deck Selection 8.637 to 642) 8. 6.93 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / 30”) (No.Fuser Temperature Side (12”/11”/A3) (No. 656) 8. 7. 739) 8. 4. 5. 8 Test Print Mode 8.657) 8.124 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1) (No.655. 4. 4. 4. 4. 4. 5. 4.96 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.514 to 516) 8.490 to 495) 8. 8. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 5. 1 Function 8.121 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (No.613 to 616) 8.112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No. 5. 4. 4.123 Assist Fan Off Timing (No. 5.Fuser Temperature Side (24”/22”/A1) (No. 4. 5. 2. 5. 8. 4. 4.102 Regulation Bias (No. 5. 5.119 Fuser Motor Speed (18”/17”/15”/12”/11”/A2/A3) (No.643 to 648) 8. 5.666 to 671) 8.117 Ready . 4.104 Density Sensor Standard Output (No.652) 8. 5.654) 8. 4. 5. 2.679 to 737) 8. 4. 4. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 5.484 to 489) 8.631 to 636) 8.Fuser Temperature Side (18”/17”/15”/A2) (No.622) 8. 2.649) 8. 5. 5. 4. 7 Jam/Error Mask Mode 8.103 Density Sensor Default Output (No. 5. 4.Fuser Temperature Side (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1) (No. 4. 1 Function 8.502 to 507) 8.651) 8. 4.97 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.113 Minimum Density (No.738. 3 Paper Length 8.111 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No.Fuser Temperature Center (No.108 Print .120 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed 4 for Roll (No.740 to 742) 8.109 Density Sensor Output Information (No.496 to 501) 8. 8. 5. 5. 4. 5.660 to 665) 8. 4. 7. 4. 5.508 to 510) 8. 4. 5.98 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No. 4 Print Count 8. 8. 4.653) 8. 4. 5.624) 8. 4.116 Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 (No. 5. 5. 8.92 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / 30”) (No.623) 8. 5. 4. 2. 4. 5.621) 8.115 Density Measure Interval (No.110 Regulation Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 2 & 3 (No.100 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (No. 6 Running Mode 8. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 5.101 Toner Supply Roller Bias (No. 5. 1 Function 8. 5 Image Pattern 8-3 8-117 8-118 8-119 8-119 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-121 8-123 8-123 8-123 8-124 8-124 8-125 8-125 8-126 8-126 8-127 8-127 8-128 8-129 8-131 8-131 8-131 8-132 8-133 8-133 8-134 8-134 8-134 8-135 8-135 8-135 8-136 8-136 8-136 8-138 8-138 8-138 8-141 8-141 8-141 8-143 8-143 8-144 8-145 8-145 K116sm8e1 . 5. 8.95 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / 30”) (No.8. 5. 6. 1 Print Start Mode 8.114 Regulation Bias Maximum (No. 5.99 Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (No.122 Standby .107 Print .672 to 677) 8. 4.

11.11. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 8. 1 Function 8. 8 8. 8. 4.14 Manual Type Manual Size Roll 1 Size Roll 1 Size Setting Manual Size Roll 2 Size Setting Mirror Nega/Posi Scale 8-147 8-147 8-148 8-148 8-149 8-149 8-150 8-150 8-151 8-152 8-152 8-152 8-154 8-154 8-154 8-156 8-156 8-157 8-157 8-158 8-159 8-160 8-161 8-161 8-161 8-161 8-163 8-163 8-163 8-165 8-165 8-165 8-165 8-167 8-169 8-169 8-169 8-170 8-171 8-172 8-173 8-174 8-175 8-176 8-177 8-178 8-179 8-180 8-181 8-182 8-182 8-182 8-184 8-184 8-184 8-187 8-4 K116sm8e1 8. 5.8. 1 Function 8. 8. 2. 1 Function 8. 4 Deck Information Mode 8. 1 Installation 8.11. 3 Status Indication (Normal Mode) 8.11. 2 Selecting each sub mode 8.11. 4 Error History Clear Mode 8.10.10.11 User Mode 8. 8.10. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 6. 2. 1.13 8. 8.11.12 KIP Scanner Utility 8. 2 Indication and Operation (1) Material setting (2) Size setting 8.11. 5 Setting Mode 1 8.12. 1 RAM Clear Mode 8.11.10.11. 7. 9 8. 2.11 8. 7 Command Mode 8. 8. 2. 2. 6 Setting Mode 2 8. 9 Factory Adjustment Mode (Factory Use Only) 8. 8.10. 1. 2. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 8. 2. 2. 2. 6 Total Counter Setting Mode 8. 2.10 Clear Mode 8. 2.11.11. 8.10.11.10. 1 Construction of the User Mode 8.11. 1 Function 8. 9. 5 Software Counter Setting Mode 8.10. 3 Jam History Clear Mode 8. 4. 7. 7 8. 2.12.12. 1 Installing USB Driver 8.11. 6 8. 1 Function 8. 9. 1 Function 8. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode 8. 2. 5.12 8. 2. 6.11. 2. 2.10 8. 2 Indication and Operation 8. 2 Indication and Operation (1) Selection of each Sub Mode (2) ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode (3) Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode (4) ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode (5) Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode (6) ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF (7) Timer setting of Auto Power OFF (8) Transfer Assist setting (9) Smoothing setting (10) Dot Enhancement ON/OFF setting (11) Full Image Mode setting (12) Low Temperature Mode setting 8.10. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility . 2 Error Clear Mode 8.

12. 1 Shading (Calibration) 8. 4.12.8. 3 Position (Stitching) 8.12. 2 Starting KIP Scanner Utility 8. 3 Displaying Scanner Information 8. 4.12.12. 4 Scanner Adjustment 8.12.13 Firmware Update (PW11620) 8-189 8-190 8-191 8-191 8-197 8-205 8-215 8-217 8-5 K116sm8e1 . 2 Feed Distance (1:1) 8. 4. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware 8.12.

1. Confirm that the machine is OFF. 2 Selecting each Sub Mode] on the next page. Keep your finger away from the [ * ] key. 2. P r i n t er R1 : 36 r ea dy MENU ENTER NOTE It is impossible to enter the Service Mode if the key operation is locked. Press and hold the [ * ] key. Remove the cover from the front face of the machine to access the Sub UI.8. and then press the keys in the order as [ to enter the Service Mode. 3. select the necessary Sub Mode making reference to [1. Then. All segments on the LCD light when you enter the Service Mode. 1 Outline of Service Mode Entering Service Mode 1. 11 6X0 1A FPG Ver . You can unlock the key operation of Sub UI by this operation. ROM version is indicated. and the ROM version is indicated. All segments light. 1 A 5. 1 8. [ ]. 1. [ ] and [ ] 4. so it becomes possible to enter the Service Mode. ROM Ver . ]. Then turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] Key. 8-6 K105sm8e2 .

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 You can select each sub mode orderly whenever you press the [MENU] key. 1.8. ( 1) I / O Mode Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key ( 2) I n f o Mode ( 9) C l e a r Mode Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key ( 3) Chec k Mode ( 8) Fac t o r y Mode Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key ( 4) A d j us t Mode ( 7) Tes t Mode Press [MENU] key Press [MENU] key ( 6) Mas k Mode ( 5) Runn i ng Mode Press [MENU] key 8-7 K105sm8e2 . 2 Selecting each Sub Mode Service Mode Name Device Status Mode Information Mode Device Operation Mode Adjustment Mode Running Mode Jam/Error Masking Mode Test Print Mode Factory Adjustment Mode Clear Mode Service Mode consists of the following 9 sub modes.

8. The LCD indicates printer’s status after the cancellation. and then press the [ * ] key to cancel the Service Mode. P r i n t e r Ready R1 : 36 R2 : 24 NOTE The key operation of Sub UI is automatically locked if you turn off the machine. 1. 3 Cancelling the Service Mode Press and hold the [MENU] key. 8-8 K105sm8e2 .

2. Signal code No000 I / O ( . 1 Signal Status Mode Function It is possible to observe the status of each signal (input and output) independently. and you can enter the Signal Status Mode. 8-9 K105sm8e2 . Indicate “(1) I/O Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. The LCD indicates signal code.) Signal status Sw i t c h 1 Signal name 3. 2 Indication and Operation ( 1) I / O Mode 1. Press the [ENTER] key.8. indicate the necessary signal code on the LCD. 2. 2 8. 8. The LCD also indicates the signal name and its status according to the selected signal code.H. 2. Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. signal name and signal status.

3 Signal Code 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 Symbol Device Signal List IC Port IC3-P20 IC3-P21 IC3-P22 IC3-P23 IC3-P24 IC3-P25 IC3-P26 IC3-P27 IC3-P40 IC3-P41 IC3-P42 IC3-P43 IC3-P44 IC3-P45 IC3-P46 IC3-P47 IC3-60 IC3-61 IC3-62 IC3-63 IC3-64 IC3-65 IC3-66 IC3-67 IC3-P10 IC3-P11 IC3-P12 IC3-P13 IC3-P14 IC3-P15 IC3-P16 IC3-P17 IC3-P30 IC3-P31 IC3-P32 IC3-P33 IC3-P34 IC3-P35 IC3-P36 IC3-P37 IC3-P50 IC3-P51 IC3-P52 IC3-P53 IC3-P54 IC3-P55 IC3-P56 IC3-P57 IC3-P80 IC3-P81 IC3-P82 IC3-P83 IC3-P84 IC3-P85 Connector J205-17 J205-18 J205-19 J205-20 J205-21 J202-7 J202-8 J215-3 J204-20 J204-21 J204-22 J204-23 J204-24 J207-16 J207-15 J204-27 J205-15 J207-14 J215-7 J215-8 J207-13 J204-28 J207-12 J207-12 J206-7 J206-8 J206-9 J206-10 J206-11 J206-12 J206-13 J206-14 J206-15 J206-16 J206-17 J206-18 J206-22 J206-25 J206-26 J206-27 J207-3 J207-4 J207-5 J207-6(R1) J207-8(R2) J207-9(R1) J208-9(R2) J207-10 J207-11 J207-4 J203-14 J203-15 J203-16 J203-17 J203-18 Signal Name Input Switch 1 Input Switch 2 Input Switch 3 Input Switch 4 Input Switch 5 Input / Output Input Input Input Input Input Status L : ON L : ON L : ON L : ON L : ON SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 ------MAN_S DOOR_OPN SEP_S HEAT_EXIT --HEAT_DOOR --SIG_IN ONLINE_LED --------SIG_OUT HEAT_BL_L HEAT_BL_H MAMTR HEAT_M HV_1ST HV_TR HV_AC BIAS_TRG BIAS_SW --H1_CW_CCW PRESS_M TONER_M CLEAN_SW FEED_BL HEAT1 COOL_BL POWER_OFF ER2 COUNT HEAT_RY SLCT_CL FOWE_CL BACK_CL FEED_CL REGIST_CL M_LD FUMTR_LD DIS_CN HV1_LD TR_LD AC_LD Manual Feed Sensor Roll Deck Open Separation Sensor Exit Sensor Heater Hatch Open Stacker Input Online LED Input Input Input Input Input Input Output H : Paper detected H : Open L : Paper detected L : Paper detected L : Open H : ON Stacker Output Fuser Blower (Low) Fuser Blower (High) Main Motor Fuser Motor Image Corona Transfer Corona Separation Corona Developer Bias Developer Bias Polarity Switch Main Motor Reversal Rotation Developer Press Motor Hopper Motor Cleaning Roller Voltage Polarity Switch Blower (BL7) Control SSR ON/OFF Signal 1 Fuser Cooling Fan Power Switch Output Separation Lamp Control Counter Fuser Relay Clutch Selection (Roll 1 or 2) Roll 1&2 Feed Clutch Roll 1&2 Back Clutch Feed Clutch Registration Clutch Main Motor Output Detection Fuser Motor Output Detection Developer Connection Detection Image Corona Output Detection Transfer Corona Output Detection Separation Corona Output Detection Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Input H : ON H : ON H : Rotate H : Rotate H : Output H : Output H : Output H : Output L : Positive Bias H : Reverse H : Rotate H : Rotate L : Positive H : Rotate H : Heater Lamp lights H : Rotate H : OFF H : Lighting H : Counting up H : ON H : Roll 1 H : ON H : ON H : ON H : ON 8-10 K105sm8e2 . 2.8.

Signal Code 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 ----- Symbol BIAS_LD COUNT_OPEN DA CLOCK DA DI1 DA BS1 DA DI2 DA BS2 H2_CW_CCW HEAT2 --------DENS_SNS1 ------LED2 IBUSY_H IPRADY_L IPREQ_L PAGEBL TEST_H I_POW_ON_A LED_EN CLEAN BIAS LCD_CLK LCD_DATA LCD_EN LCD_RW LCD_RS IC Port IC3-P86 IC3-P87 IC3-P70 IC3-P71 IC3-P72 IC3-P73 IC3-P74 IC3-P75 IC3-P76 IC3-P77 IC3-P90 IC3-P91 IC3-P92 IC3-P93 IC3-P94 IC3-P95 IC3-P96 IC3-P97 IC1-P10 IC1-P11 IC1-P12 IC1-P13 IC1-P14 IC1-P15 IC1-P16 IC1-P17 IC1-P20 IC1-P21 IC1-P23 IC1-P24 IC1-P22 IC1-P25 IC1-P26 IC1-P27 IC1-P32 IC1-P33 IC1-P51 IC1-P30 IC1-P31 IC1-P50 IC1-P60 IC1-P61 IC1-P63 IC1-P62 IC1-P34 IC1-P64 IC1-P65 IC1-P66 IC1-P67 IC1-PG0 IC1-PA5 IC1-PA6 IC1-PA7 AN5 IC1-PF7 IC1-PF1 Connector J203-19 J203-20 Signal Name Developer Bias Output Detection Counter Connection Detection DA Conversion Clock DA Enable 1 DA Data 1 DA Enable 2 DA Data 2 Fuser Motor Reverse SSR ON/OFF 2 Input / Output Input Input Status J215-4 J215-5 Output Output H : Reverse H : Heater Lamp lights J215-9 J215-10 J215-12 J215-13 J215-14 J215-15 J215-16 Density Sensor Output 1 H: On PW11620 PCB LED Data Output Busy Printer Ready Print Request Print Request Test Print LED Enable Cleaning Roller Bias LCD Clock LCD Data LCD Enable Data Read / Write Selection LCD Input Selection Main Motor Clock Fuser Motor Clock Reset Signal Serial 0 Input Serial 1 Input Serial 2 Input Serial 0 Output Serial 1 Output Serial 2 Output Cutter Home Position Sensor (Right) Cutter Home Position Sensor (Left) Cutter Motor 1 Cutter Motor 2 Print Request Paper Cut Request Registration Sensor Roll 1 Encoder Roll 2 Encoder LCD Indication ON/OFF Developer Press Sensor Roll 1 Set Sensor Roll 2 Set Sensor Toner Sensor Feed Sensor Feed Encoder Output Output Output Output Output Output H: Lights H : Busy L : Ready L : Requested L : Print ON H : Test Printing J206-5 Output H : Output J205-6 J205-5 J205-4 J206-28 J206-6 Output Output RESET_SIG RXD0 RXD1 RXD2 TXD0 TXD1 TXD2 MSCUTR MSCUTL MCUTL MCUTR IPRINT_L IPCUT_L REGIST_S R1_ENC_S R2_ENC_S VLC_OFF PRESS_S R1_SET_S R2_SET_S TONER_S R_EDGE FEED_ENC J204-5 J204-6 J207-1 J207-2 Output Input Input Input Output Output Output Input Input Output Output Input Input Input Input Input Output Input Input Input Input Input J204-7 J204-8 J204-9 J204-10 J204-11 J204-12 J203-6 J204-13 J204-26 L : Staying at Home Position L : Staying at Home Position H : Rotate H : Rotate L : Requested L : Cutting H : Paper detected H : Indicating L : Detecting H : Paper detected H : Paper detected H : Toner detected H : Paper detected 8-11 K105sm8e2 .

The following list shows the item number. Item number No00 Fus e r Temp1 Item name 150C Information 3. 3 8. 2 Indication and Operation ( 2) I n f o Mode 1. 3. Indicate “(2) Info Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. Press the [ENTER] key.8. and you can check the concerning information. Item Number 00 Item Name (Indication) Fuser Temp 1 No00 Fus e r Temp1 Information This item indicates the temperature of the central part of Fuser Roller. item name and the concerning information. item name and information. 1 Information Mode Function It is possible to monitor several kinds of information like analog data. 140C 8-12 K105sm8e2 . and you can enter the Information Mode. 2. The LCD indicates item number. Indicate the necessary item number pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. 3. 150C 01 Fuser Temp 2 No01 Fus e r Temp2 This item indicates the temperature of the right side of Fuser Roller. 8. operation time of each electric component and some other information.

0002541 8-13 K105sm8e2 . 09 Total Image No09 To t a l I mage This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation totally. 04 --- --- 05 Total Cut No05 T o t a l Cu t This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated totally for cutting the paper supplied from every source. 07 Roll 2 Cut No07 Ro l l 2 Cu t 0000123 This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated totally for cutting the paper supplied from Roll 2.Item Number 02 Item Name (Indication) --- Information --- 03 Board Temp No02 Boar d Temp 135 ゚ C This item indicates the temperature of inside the machine detected by a thermistor on PW11620. 0000138 06 Roll 1 Cut No06 Ro l l 1 Cu t 0000010 This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated totally for cutting the paper supplied from Roll 1. 08 Others cut No08 Ot he r s Cu t 0000005 This item indicates how many times the Cutter has operated when the machine was not on printing.

8-14 K105sm8e2 .Item Number 10 Item Name (Indication) R1 Image No10 R1 I mage Information This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation with the Roll 1. 0001311 12 M Image No12 M I mage 0000233 This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation with the cut sheet paper from Bypass Feeder. 13 R1 F Clutch No13 R1 F C l u t c h 0000136 This item indicates how many times the Roll 1 Feed Clutch has operated up to the present. 17 Feed Clutch No17 Feed C l u t c h 0007651 This item indicates how many times the Feed Clutch has operated up to the present. 0001383 11 R2 Image No11 R2 I mage This item indicates how many times the printer has made printing operation with the Roll 2. 16 R2 B Clutch No16 R2 B C l u t c h 0029877 This item indicates how many times the Roll 2 Back Clutch has operated up to the present. 14 R2 F Clutch No14 R2 F C l u t c h 0003511 This item indicates how many times the Roll 2 Feed Clutch has operated up to the present. 15 R1 B Clutch No15 R1 B C l u t c h 0002644 This item indicates how many times the Roll 1 Back Clutch has operated up to the present.

The information indicated on the second line is “JAM History No. Clutch No18 Re g . C l u t c h 0009021 Information This item indicates how many times the Registration Clutch has operated up to the present. it will be reset to 0.Item Number 18 Item Name (Indication) Reg. “Error Code” and “Counter Value (at the time of error)”. 22 JAM Info No22 Jam I n f o ( 01) 1007 0000385 23 Error Info No23 E r r o r I nf o ( 01) 0040 0006312 24 Bias 3 Time No24 B i a s 3 T i m e 0000 0 64 M i n This item indicates the record of jams. The latest 20 errors can be indicated in succession whenever you press the ENTER Key. “Jam Code” and “Counter Value (at the time of jam)”. When counting up to 1080 Min (18 hours). 21 LED On Time No21 LED On T i me 0003212mi n It indicates how long minutes the LED Head has lighted up to the present. The latest 20 jams can be indicated in succession whenever you press the ENTER Key. This item indicates how long the Main Motor has operated. This item indicates the record of errors. The information indicated on the second line is “Error History No.”. 20 Motor 2 Time No20 Mo t o r 2 T i me 0000003mi n This item indicates how long minutes the Fuser Motor has operated up to the present. 19 Motor 1 Time No19 Mo t o r 1 T i me 0000015mi n This item indicates how long minutes the Main Motor has operated up to the present.”. The timer detects the period of Density Measure in Density Compensation Process. 8-15 K105sm8e2 .

and also you can check whether or not such electrical component operates correctly. signal name of target item and signal status. such as motor. Indicate “(3) Check Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. clutch. 2. 8. 2 Indication and Operation ( 3) Chec k Mode 1. and you can enter the Device Operation Mode. Press the [ENTER] key.8. 4. 4. Signal code No00 Ou t p u t ( .) Ma i n Mot o r Signal status Signal name of target item 8-16 K105sm8e2 . The LCD indicates signal code. By this you can check whether or not the DC Controller PCB (PW10520) correctly outputs the signal to each component. 4 8.L. & fans. 1 Device Operation Mode Function It is possible to operate several electrical components independently.

3. Pressing the [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the signal code of which target item you would like to operate. (Example : You will check the operation of Cutter Motor 1.)

No00 Ou t p u t ( - L- ) Ma i n Mot o r

No27 Ou t pu t ( - L- ) Cu t t e r Mo t o r 1

Signal Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Signal Name Main Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Rev Motor Press Motor Supply Motor --Roll 1 Feed CL Roll 1 Back CL Roll 2 Feed CL Roll 2 Back CL Feed CL Reg. CL 1st Corona Tr Corona Sep Corona Bias Bias +/- Select Clean Bias

Target item Main Motor Fuser Motor Fuser Motor (Reversal rotation) Developer Press Motor Toner Supply Motor Reserved Roll 1 Feed Clutch Roll 1 Back Clutch Roll 2 Feed Clutch Roll 2 Back Clutch Feed Clutch Registration Clutch Image Corona Transfer Corona Separation Corona Developer Bias Positive/Negative selection of Developer Bias Cleaning Roller Bias

Signal Code 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

Signal Name Clean +/- SW --Tr Assist LED Heater Lamp 1 Heater Relay Heater Blower (L) Heater Blower (H) Feed Blower Counter Cutter Motor 1 Cutter Motor 2 Main Switch --Cooler Blower Heater Lamp 2 Dens Sensor 1

Target item Positive/Negative selection of Cleaning Roller Voltage Reserved Transfer Assist LED Fuser Lamp 1 Fuser Relay Fuser Blower (Low speed) Fuser Blower (High speed) Paper Feed Blower Counter Cutter Motor 1 Cutter Motor 2 Main Switch Reserved Cooling Fan Fuser Lamp 2 Density Sensor for Density Compensation

4. When you press the [ENTER] key, the status of output signal changes from “L” to “H” and the selected target item operates independently.
No27 Ou t pu t ( - L- ) Cu t t e r Mo t o r 1 No27 Ou t pu t ( - H- ) Cu t t e r Mo t o r 1

Press [ENTER].

8-17

K105sm8e2

8. 5
8. 5. 1

Adjustment Mode
Function

It is possible to adjust the fundamental settings of the printer.

8. 5. 2

Indication and Operation
( 4) A d j us t Mode

1. Indicate “(4) Adjust Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key.

2. Press the [ENTER] key, and you can enter the Adjustment Mode. The LCD indicates item number, name of setting item and setting value.
No000 020 [ 020 ]

Item number

Setting value

L ead Reg. ( Ro l l )

Name of setting item

3. Pressing the [ ] key or [ ] key, indicate the Item Number of which Setting Value you will change. Please refer to [8.5.3 Setting item list] on and after the page 8-20 for the detail of each setting item. (Example: You will change “Main Strobe A”.)
No000 020 [ 020 ] No008 010 [ 010 ]

L ead Reg. ( Ro l l )

Ma i n St r obe A

8-18

K116sm8e3

4. Press the [ENTER] key. The setting value in the parenthesizes starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it.
No008 010 [ 010 ] No008 010 [ 010 ]

Ma i n St r obe A

Ma i n St r obe A

NOTE
The LCD indicates another value that is not in the parenthesises. This is the current setting value.
No008 010 [ 010 ] Ma i n St r obe A

Current setting value

5. Change the setting value pressing [

] key or [

] key.

No008

010

[ 010 ]

No008

010

[ 013 ]

Ma i n St r obe A

Ma i n St r obe A

Change the value.

6. Press the [ENTER] key. New value stops flashing and it is validated.
No008 010 [ 013 ] No008 013 [ 013 ]

Ma i n St r obe A

Ma i n St r obe A

NOTE
Some Setting Items may require another way of operation. This kind of special operation is written in each explanation in [8. 5. 4 Explanation for each Setting Item].

8-19

K116sm8e3

8. 5. 3
Item No.

Setting Item list
NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 19 19 19 19 9 9 10 10 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 6 6 6 6 6 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 8 8 8 50 50 50 50 475 475 30 30 50 50 161 161 161 161 161 161 0 366 28A 28A 292 292 292 50 48 20 160 160 177 160 160 177 120 100 1 2 15 10 1 230 230 1 1 2 161 161 161 161 161 161 0 366 28A 28A 292 292 292 50 48 20 165 170 170 160 160 177 120 100 1 2 15 10 1 230 230 0 1 2 Setting range Refer to page ;

Setting Item

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057

Leading Registration (Roll paper) Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper) Trailing Margin (Roll paper) Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper) Side Margin (Left and right) Side Registration (Cutsheet) Side Registration (Roll 1) Side Registration (Roll 2) LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block A) LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block B) LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block C) LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block A) LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block B) LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block C) Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks A & B Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks B & C Cut Length 1 (length information provided) Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print) Leading Margin Cut Length 4 (Individual Compensation for Roll 2) Reserved Developer Bias (Plain Paper) Developer Bias (Tracing Paper) Developer Bias (Film) Developer Bias (Special Media/Plain Paper) Developer Bias (Special Media/Tracing Paper) Developer Bias (Special Media/Film) Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution Transfer Voltage (Plain Paper) Transfer Voltage (Tracing Paper) Transfer Voltage (Film) Transfer Voltage (Special Media/Plain Paper) Transfer Voltage (Special Media/Tracing Paper) Transfer Voltage (Special Media/Film) Separation Corona ON Timing Reserved Transfer Corona ON Timing Transfer Corona OFF Timing Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Plain) Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing) Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Film) Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain) Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing) Print - Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film) Fuser temperature to Start Idling Warm Sleep - Fuser Temperature Reserved Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle) Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by) Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor Toner Supply Motor Time Dot Enhancement Level ( Dither ) Feed Clutch OFF Time for Roll 1 Long Print Feed Clutch OFF Time for Roll 2 Long Print Metric or Inch Language Interface Communication Setting

1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 0.1mm 0.1mm 0.1mm 1 microsecond 1 microsecond 1 microsecond 1 microsecond 1 microsecond 1 microsecond 1mm 1mm 0.1mm 0.1mm 0.16mm 1mm 1mm 1mm o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C 1C o 1C 1 Second 1 Second 1msec. 1msec. o

1 to 40 1 to 40 1 to 40 1 to 40 0 to 20 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 13 0 to 13 0 to 13 0 to 13 0 to 13 0 to 13 2 to 14 2 to 14 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 999 0 to 50 0 to 100 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 255 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 100 to 140 100 to 160 1 to 6 1 to 6 1 to 30 1 to 15 1 to 3 80 to 360 80 to 360 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 2

8-36 8-36 8-36 8-36 8-37 8-38 8-38 8-38 8-39 8-39 8-39 8-41 8-41 8-41 8-43 8-43 8-44 8-44 8-45 8-47 8-48 8-49 8-49 8-49 8-49 8-49 8-49 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-50 8-51 8-52 8-53 8-53 8-53 8-53 8-53 8-53 8-54 8-54 8-55 8-55 8-56 8-56 8-57 8-58 8-58 8-59 8-59 8-59

8-20

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 1 1 5 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 100 100 100 86 30 30 0 0 5 5 Setting range Refer to page ;

058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093

Recognition of Roll Deck 2 Counter Value Maximum Length Stacking Device Setting Operation of Fuser Roller Cut length 5 (Compensation for Tracing Paper) Cut length 6 (Compensation for Film) Drum ReverseTime Fuser Motor Reverse Setting Operation of Separation Lamp Reserved Reserved Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, 12” & 11”)

1 millisecond -

0 to 1 0 to 5 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 1 0 to 200 0 to 200 10 to 70 0 to 1 1 to 7

8-59 8-59 8-60 8-60 8-60 8-61 8-61 8-62 8-62 8-63

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

34 1 35 1 50 5 33 1 39 1 44 5 50 2 50 4 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0

39 1 42 1 48 5 36 1 44 3 44 5 50 2 50 4 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-64 8-64 8-64 8-64 8-64 8-64 8-67 8-67 8-67 8-67 8-67 8-67 8-68 8-68 8-68 8-68 8-68 8-68 8-69 8-69 8-69 8-69 8-69 8-69

8-21

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 30 3 32 4 31 6 33 3 38 3 38 5 50 2 50 6 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 31 3 36 4 38 6 40 1 44 5 45 5 50 2 50 6 40 0 Setting range Refer to page ;

094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123

Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3, 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A2, 18” & 17”)

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-70 8-70 8-70 8-70 8-70 8-70 8-71 8-71 8-71 8-71 8-71 8-71 8-72 8-72 8-72 8-72 8-72 8-72 8-73 8-73 8-73 8-73 8-73 8-73 8-74 8-74 8-74 8-74 8-74 8-74

8-22

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 37 3 30 6 40 6 36 3 41 9 39 8 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 35 3 33 8 41 8 42 3 43 9 40 8 Setting range Refer to page ;

124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153

Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”)

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-75 8-75 8-75 8-75 8-75 8-75 8-76 8-76 8-76 8-76 8-76 8-76 8-77 8-77 8-77 8-77 8-77 8-77 8-78 8-78 8-78 8-78 8-78 8-78 8-79 8-79 8-79 8-79 8-79 8-79

8-23

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 42 42 2 42 14 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 26 4 27 10 33 8 2 42 14 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 26 3 27 10 37 8 Setting range Refer to page ;

154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183

Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-80 8-80 8-80 8-80 8-80 8-80 8-81 8-81 8-81 8-81 8-81 8-81 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-82 8-83 8-83 8-83 8-83 8-83 8-83 8-84 8-84 8-84 8-84 8-84 8-84

8-24

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 29 42 3 35 13 36 8 35 2 40 18 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 3 38 13 39 8 38 2 43 18 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range Refer to page ;

184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 to 309

Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Reserved

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds -

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-85 8-85 8-85 8-85 8-85 8-85 8-86 8-86 8-86 8-86 8-86 8-86 8-87 8-87 8-87 8-87 8-87 8-87 8-88 8-88 8-88 8-88 8-88 8-88 8-89 8-89 8-89 8-89 8-89 8-89

8-25

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 36 36 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 31 35 39 50 40 40 40 25 25 22 18 18 23 30 3 32 4 31 6 33 2 38 3 38 5 50 2 50 6 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 50 50 40 40 40 25 25 25 18 18 23 31 3 36 4 38 6 40 1 44 5 45 2 50 6 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range Refer to page ;

310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351

Main Motor Speed (Plain paper) Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper) Main Motor Speed (Film) Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper) Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper) Main Motor Speed (Special film) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Plain) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Tracing) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Film) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Plain) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Tracing) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special / Film) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3, 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”)

1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-90 8-91 8-91 8-91 8-91 8-91 8-91 8-92 8-92 8-92 8-92 8-92 8-92 8-93 8-93 8-93 8-93 8-93 8-93 8-94 8-94 8-94 8-94 8-94 8-94

8-26

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 37 3 30 6 40 6 36 3 41 9 39 8 42 2 42 14 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 35 3 33 8 41 8 42 3 43 9 40 8 42 2 42 14 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range Refer to page ;

352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 385

Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A3, A2, 12”, 11”, 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”)

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-95 8-95 8-95 8-95 8-95 8-95 8-96 8-96 8-96 8-96 8-96 8-96 8-97 8-97 8-97 8-97 8-97 8-97 8-98 8-98 8-98 8-98 8-98 8-98 8-99 8-99 8-99 8-99 8-99 8-99 8-100 8-100 8-100 8-100

8-27

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 26 4 27 10 33 8 29 3 35 13 36 8 35 2 42 18 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 26 3 27 10 37 8 42 3 38 13 39 8 38 2 43 18 40 0 40 Setting range Refer to page ;

386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418

Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A1, 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”)

0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s

0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80

8-100 8-100 8-101 8-101 8-101 8-101 8-101 8-101 8-102 8-102 8-102 8-102 8-102 8-102 8-103 8-103 8-103 8-103 8-103 8-103 8-104 8-104 8-104 8-104 8-104 8-104 8-105 8-105 8-105 8-105 8-105 8-105 8-106

8-28

K116sm8e3

NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Item No. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 28 5 30 9 34 7 34 4 38 11 40 8 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 28 5 33 9 36 7 33 4 44 11 41 8 40 0 40 0 Setting range Refer to page ;

419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 449 450 451

Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / A0, 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”)

0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds

0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300

8-106 8-106 8-106 8-106 8-106 8-107 8-107 8-107 8-107 8-107 8-107 8-108 8-108 8-108 8-108 8-108 8-108 8-109 8-109 8-109 8-109 8-109 8-109 8-110 8-110 8-110 8-110 8-110 8-110 8-111 8-111 8-111 8-111

8-29

K116sm8e3

04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Item No.04mm/s 0. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 28 5 30 9 34 7 34 4 38 11 40 8 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 28 5 33 9 36 7 33 4 44 11 41 8 40 0 Setting range Refer to page .5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 8-111 8-111 8-112 8-112 8-112 8-112 8-112 8-112 8-113 8-113 8-113 8-113 8-113 8-113 8-114 8-114 8-114 8-114 8-114 8-114 8-115 8-115 8-115 8-115 8-115 8-115 8-116 8-116 8-116 8-116 8-116 8-116 8-117 8-117 8-30 K116sm8e3 .04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Roll) (Film / 30”) 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.

5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Item No.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0. 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 to 612 Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll) (Cut sheet) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film) Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Tracing paper) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Film) Reserved 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 4ff 4ff 4ff 62f 69f 4ff 13 19 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 4ff 4ff 4ff 62f 69f 4ff 17 19 0 Setting range Refer to page .5 seconds 0.5 seconds - 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 9fe 9fe 9fe 9fe 9fe 9fe 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 8-117 8-117 8-117 8-117 8-118 8-118 8-118 8-118 8-118 8-118 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-119 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-120 8-31 K116sm8e3 .5 seconds 0.

613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630 631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644 645 646 647 648 649 Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1) Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (24”/ 20”/ A1) Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2) Judgement Value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (24”/ 22”/ A2) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3) Toner Supply Roller Bias Regulation Bias Density Sensor Default Output Density Sensor Standard Output Print .NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Item No.Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print . Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 286 270 0 0 160 160 177 160 160 177 160 160 177 160 160 177 160 160 177 160 160 177 160 160 177 160 160 177 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 286 270 0 0 145 150 170 160 160 170 165 170 170 160 160 170 165 170 170 160 160 170 165 170 170 160 160 177 1 Setting range Refer to page .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Specia / Film) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special media / Film) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Density Sensor Output Information 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20 0 to 35 0 to 35 0 to 35 0 to 35 0 to 800 0 to 800 0 to 614 0 to 614 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 0 to 4 8-121 8-121 8-121 8-121 8-123 8-123 8-123 8-123 8-123 8-123 8-124 8-124 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-125 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-126 8-127 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o 8-32 K116sm8e3 .

12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3.5 seconds 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3.04mm/s 0.Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film) Ready . 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3.5 seconds 0.5V 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3.Fuser Temperature Side (Film) Ready . 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A3.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) Ready .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Plain) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Tracing) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Film) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special / Plain) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special / Tracing) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special / Film) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A3. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2.04mm/s 0.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) Ready .04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 80 80 0 0 1 1 135 135 500 500 18 18 18 18 158 158 Setting range Refer to page .04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) 0.Fuser Temperature Center (Plain) Ready . 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A3. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A2. 650 651 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 660 661 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669 670 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 680 681 682 683 684 685 686 687 688 689 690 691 692 693 694 695 Regulation Bias Increment forAuto Adjustment Level 2 and 3 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment Density Compensation On/Off Minimum Density Regulation Bias Maximum Density Measure Interval at power on Density Measure Interval at Print Completion Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 and after Reserved Reserved Ready .5V - 1 hour 1 hour 0 to 200 0 to 800 0 to 1 110 to 150 160 to 800 1 to 100 1 to 100 0 to 400 8-127 8-128 8-129 8-131 8-131 8-131 8-131 8-132 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C o 1C 0.5 seconds 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A2. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A3.Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing) Ready . 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3.NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Item No. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A3.Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain) Ready .04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A3.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.Fuser Temperature Center (Film) Ready .Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing) Ready .5 seconds o 160 160 177 160 160 177 159 159 177 159 159 177 50 57 50 40 40 40 34 6 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 37 10 40 0 40 0 160 170 177 160 160 170 159 180 170 159 159 170 50 60 50 40 40 40 37 8 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-133 8-134 8-134 8-134 8-134 8-134 8-134 8-64 8-64 8-67 8-67 8-68 8-68 8-69 8-69 8-70 8-70 8-71 8-71 8-72 8-72 8-73 8-73 8-74 8-74 8-33 K116sm8e3 .Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) Ready .5 seconds 0.Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) Ready . 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A2. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A3.

18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A1.5 seconds 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A1.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A0. 696 697 698 699 700 701 702 703 704 705 706 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 716 717 718 719 720 721 722 723 724 725 726 727 728 729 730 731 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A2. Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 35 16 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 30 20 34 20 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 36 20 34 20 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 36 16 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 30 20 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 30 20 40 0 40 0 Setting range Refer to page .5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0.04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A0.5 seconds 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / A0.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A1.NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Item No.04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / A0.5 seconds 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 8-75 8-75 8-76 8-76 8-77 8-77 8-78 8-78 8-79 8-79 8-80 8-80 8-81 8-81 8-82 8-82 8-83 8-83 8-84 8-84 8-85 8-85 8-86 8-86 8-87 8-87 8-88 8-88 8-89 8-89 8-109 8-109 8-110 8-110 8-111 8-111 8-34 K116sm8e3 . 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A1.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A1.5 seconds 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / A0. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A2. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / A2. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Film / 30”) 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / A1.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Plain Paper / A0.5 seconds 0.5 seconds 0.

732 733 734 735 736 737 738 739 740 741 742 743 744 745 Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Plain Paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll) (Special Media / Film / 30”) Standby .04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 seconds 0.04mm/s 0.Fuser Temperature Center Standby .Fuser Temperature Side Assist Fan Off Timing (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Assist Fan Off Timing (24” / 22” / A1) Assist Fan Off Timing (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) (Plain) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) (Tracing) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) (Film) 0.NOTE: All items grayed are not generally for field technician use Item No.5 seconds 1C o 1C 8 8 8 0 0 0 o 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 120 to 180 120 to 180 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 8-112 8-112 8-113 8-113 8-114 8-114 8-134 8-134 8-135 8-135 8-135 8-135 8-135 8-135 8-35 K116sm8e3 . Setting Item Unit Default Value USA EUR / AS 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 167 155 8 8 8 0 0 0 0 40 0 40 0 167 155 4 4 6 0 0 0 Setting range Refer to page .5 seconds 0.

4 8. Item No. 1 Explanation for each Setting Item Leading Registration (No. 5. 8-36 K116sm8e3 . Trailing Margin NOTE Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much. 002 & 003) It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin. Setting value is decreased. 5. 000 & 001) It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of the media. 002 003 Setting Item Trailing Margin (Roll paper) Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 9 9 10 10 Setting range 1 to 40 1 to 40 Step of increment 1mm 1mm Setting value is increased. Item No. value is decreased. the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger. 2 Trailing Margin (No. The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “. If you increase the setting value by “+1 “. 5. 8. 000 001 Setting Item Leading Registration (Roll paper) Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 19 19 19 19 Setting range 1 to 40 1 to 40 Step of increment 1mm 1mm Leading Registration value is increased. 4.8. 4.

5. 8-37 K116sm8e3 . NOTE Image quality created with a reduced side margin (less than 3 in the setting value) is not guaranteed.8. 3 Side Margin (Left & Right) (No. (Both left and right) Each side margin becomes 1mm wider if you increase the setting value. Side Margin Setting value is decreased.) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 3 3 Setting range 0 to 20 Step of increment 1mm Setting value is increased. 004) It is possible to adjust the amount of side margin. (As a result the width of print image becomes 2mm narrower. 4.

If you increase the setting value by “+1 “.1mm 0. Side Registration Setting value is decreased. 4 Side Registration (No. 5. 4.1mm to the right. 005 to 007) It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the side edge of the media.1mm 0. 8-38 K116sm8e3 . Item No.1mm Setting value is increased.8. image is shifted 0. 005 006 007 Setting Item Side Registration (Cutsheet) Side Registration (Roll 1) Side Registration (Roll 2) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 50 50 50 50 Setting range 0 to 60 0 to 60 0 to 60 Step of increment 0.

Increase the value of “010” to make the image of Block C darker. 008 009 010 Setting Item LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Image Block A : Left) LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Image Block B : Center) LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Image Block C : Right) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 6 6 6 6 6 6 Setting range 0 to 13 0 to 13 0 to 13 Step of increment 1 micro second 1 micro second 1 micro second Block A Block B Block C Decrease the value of “008” to make the image of Block A lighter. Setting value is decreased. 5. 8-39 K116sm8e3 . Default Setting value is increased Main pixel Supplemental pixel Actual print image Please read [REFERENCE] on the page 8-42 for the explanation about “Main Pixel” and “Supplemental Pixel”. The whole image of the concerning Image Block becomes darker if you increase the setting value. B and C) darker or lighter independently by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Main Pixels. 5 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel of each Block (No.008 to 010) It is possible to make the whole image of each Image Block (A. As a result an even image density can be accomplished among 3 Image Blocks. 4. Item No.8. .

). for example. 11 (for 009) and 12 (for 010). If it is smaller than “0 microsecond” (Min.NOTE (1) The LED Strobe Times specified in these 008. the actual LED Strobe Times are also 10 (for block A). 11 (for block B) and 12 (for block C). 009 and 010 are applied to the actual LED Strobe Time. 8-40 K116sm8e3 . the density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the output device (image scanner or controller) is applied to the Image Block A.). it is automatically corrected to “13 microsecond”. And only the difference of setting values among 008. for example. In case of Test Print 008: 10 microseconds 009: 11 microseconds 010: 12 microseconds Block A (10) Block B (11) Block C (12) But in case of a copy or a plot. 009 and 010 are directly applied to the Test Print. the actual LED Strobe Times are 8 (for block A). 11 (for 009) and 12 (for 010). it is corrected to “0 microsecond” similarly. If the density command from the output device is 8 microsecond and the setting values are 10 (for 008). If the setting values are 10 (for 008). 9 (for block B) and 10 (for block C). In case of copy or plot Density command from output device: 8 microseconds 008: 10 microseconds 009: 11 microseconds 010: 12 microseconds Block A Block B Block C (8) (9) (10) (2) If the value of density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the output device is larger than “13 microsecond” (Max.

The adjustment is available for each Image Block independently. Setting value is decreased. Main pixel Supplemental pixel Actual print image Please read [REFERENCE] on the page 8-42 for the explanation about “Main Pixel” and “Supplemental Pixel”. Item No. you can make it clearer by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels. A diagonal line comes to look clearer if you increase the setting value. 8-41 K116sm8e3 . 5. Default Setting value is increased. 4.8.011 to 013) If such image as a diagonal line looks too weak. 011 012 013 Setting Item LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel (Image Block A : Left) LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel (Image Block B : Center) LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel (Image Block C : Right) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting range 0 to 13 0 to 13 0 to 13 Step of increment 1 micro second 1 micro second 1 micro second Block A Block B Block C Increase the setting values of “011” and “013” to make the images of these blocks clearer. as the LED Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels becomes longer. 6 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) of each Block (No.

The pixel created by this additional process is called [Supplemental Pixel]. When a specific image pattern (like a diagonal line) is printed. If this space is filled with the Supplemental Pixel. the KIP 3100 will make additional image exposure between vertically neighboring 2 Main Pixels. When we compare a vertical / horizontal 1 dot line and a diagonal 1 dot line. Normal image pattern In case of a certain image pattern Main Pixels Supplemental Pixels Main Pixels Supplemental Pixels are provided so as to fill the space between Main Pixels.Reference Normally the KIP 3100 takes 600 times of image exposure per inch for the vertical direction as its resolution is 600DPI. for example. This additional image exposure is completed within a very short time. however. the diagonal one looks vague and rough although the vertical / horizontal one looks clear and smooth. No Supplemental Pixel Supplemental Pixels are provided. This is because the diagonal line has a wider space between Main Pixels than the vertical / horizontal one.) Print image (Diagonal Line looks clear and smooth) 8-42 K116sm8e3 . Pixels created by this normal timing are called [Main Pixel]. Direction of print Print image (Diagonal line looks vague and rough. diagonal line comes to look smoother and clearer.

014 & 015) It is possible to align the pixels between Image Blocks if there is a gap of pixels. 5. 4. the whole pixels of the concerning Image Block is shifted “1 line (pixel)” to the trailing edge side.8. and both the Image Blocks A and C can be shifted vertically. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 8-43 K116sm8e3 . 7 Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks (No. Decrease the value of “015” to shift the block C to the trailing edge side. 014 015 Setting Item Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks A & B Horizontal Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks B & C Default value USA EUR/ASIA 8 8 8 8 Setting range 2 to 14 2 to 14 Step of increment 1 pixel 1 pixel Decrease the value of “014” to shift the block A to the leading edge side. Item No. The Image Block B is the standard.

8. the print length becomes 1mm longer. 9 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) (No. (This is may only be used on LONG prints over 6 meters on the IPS) If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4.016) It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter. Setting value is decreased Cut length 8-44 K116sm8e4 .017) It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 Setting range 0 to 100 Step of increment 1mm Setting value is increased. . the print length becomes 1mm longer. 8 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) (No. 4. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 Setting range 0 to 100 Step of increment 1mm Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased Cut length 8. This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is not provided with the length information. (this is command used on all standard pages printed from the IPS) If you increase the setting value by “+1”. This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is provided with the length information. 5. 5. .

1mm longer per 10mm. 4. the actual print length may become shorter than expected because the paper is likely to shrink.8. The length of long print is not compensated directly.016) before starting the adjustment in this Cut Length 3 (No. A C B A 8-45 K116sm8e4 . If you increase the setting value by “+1”.1mm NOTE It is necessary to finish the adjustment of Cut Length 1 (No. Supposing the actual length of a long print is shorter than expected. but it is indirectly compensated by correcting the length of A1 print. It is possible in this mode to compensate the print length manually.10 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print) (No.018). 100 100 50 50 Expected length Actual length 0 C B 0 Actual length is shorter than expected.018) When you make a long print. the length of A1 print becomes 0. [Example of adjustment] 1. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 475 475 Setting range 0 to 999 Step of increment 0. 5.

100 100 Expected length Actual length 50 50 0 C B 0 A C B A 8-46 K116sm8e4 . so it is 3mm shorter than expected. Measure the actual length of this A1 or 34” print to know how long millimeter it is shorter than expected. 4. (Example: Print out is 838mm. It is “30” in this example.018. The actual print out will be as long as expected.2. (3mm x 10 = 30) Specify “30” as the setting value of No. Make an A1 (841mm long) or 34” long print. Make a long print.) Expected length Actual length A1 or 34” 3mm 3. Necessary value for the compensation is 10 times as long as the difference between actual length and expected length.

NOTE (1) Image quality created with a reduced leading margin (less than 30 in the setting value) is not guaranteed. Changing the value to “0” removes whole the margin. 8-47 K116sm8e4 . Corresponding part of image printed.8.1mm Default: 30 A 3mm Leading Margin added to leading edge. It is possible to adjust the length of the leading margin. 019) A print has a 3 mm margin on the leading edge. Default Value 30 Setting Range 0 to 50 Step of increment 0. (2) Setting to “0” may result in a jam in Fuser Unit.1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.11 Leading Margin (No. The length of the leading edge becomes 0. 4. Hides the corresponding part of image. 5. which overlaps and hides the corresponding region of the image on the print. thus a portion image on the leading edge will appear. Example: 0 Leading Margin disappers.

16mm longer. This setting would be used if a different cut length is provided to Roll 1 and Roll 2. Measure the length gap between a piece of A1 size sheet from each Roll 1 and 2.8.020) It is possible to compensate the print length of Roll 2 individually.16mm Example: A1 from Roll 1 A1 from Roll 2 Sheet from Roll 2 is shorter Increase the value A1 from Roll 1 A1 from Roll 2 (compensated) Same length 8-48 K116sm8e4 . Default Value 50 Setting Range 0 to 100 Step of increment 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 5. 4. the print length of Roll 2 becomes 0.12 Cut Length 4 (Individual Compensation for Roll 2) (No.

Setting value is increased. 5. In this case compensate the Developer Bias to have even density on both areas. 8.028) It is possible to compensate the Developer Bias only for the 1st Drum revolution. (Even density) NOTE There may be the case that the density of leading area. 8-49 K116sm8e4 .14 Developer Bias compensation . 5.13 Developer Bias (No. Setting value is decreased. The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.022 to 027) It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting the Developer Bias (Negative Developer Roller Bias). is darker than other area. which corresponds to the 1st revolution of Drum. 022 023 024 025 026 027 Setting Item Developer Bias (Plain paper) Developer Bias (Tracing paper) Developer Bias (Film) Developer Bias (Special media / Plain paper) Developer Bias (Special media / Tracing paper) Developer Bias (Special media / Film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 161 Setting range 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF Step of increment 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting value is increased. Item No. 4. The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value. 4.8. NOTE Please adjust the Developer Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.1st Drum revolution (No. (Developer Bias is not compensated at all if the setting value is “0”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 0 0 Setting range 0 to 255 Step of increment 1 Density of leading area is darker.

If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. 8.029 to 034) It is possible to adjust the analog voltage outputted to the Transfer Corona during the print cycle. 5. the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed.8. 4. 029 030 031 032 033 034 Setting Item Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Plain paper) Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Tracing paper) Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Film) Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Special media / Plain paper) Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Special media / Tracing paper) Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Special media / Film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 366 366 28A 28A 28A 28A 292 292 292 292 292 292 Setting range 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF 0 to 4FF Step of increment 1 1 1 1 1 1 NOTE Please adjust Transfer Corona Analog Voltage while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter. Item No.035) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona starts discharging during the print cycle.16 Separation Corona ON Timing (No. 5. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 Setting range 0 to 100 Step of increment 1mm 8-50 K116sm8e4 .15 Transfer Voltage (No.

8. 4. 8-51 K116sm8e4 . If you increase the setting value by “+1”.037) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona starts discharging during the print cycle. Normal Setting value is increased too much. 5. because the timing to start discharging is too much delayed. Transfer Corona starts discharging at this point.17 Transfer Corona ON Timing (No. the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 48 48 Setting range 0 to 100 Step of increment 1mm NOTE You may lose some leading image as the following example if you increase the setting value too much.

because the Transfer Corona stops discharging too early.18 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (No. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 20 20 Setting range 0 to 100 Step of increment 1mm NOTE You may lose some trailing image as the following example if you decrease the setting value too much. 8-52 K116sm8e4 . the timing to stop discharging is 1mm delayed. Transfer Corona stops discharging at this point. 5. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Normal Setting value is increased too much.8. 4.038) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona stops discharging during the print cycle.

739 (Ready Temperature) 0 Turn on Ready Print Job (Time) Reference (1) The both sides part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print .Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044 No. 5.046 (common to both Center / Side) 8-53 K116sm8e4 . 4.Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing paper) Print .8.Fuser Temperature Side (No.Fuser Temperature Center (Film) Print .039 to 044) It is possible to adjust the center part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.Fuser Temperature Center (Special media / Plain paper) Print .Fuser Temperature Center (Special media / Film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 160 165 160 177 160 160 177 170 170 160 160 177 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment o 1C 1oC 1oC 1oC 1oC 1C o Setting value of 039 to 044 (Example: Film 170oC) (oC) Setting value of 738.739 No.Fuser Temperature Center (Special media / Tracing paper) Print .19 Print .625 to 648 No. The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”.Fuser Temperature Center (Plain paper ) Print .660 to 665 No.666 to 671 No. Item No. (2) Item List of Fuser Temperature Control (center / side) Fuser Center Print (for printing period) Ready (target temperature to get “Ready”) Standby (maintained during “Ready”) Warm Sleep No.738 Fuser Sides No. 625 to 648) separately. 039 040 041 042 043 044 Setting Item Print . Refer to page 8-125 and 126 for further information. You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately.

5. 739 (Example: 160 oC) (oC) Setting value of 046 (Example: 100 oC) 0 (Time) Warm Sleep starts. (Time) 8. 8-54 K116sm8e4 .046) It is possible to decide the temperature which is maintained in the Warm Sleep. When the Fuser Temperature reaches the value specified in this No.045) It is possible to decide the temperature to start idling. 100 oC is maintained after this point. 5.21 Warm Sleep – Fuser Temperature (No. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 120 120 Setting range 100 to 140 Step of increment 1C o Setting value of 039 to 044 (Example : 160 oC) (oC) Setting value of 045 (Example: 140 oC) 0 Turn on Ready (Idling stops. 4.045 during the warming up. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 100 100 Setting range 100 to 160 Step of increment 1C o Setting value of 738.8.) Idling starts.20 Fuser Temperature to start idling (No. the Fuser Motor starts rotating to drive the Fuser Roller (idling). 4.

4. 048 049 Setting Item Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle) Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 1 1 2 2 Setting range 1 to 6 1 to 6 Step of increment 1oC 1oC Example: Value of No. 5.039 to 044)” plus the setting value “X”.Fuser Temperature Side) is “160” Highest limit of control range (170 oC) Fuser Lamp turns OFF. The Fuser Roller gradually gets colder after that. Control range can be decided separately to each condition “in the print cycle” and “stand by”. The Fuser Lamp continues to light up when the temperature of Fuser Roller is colder than the highest limit. for example.739 Standby . If you specify some setting value “X” on these No. The highest limit is “Fuser Temperature (Decided in No. Item No.048 (Fuser Temperature Control Range) is “10” Value of No.048 & 049) It is possible to specify the control range of temperature of Fuser Roller.048 and 049. And the lowest one is “Fuser Temperature” minus “X”. 0 (Time) 8-55 K116sm8e4 . and it is put out when the temperature reaches the highest limit. (oC) Standby Fuser Temperature (160 oC) Lowest limit of control range (150 oC) Fuser Lamp turns ON. and the Fuser Lamp lights again when the temperature reaches the lowest limit. you can decide the highest limit and the lowest one of the control range of temperature.22 Fuser Temperature Control Range (No.8.

5. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 15 15 Setting range 1 to 30 Step of increment 1 second Toner Low Motor starts working Motor stops (Time) Setting value of No. In this case try to increase the setting value of No. 4. “Reaction time” is the time taken until the Toner Supply Motor starts working since “Toner Low” has been detected.050 NOTE The reaction time may be too long if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large volume prints continuously.24 Toner Supply Motor ON Time (No. 5.23 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor (No. In this case try to decrease the setting value of No. 8. The reaction time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value by “+1”.051 to make the ON time longer.050) It is possible to change the reaction time of Toner Supply Motor.051 NOTE The ON time may be too short if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large volume prints continuously. The ON time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value. 4.050 to shorten the reaction time. 8-56 K116sm8e4 .8.051) It is possible change the time the Toner Supply Motor works (ON time). Default value USA EUR/ASIA 10 10 Setting range 1 to 15 Step of increment 1 second Toner Low Motor starts working Motor stops (Time) Setting value of No.

052) It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer. Setting value 1 (Default in USA. It will not emphasize the dots coming together some degree. 8-57 K116sm8e4 . An isolated dot image is more emphasized if you increase the setting value.25 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No. The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear. It will not work if not validated. 4.8. Dot Enhancement function is ON. 5.) Dot Enhancement function is OFF. (2) The Dot Enhancement function can be validated in the User Mode. EUR & ASIA) 2 3 Contents Emphasized More emphasized Most emphasized Reference (1) An isolated dot image tends to look so weak. (Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot.

053 054 Setting Item Feed Clutch Off Timing (Roll 1) Feed Clutch Off Timing (Roll 2) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 230 230 230 230 Setting range 80 to 360 80 to 360 Step of increment 1msec.053. 1msec.26 Feed Clutch OFF time (No. 4.8. It is possible to specify how long period the Feed Clutch continues to be OFF. 054) The Feed Clutch turns OFF for a very short period whenever the machine transports the paper 2 meters long. so as to remove the paper slack in a long printing. 2 meters Feed Clutch turns OFF 2 meters Feed Clutch turns OFF 2 meters 8-58 K116sm8e4 . Item No. 5.

Interface Board communicates with both the image scanner (through A Channel) and the controller (through B Channel) alternately. EUR & ASIA) 8. 1 2 (Default in USA. 8. Setting value 0 Contents Both the A Channel and the B Channel are used alternately. The B Channel only is used. 5.27 Metric or Inch (No. 5. Interface Board communicates with image scanner through the A Channel. Setting value 0 (Default in EUR & ASIA) 1 (Default in USA) Contents Metric Inch 8. 5.8. Optional Roll Deck 2 is installed.058) It is possible to make the machine recognize the optional Roll Deck 2 if it is installed.059) It is possible to specify the counting unit of Counter. Interface Board communicates with controller through the B Channel. The A Channel only is used. 5. 4. 5. 4. 4.1 square meter 1 linear foot 1 square foot 8-59 K116sm8e4 .056) It is possible to specify the indication language of User Interface. Setting value 0 (Default in EUR & ASIA) 1 2 3 4 5 (Default in USA) Contents 1 linear meter 0. EUR & ASIA) Contents Japanese English 8.29 Interface Communication Setting (No. 4.057) It is possible to specify the communication of Interface. 4. EUR & ASIA) Contents Optional Roll Deck 2 is not installed. Setting value 0 1 (Default in USA.28 Language (No.055) It is possible to decide the base format of the print. Setting value 0 1 (Default in USA.1 linear meter 1 square meter 0.31 Counter Value (No.30 Recognition of Roll Deck 2 (No.

4. 4.061) It is possible to make the KIP 3100 recognize the optional device (stacker or folder) if connected. 5. 8-60 K116sm8e4 . Setting value 0 (Default in USA. Maximum cut length is 24m.062) It is possible to decide whether or not the Fuser Roller should rotate periodically in the stand by condition. In this case please note that the fusing quality may not be so good because the temperature of Fuser Roller is not equalized. Reference Fuser Roller periodically rotates and stops when the machine is ready.33 Stacking Device setting (No. 36” plain paper Other sizes of plain paper Tracing paper Film 6.34 Operation of Fuser Roller (No. Auto Stacker (K-76) 8. Fuser Roller does not rotate at all in the stand by condition.8.0m. 5. Setting value 0 (Default in USA.060) It is possible to specify the maximum cut length. Setting value 0 (Default in USA. If you feel it is so noisy. EUR & ASIA) 1 Contents Optional device is not connected. NOTE We will not guarantee the print quality if the print is longer than the following sizes. 5. 4. so as to equalize the temperature at every point of Fuser Roller. EUR & ASIA) 1 Contents Maximum cut length is 6. select the setting value “1”. EUR & ASIA) 1 Contents Fuser Roller rotates periodically in the stand by condition.0m 5 times as long as each standard size Twice as long as each standard size Standard sizes 8.32 Maximum Length (No.

paper length A0 (1189mm) A1 (841mm) A2 (594mm) A3 (420mm) A4 (297mm) length to be added / removed (Approx. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 5.8.04mm Expected length 0 C B Actual length 0 100 100 Increasing the value Expected length Actual length 100 100 50 50 0 C B 0 50 A A 50 C C B B A A 8-61 K116sm8e4 . the length of the print becomes longer. 063 064 Setting Item Cut Length 5 (Tracing Paper) Cut Length 6 (Film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 100 100 100 86 Setting range 0 to 200 0 to 200 Step of increment depends on paper length depends on paper length An amount of the length to be added / removed against “1” increment of the setting value will vary depending on the length of the media length to be printed.05mm 0.) 0.35 Cut Length 5 & 6 (Length Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film)(No.063. “1” increment will correspond to the length listed below to be compensated. 4. Item No.08mm 0. 064) It is possible to compensate the print length for the tracing paper and film.11mm 0.16mm 0.

4. Setting value 0 (default) 1 Contents Fuser Motor does not make a reverse operation at all Fuser Motor makes a reverse operation in conjunction with Drum Reverse. The Drum makes a reverse rotation in a given period twice after finishing a job.065) It is possible to change the period for the Drum reverse rotation.065 Value for No.8. 5.065 Reference (1) Drum reverse rotations may produce a slight amount of toner sticking on Drum’s surface. The indentation may result in defective imaging. NOTE This setting does not function. 8-62 K116sm8e4 . Setting a smaller value will reduce such a line. Setting a bigger value for No. 37 Fuser Motor Reverse Setting (No.36 Drum Reverse Time (No. (2) Setting an extremely small value may cause an indentation on Developer Roller. 8.066) It is possible to make a decision to allow reverse operation of Fuser Motor at the time of Drum Reverse. This causes a black line about 50mm below the leading edge on a print. 5. Developer Roller is strongly pressed to the Drum and that may cause an indentation on Developer Roller’s surface. 4. Change of this setting has no effect on the machine operation. Default value USA EUR/ASIA 30 30 Setting range 10 to 70 Step of increment 1 millisecond Print process end Drum reverse rotation starts stops / starts again stops Value for No.065 makes the reverse rotation period longer.

8-63 K116sm8e4 . Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper and film.067) There may be the case that some type of printing paper has a difficulty in paper separation. try to make it work. Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and tracing paper. It is possible in this No. Reference Sometimes you can avoid “defect of transfer (light image)” by making the Separation Lamp work. 5.38 Operation of Separation Lamp (No. 4.067 to decide to which type of paper the Separation Lamp should light. Separation Lamp lights for tracing paper.8. Selectable values are from 1 to 7 Setting value 1 2 3 4 5 (Default in USA. Separation Lamp lights for plain paper and film. In this case it is possible to assist paper separation by lighting the Separation Lamp. Separation Lamp lights for film. You may be able to fix the problem. Separation Lamp lights for all kinds of paper. So if you feel the print image is too light. EUR & ASIA) 6 7 Contents Separation Lamp lights for plain paper.

12” and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding.5 sec 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3.070 to 075. 070 071 072 073 074 075 678 679 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3.5 sec 0. 8-64 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0. 3rd.5 sec 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3. 2nd. 678. 679) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.39 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A3. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3. 12” & 11”) (No. 4. 12” & 11”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 34 39 1 1 35 1 50 5 34 6 42 1 48 5 37 8 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.04mm/s 0. 5.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A3. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A3. 4th Speed. Item No.5 sec Please refer to the next page for further information.8.

073) 1st Speed (No. Fuser Motor Speed is constant 100 Leading edge 50 A B C 0 Defective image Crease of paper It is effective to fix these problems if we change Fuser Motor Speed step by step during 1 sheet of print. The Fuser Motor speed can be changed to 4 times in maximum for 1 sheet of print.072) 3rd Speed (No. At first Fuser Motor rotates obeying the setting of “Fuser Motor Speed” (specified in No.074) 4th Speed Switch Timing (No.071) Fuser Motor Speed (No.316) 2nd Speed Switch Timing (No.679) 4th Speed (No. After that it changes its rotation speed step by step obeying the speed settings .Reference Sometimes “crease of paper” or “defective image” may occur when you make a very long print with a constant Fuser Motor Speed.070) 3rd Speed Switch Timing (No.316 to 321).678) 100 A 50 B C 0 8-65 K116sm8e5 . 1st Speed Switch Timing (No.075) 2nd Speed (No.

Fuser Motor 3rd Speed starts 12 seconds after the start of Fuser Motor 1st Speed.08mm/sec. 2nd. 3rd.04mm/sec. 4th in each Item No.071. Fuser Motor 1st Speed (80. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.) (Example) Setting value of 070 is “41” Setting value of 072 is “42” Setting value of 074 is “43” Setting value of 678 is “44” Fuser Motor 1st Speed is 80. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. (The default setting value “40” corresponds to 80mm/second.04mm/second faster. 679.16mm/s) 100 A 50 B C 0 You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. Fuser Motor 3rd Speed is 80. Fuser Motor 2nd Speed is 80.08mm/s) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (80.070. 3rd and 4th in each Item No. 072.12mm/s) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (80. the timing to switch the speed is 0. Fuser Motor 4th Speed is 80. the Fuser Motor Speed does not change. 678.You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 074. Fuser Motor 2nd Speed starts 8 seconds after the start of Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 073.04mm/s) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (80.12mm/sec. 2nd.16mm/sec. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 075.) (Example) Setting value of 071 is “8” Setting value of 073 is “16” Setting value of 075 is “24” Setting value of 678 is “32” Fuser Motor 1st Speed starts 4 seconds after the Registration Sensor detects the leading edge.5 second delayed. Fuser Motor 4th Speed starts 16 seconds after the start of Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 8 seconds (1st Speed) 12seconds (2nd Speed) 16 seconds (3rd Speed) 4 seconds (Fuser motor Speed) (4th Speed) 100 A 50 B C 0 8-66 K116sm8e5 . (If you specify “0”.

12” & 11”) (No.8. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd.076.5 sec 0.5 sec 0.5 sec 0.40 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A3. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 080. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 5.076 to 081. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3. 3rd. 079. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A3.04mm/s 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 076 077 078 079 080 081 680 681 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3. 4.077. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 12” and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding. 680. 4th in each Item No.04mm/second faster. 081. 681. 12” & 11”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 33 36 1 1 39 1 44 5 40 0 44 3 44 5 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3. 680. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3.5 sec You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 681) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 4th in each Item No. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3. 8-67 K116sm8e5 . If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 second delayed. 3rd and 4th Speed. 2nd. 078. Item No. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A3.

Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.5 second delayed.04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A3. 086. 082 083 084 085 086 087 682 683 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A3.083. 683) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 3rd and 4th Speed. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0.082 to 087. 2nd. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A3. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 087.5 sec 0. 084. 4. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4th in each Item No.41 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A3. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A3. 2nd. 4th in each Item No. 085. 683. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 sec 0. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A3. 682.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 12” and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding. 2nd.082. 3rd. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A3. 682.04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A3.04mm/s 0. 3rd. Item No. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A3. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A3.8.5 sec You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 5. 12” & 11”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 2 2 50 4 40 0 40 0 50 4 40 0 40 040 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 8-68 K116sm8e5 . 12” & 11”) (No.

3rd and 4th Speed.089. 088 089 090 091 092 093 684 685 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 4th in each Item No.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0.5 sec 0.088 to 093. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. Item No. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 12” and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding. 8-69 K116sm8e5 . the timing to switch the speed is 0.088. 3rd. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 093.5 sec 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.8. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd. 12” & 11”) (No. 091. 684. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 092.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 685. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 684. 2nd. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A3.04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 4. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed Setting (Roll / Special plain paper / A3.5 second delayed.04mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A3. 685) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 2nd.42 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A3. 090. 4th in each Item No. 5. 2nd.

098.094. 096.5 sec 0.04mm/s 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. 12” & 11”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. 3rd and 4th Speed. 3rd.04mm/second faster. Item No.5 second delayed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 099. 687.095.5 sec 0.094 to 099) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0. 4th in each Item No. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 686. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 097. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/s 0. 2nd.04mm/s 0.8. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. 2nd. 8-70 K116sm8e5 . If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4th in each Item No. 094 095 096 097 098 099 686 687 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.43 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A3. 3rd. 4. 2nd. 12” & 11”) (No. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3.5 sec 0. 12” and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll/ Special Media / Tracing / A3. 5. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A3.

12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. 3rd.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd.04mm/second faster. 12” & 11”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec 0. 12” & 11”) (No. 3rd and 4th Speed. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 12” and 11” sizes by roll paper feeding.8. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. 4. 4th in each Item No. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. 688. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 12” & 11”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. 688.44 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A3. 103.5 second delayed. 4th in each Item No. 104.5 sec 0. 12” & 11”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0.100. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.5 sec 0. 5.04mm/s 0.101. 689) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 100 101 102 103 104 105 688 689 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A3. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A3.04mm/s 0. 8-71 K116sm8e5 . 2nd. 689.100 to 105. 105. 102. Item No.

107.45 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A2. 18” and 17” sizes by roll paper feeding. 690.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A2.04mm/s 0. 691) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. 4th in each Item No. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. Item No.106 to 111. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. 3rd. 111. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 110. 106 107 108 109 110 111 690 691 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2.04mm/second faster. 4.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 108.8. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 3rd. 4th in each Item No. 18” & 17”) (No. the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 sec 0. 2nd. 691.5 second delayed. 3rd and 4th Speed.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 30 31 3 3 32 4 31 6 37 10 36 4 38 6 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 5. 109. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/s 0. 2nd.5 sec 0. 690. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A2. 8-72 K116sm8e5 .106.

3rd. 3rd and 4th Speed. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. 2nd.112. the timing to switch the speed is 0.04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. 114. 18” and 17” sizes by roll paper feeding. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. 692. 5.112 to 117. 2nd. 115. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2.46 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A2.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A2. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 693) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 2nd.5 sec 0.04mm/s 0. 4th in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 692. 693. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. 112 113 114 115 116 117 692 693 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. 3rd. 117.5 sec 0. 8-73 K116sm8e5 . 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A2. 18” & 17”) (No.113. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 33 40 3 1 38 3 38 5 40 0 44 5 45 5 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.8. 4. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 116. 4th in each Item No.5 second delayed. Item No.5 sec 0.

the timing to switch the speed is 0. 121.04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. 695) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A2.118. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 695. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A2. 4th in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A2. 120. 2nd. 694. 3rd. 3rd and 4th Speed. 118 119 120 121 122 123 694 695 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A2. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.5 sec 0. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A2.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. Item No. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A2. 8-74 K116sm8e5 . You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.47 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A2. 18” and 17” sizes by roll paper feeding. 2nd. 3rd. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A2. 123.5 second delayed. 4.04mm/s 0. 4th in each Item No. 694.119. 18” & 17”) (No.8. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 2 2 50 6 40 0 40 0 50 6 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 5.04mm/s 0.118 to 123. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A2. 122.

4.5 sec 0. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2.8.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd and 4th Speed. 2nd. 18” & 17”) (No.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2.5 sec 0. 696. 5. 4th in each Item No. 126. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 128. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 129. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2. 697) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.124 to 129. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2. Item No. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A2.125. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. 127.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd. 2nd. 8-75 K116sm8e5 . 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2. 124 125 126 127 128 129 696 697 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A2. 696. 18” and 17” sizes by roll paper feeding.5 second delayed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.48 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A2.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/second faster.124. 3rd. 4th in each Item No. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 697.

04mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. 3rd.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 18” and 17” size by roll paper feeding. 2nd. 132. 698.04mm/s 0. 3rd and 4th Speed. 699.04mm/s 0. 2nd. Item No. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 130 131 132 133 134 135 698 699 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. 699) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 3rd.49 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A2.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A2. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. 133. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2.5 sec 0. 8-76 K116sm8e5 . 698. 135. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A2. 2nd.130 to 135. 4th in each Item No.04mm/s 0.8. 134.131. 18” & 17”) (No.5 second delayed. 4. 4th in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.130. 5.

It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd. 138.04mm/s 0.137.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. 3rd.136. 2nd. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A2.136 to 141. 700. 701) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 701. 8-77 K116sm8e5 . Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.04mm/s 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A2. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A2. 3rd and 4th Speed. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A2. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 700. 18” and 17” sizes by roll paper feeding. 4th in each Item No. 5. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A2.5 sec 0. 2nd. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/second faster. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A2.50 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A2. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A2.5 second delayed. 2nd. 141.5 sec 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A2. 18” & 17”) (No.8. 136 137 138 139 140 141 700 701 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A2. Item No. 4th in each Item No. 139.140.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4.

24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. 142 143 144 145 146 147 702 703 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. 3rd. 24” and 22” sizes by roll paper feeding. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. 702. 703. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1.51 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A1.04mm/second faster. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 2nd.142 to 147. 702. 24” & 22”) (No. 3rd and 4th Speed. 5. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A1. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.143. 2nd. 144. 4th in each Item No.04mm/s 0. 8-78 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.5 sec 0.5 sec 0.04mm/s 0. 147. 703) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.8. 4. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. 3rd. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. 4th in each Item No. 145. 146. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 37 35 3 3 30 6 40 6 35 16 33 8 41 8 36 16 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.142. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A1. Item No.04mm/s 0.5 second delayed. 2nd.

It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 24” and 22” sizes by roll paper feeding. 2nd. 704. 4th in each Item No. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1.5 sec 0.8. 4. 152. the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 second delayed. 2nd. 705. 3rd.04mm/s 0.149. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 2nd. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1. 148 149 150 151 152 153 704 705 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1.148 to 153. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1. 5. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A1.04mm/second faster. 151.04mm/s 0. 4th in each Item No. 3rd and 4th Speed. 8-79 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1. 3rd. 150. 24” & 22”) (No. 704.148. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 36 42 3 3 41 9 39 8 40 0 43 9 40 8 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A1. 153. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0. Item No. 705) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.52 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A1.

53 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A1. 3rd. 24” and 22” sizes by roll paper feeding. 707) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.5 second delayed.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. 2nd. 154 155 156 157 158 159 706 707 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A1.8. 706. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 4. 3rd and 4th Speed. 4th in each Item No. 3rd. 707. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 157.155. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A1. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.154. 159.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. Item No. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 42 42 2 2 42 14 40 0 40 0 42 14 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A1. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 706. 156. 4th in each Item No.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A1. 8-80 K116sm8e5 . 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A1.04mm/second faster. 158. 24” & 22”) (No.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. 2nd. 5.154 to 159. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A1.

54 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A1. 709. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1.5 sec 0. 5.160 to 165. 24” and 22” sizes by roll paper feeding. 3rd.04mm/s 0. 708. 162. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1. 165. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 4th in each Item No. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1. 160 161 162 163 164 165 708 709 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1. 4th in each Item No. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.5 second delayed.160. 3rd and 4th Speed. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1.8. 708.5 sec 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A1.5 sec 0. 164. 2nd. 4.161.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/second faster. 24 & 22”) (No. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd. 163.04mm/s 0. 8-81 K116sm8e5 . 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 709) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. Item No. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0.

If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 24” & 22”) (No.5 sec 0. 5. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1.166 to 171. 24” and 22” size by roll paper feeding.04mm/s 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 2nd. 3rd and 4th Speed.8. 4th in each Item No.5 sec 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. 710. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. 4. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.166. 168. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. Item No. 3rd. the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 second delayed. 2nd. 171. 711) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.167. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. 4th in each Item No.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. 169. 2nd. 710.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 170.04mm/s 0. 8-82 K116sm8e5 .55 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A1. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/second faster. 3rd. 711. 166 167 168 169 170 171 710 711 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A1. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A1.

176. 2nd. 713) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.8. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A1. 172 173 174 175 176 177 712 713 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A1. 4th in each Item No. 175. 4. 2nd.5 sec 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A1. 3rd.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 5. the timing to switch the speed is 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A1.5 second delayed. 24” and 22” sizes by roll paper feeding. 24” & 22”) (No.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A1.173.04mm/s 0. 3rd and 4th Speed. 712.04mm/second faster. 4th in each Item No. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 177.172. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.56 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A1. 713. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 8-83 K116sm8e5 . 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A1. 174.04mm/s 0. 712. 2nd. Item No.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.172 to 177. 3rd. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A1.

It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 26 26 4 3 27 10 33 8 30 20 27 10 37 8 30 20 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 8-84 K116sm8e5 . 183. 3rd. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0.5 second delayed. 2nd.178 to 183. 5. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 715.5 sec 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0. 4th in each Item No.04mm/second faster.179. 714. 181. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 36” and 34” sizes by roll paper feeding. 3rd.5 sec 0.5 sec 0.8.04mm/s 0.178. 36” & 34”) (No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0. 3rd and 4th Speed. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.57 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / A0. 2nd. Item No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0.04mm/s 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 180. 714. 4th in each Item No. 4.04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0. 715) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 182. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0. 178 179 180 181 182 183 714 715 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Plain paper / A0.

36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0.184 to 189.04mm/second faster.5 sec 0. 189.185. 716.8.04mm/s 0. 8-85 K116sm8e5 . 186.04mm/s 0. 184 185 186 187 188 189 716 717 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. 2nd. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 716. 717) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. 717. 4th in each Item No. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. 4th in each Item No.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 188. 4. 187. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. 36” and 34” sizes by roll paper feeding. 3rd. 36” & 34”) (No.04mm/s 0. 5. 3rd.5 second delayed. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. 2nd.5 sec 0. Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd.184.58 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / A0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Tracing / A0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 29 42 3 3 35 13 36 8 34 20 38 13 39 8 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 3rd and 4th Speed.

If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 sec 0. 719.190.5 second delayed.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. Item No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A0. 36” & 34”) (No. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.04mm/s 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 4th in each Item No.04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A0. 193. 36” and 34” sizes by roll paper feeding. 3rd and 4th Speed. 719) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd. 192. 5. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A0.190 to 195.8. 2nd. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Film / A0. 718. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Film / A0.5 sec 0. 3rd.04mm/s 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.59 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / A0. 4th in each Item No. 4.191. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Film / A0. 190 191 192 193 194 195 718 719 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 195. 718. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 35 38 2 2 40 18 40 0 40 0 43 18 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 8-86 K116sm8e5 . 2nd. 194. 3rd. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Film / A0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. the timing to switch the speed is 0.

36 & 34”) (No.8. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0. 5.60 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / A0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 721. 720. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0.04mm/second faster. 721) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. Item No. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0. 199.04mm/s 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 8-87 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0. 4th in each Item No. 2nd.197. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0.196 to 201. 201. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 second delayed. 2nd. 200.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. 720. 3rd and 4th Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0. 3rd. 4. 196 197 198 199 200 201 720 721 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0. 3rd. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 4th in each Item No. 198. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 36” and 34” sizes by roll paper feeding. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A0. 2nd. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0.196. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special plain paper / A0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0.

5 sec 0. 204. 2nd. 4th in each Item No.202. 8-88 K116sm8e5 . 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0. 36” and 34” size by roll paper feeding. 722. 2nd. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 second delayed.202 to 207. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 4th in each Item No. 5. 207. 205. 3rd. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0. 36” & 34”) (No.8. 723. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A0.04mm/second faster.203. 3rd. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 722. 723) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. Item No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 206. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 3rd and 4th Speed.61 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / A0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” & 34”) rd Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3 Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0.5 sec 0.04mm/s 0. 202 203 204 205 206 207 722 723 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special tracing / A0.

5 sec 0.04mm/s 0. 4. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A0. 2nd. 8-89 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.208 to 213. 4th in each Item No.04mm/second faster. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A0. 724. 210. 2nd. 2nd. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A0. 4th in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0.8. 725) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 212.5 sec 0. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A0. 36” & 34”) (No. 211. 24” and 22” sizes by roll paper feeding.5 sec 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / Special film / A0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. Item No. 725. 3rd. 3rd. 5. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / Special film / A0.5 second delayed. 213. 208 209 210 211 212 213 724 725 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / Special film / A0.62 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / A0.209. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / Special film / A0.208. 3rd and 4th Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. 724.

04mm/s 0.64 Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (No.04mm/s Refer to [8.04mm/s 0. Item No.04mm/second faster. 316 317 318 319 320 321 Setting Item Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Plain paper) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Tracing paper) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Film paper) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special plain paper) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special tracing paper) Fuser Motor Speed (36” / 34” / 30” / 24” / 22” / A0 / B1 / A1) (Special film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 31 35 39 50 40 40 40 50 50 40 40 40 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 Step of increment 0.04mm/s 0. You can specify the timing for each type of paper separately. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.316 to 321) It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately. 4.04mm/second faster. 4.65 Separation Corona OFF Timing (No.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 8.5. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0. the motor speed becomes 0. 4. 8.310 to 315) It is possible to adjust the speed of Main Motor for each type of paper separately. 310 311 312 313 314 315 Setting Item Main Motor Speed (Plain paper) Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper) Main Motor Speed (Film) Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper) Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper) Main Motor Speed (Special film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 36 36 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 Step of increment 0. Item No. the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed. 322 323 324 325 326 327 Setting Item Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (tracing paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special plain paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special tracing paper) Separation Corona OFF Timing (Special film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 25 25 25 25 22 25 18 18 18 18 23 23 Setting range 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 0 to 100 Step of increment 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm 8-90 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0. 5.04mm/s 0.4.04mm/s 0.322 to 327) It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona stops discharging during the print cycle.8. 5. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s CAUTION The Main Motor Speed is the basis for many other print settings. Item No. So you have to re-adjust all of these print settings if you change the Main Motor Speed. 5. the motor speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0.63 Main Motor Speed (No.119 Fuser Motor Speed] on page 8-134 for narrower originals than the above.

04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 second delayed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 11”. 18” and 17” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. 11”. A2. 8-91 K116sm8e5 . the timing to switch the speed is 0. A2. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. 3rd in each Item No. 328 329 330 331 332 333 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3. 12”. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3. 11”. 331 and 333.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3. 12”.329.328 to 333) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A2. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 30 31 3 32 4 31 6 3 36 4 38 6 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 330 and 332. A2. A2. 4. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3. A2.8. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 12”. 5.328. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 12”. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A3.5 sec 0. 2nd. 2nd.04mm/second faster.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. A2. 12”. 12”. A2. 3rd in each Item No. Item No.66 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A3. 18” & 17”) (No. 11”. 11”. 12”.

334 335 336 337 338 339 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3.5 second delayed. 11”. A2. A2. 2nd. A2.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.67 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A3. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3. 12”. 11”. A2. A2. 12”. 3rd in each Item No. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 33 40 2 38 3 38 5 1 44 5 45 2 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 5. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A2. A2. 337 and 339. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3.334. 11”. 11”.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. the timing to switch the speed is 0.04mm/s 0. 3rd in each Item No. 11”. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 12”. 8-92 K116sm8e5 . 12”. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 18” & 17”) (No.8. 11”. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 12”. 4. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 336 and 338. 12”.04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3. 12”.5 sec 0. Item No. 2nd. A2.335. 18” and 17” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A3.334 to 339) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 11”.

A2. 11”. 12”. 3rd in each Item No. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 11”. 343 and 345. 12”. 11”. A2. 11”. 5. Item No.04mm/s 0. 340 341 342 343 344 345 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A3. 12”.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 11”. 12”.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A3. 12”. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A3. 12”. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.68 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A3. 2nd. A2. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 3rd in each Item No.341. 8-93 K116sm8e5 . 2nd and 3rd Speed. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A3. 18” & 17”) (No.340. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A3. 11”.8.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 2 50 6 40 0 6 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 second delayed.5 sec 0. A2. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A3. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A2. 2nd. A2.340 to 345) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/second faster. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.5 sec 0. A2. A2. 4. 18” and 17” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 342 and 344. 12”.

18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3.5 second delayed. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3. A2. 4. A2. 11”. 11”. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.5 sec 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. A2. 12”.5 sec 0. 349 and 351. 5. 12”. 12”. A2.8. 18” and 17” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.346. 346 347 348 349 350 351 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 12”.347. 12”.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A2. 348 and 350. 3rd in each Item No. 8-94 K116sm8e5 . 3rd in each Item No.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 12”. 11”. A2. 18” & 17”) (No. 12”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 11”. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.346 to 351) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.69 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A3. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3. 2nd. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A3. A2. 11”. 2nd.04mm/second faster. Item No.04mm/s 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 11”. A2.

It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.5 sec 0. 12”.70 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A3.04mm/second faster. 18” and 17” size by cut sheet bypass feeding.04mm/s 0. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3. A2. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3.352 to 357) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 11”. 8-95 K116sm8e5 . 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3. A2.5 sec 0. 5. A2.04mm/s 0. 12”. 11”.8. A2. 11”. 12”. 12”. A2. 3rd in each Item No. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 4. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 11”. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 18” & 17”) (No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 11”. A2. 354 and 356. 3rd in each Item No.353. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A2. 2nd and 3rd Speed.04mm/s 0. 11”. 2nd. 352 353 354 355 356 357 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3. 2nd. 12”.352. A2. Item No. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A3. 12”. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 12”.5 second delayed. 355 and 357. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.

18” and 17” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. 12”. 5.04mm/s 0. 12”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A3. 4. 18” & 17”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. A2. the timing to switch the speed is 0.71 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A3. 3rd in each Item No.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0. Item No. A2. A2. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A3. 12”.359. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A3. 2nd and 3rd Speed.5 second delayed. A2. A2. 11”.358 to 363) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 12”.5 sec 0. A2. 3rd in each Item No. 360 and 362. 12”. 8-96 K116sm8e5 . If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 12”. 12”. 18” & 17”) (No. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 11”.358. 18” & 17”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A3. 11”. A2. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A2. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 358 359 360 361 362 363 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A3. 11”. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.8.04mm/second faster. 361 and 363. 11”. 11”. 18” & 17”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A3.

24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1.8. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1. Item No. 3rd in each Item No.364 to 369) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. 5. 2nd.5 second delayed. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 37 35 3 30 6 40 6 3 33 8 41 8 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 24” & 22”) (No. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 24” and 22” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. 3rd in each Item No. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 367 and 369. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1.04mm/s 0.04mm/second faster. 364 365 366 367 368 369 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1. 4. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 8-97 K116sm8e5 .364.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 2nd and 3rd Speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A1.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A1.72 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A1.04mm/s 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 366 and 368.365.

24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1. 3rd in each Item No.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 3rd in each Item No. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 2nd.73 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A1.5 second delayed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A1. 372 and 374.370 to 375) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.371. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 373 and 375. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1.04mm/s 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 24” & 22”) (No. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1.5 sec 0. 2nd. 4. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 370 371 372 373 374 375 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A1. 8-98 K116sm8e5 . 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 36 42 3 3 41 9 39 8 43 9 40 8 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0.370. Item No. 5. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0.04mm/second faster. 24” and 22” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.8.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.

2nd. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1. the timing to switch the speed is 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/s 0.8.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 3rd in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 24” & 22”) (No.5 sec 0. 5. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.377. 378 and 380. Item No. 3rd in each Item No.376. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.376 to 381) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1. 376 377 378 379 380 381 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1. 4.04mm/second faster. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 42 42 2 2 42 14 40 0 42 14 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.04mm/s 0. 379 and 381.5 second delayed.5 sec 0.04mm/s 0.74 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A1. 2nd. 8-99 K116sm8e5 . 24” and 22” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A1. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A1. 2nd and 3rd Speed.

24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.8. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1. 385 and 387. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 sec 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 24” & 22”) (No.382. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A1. 4. 384 and 386. 24” and 22” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0. 382 383 384 385 386 387 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1.382 to 387) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. Item No.75 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A1.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0. 2nd. 3rd in each Item No. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 2nd.04mm/second faster. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.383. 3rd in each Item No. 8-100 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0.5 second delayed. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 5.

04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1. 3rd in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1. 388 389 390 391 392 393 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1. Item No. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A1.76 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A1. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 390 and 392. 24” & 22”) (No.389. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.388 to 393) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.5 second delayed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 4. 3rd in each Item No. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/second faster. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 8-101 K116sm8e5 .5 sec 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 24” and 22” size by cut sheet bypass feeding.388. 391 and 393. 5.5 sec 0.8.04mm/s 0. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 2nd. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A1.

394. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1. 396 and 398. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 24” and 22” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.04mm/s 0. 3rd in each Item No. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1.395. 24” & 22”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/second faster. 3rd in each Item No. 2nd. 4. 397 and 399. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A1. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 2nd.04mm/s 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 second delayed.04mm/s 0. 8-102 K116sm8e5 . 5.5 sec 0. 24” & 22”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 394 395 396 397 398 399 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1.77 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A1. 24” & 22”) (No.8.394 to 399) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 24” & 22”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A1. Item No.5 sec 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.

78 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / A0. 2nd. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0. 36” & 34”) (No. 5. 402 and 404. 400 401 402 403 404 405 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0. 3rd in each Item No. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 26 26 4 27 10 33 8 3 27 10 37 8 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 8-103 K116sm8e5 .8. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.400.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of A0.04mm/second faster.5 sec 0. 2nd. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0. 403 and 405. Item No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0.04mm/s 0. 3rd in each Item No. 36” and 34” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.400 to 405) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd and 3rd Speed.5 second delayed. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Plain paper / A0.401. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.

3rd in each Item No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0.04mm/s 0. 4.04mm/second faster. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0.79 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / A0. 5.5 sec 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0.407.5 second delayed.406 to 411) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” and 34” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. 2nd. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.8. 36” & 34”) (No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0. 409 and 411. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 406 407 408 409 410 411 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0. 8-104 K116sm8e5 .406. 3rd in each Item No. 2nd.04mm/s 0. Item No. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of A0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 29 42 3 3 35 13 36 8 38 13 39 8 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Tracing / A0.5 sec 0. 408 and 410. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.

3rd in each Item No. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0. 2nd. 414 and 416.8. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/second faster.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0. 412 413 414 415 416 417 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0. Item No.5 second delayed.412 to 417) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 36” and 34” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding.80 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / A0.04mm/s 0. 4. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0.5 sec 0. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 35 38 2 2 42 18 40 0 43 18 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 5.04mm/s 0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 36” & 34”) (No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Film / A0. 415 and 417.412. 3rd in each Item No.5 sec 0.413. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of A0. 8-105 K116sm8e5 . Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 2nd and 3rd Speed.

2nd and 3rd Speed.04mm/s 0.04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36 & 34”) (No. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0. 3rd in each Item No. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 second delayed. 418 419 420 421 422 423 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of A0.81 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / A0. 420 and 422. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” and 34” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 4. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special plain paper / A0. 421 and 423. 8-106 K116sm8e5 .5 sec 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 sec 0.418 to 423) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd.8.418. Item No. 3rd in each Item No.419. 5. 2nd. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0.

3rd in each Item No. 5. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 second delayed. 36” and 34” size by cut sheet bypass feeding. 3rd in each Item No.8.425.5 sec 0. 424 425 426 427 428 429 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0. Item No. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/second faster. 8-107 K116sm8e5 . Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0.04mm/s 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.82 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / A0.424 to 429) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd. 427 and 429.424.04mm/s 0. 36” & 34”) (No.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0. 426 and 428. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of A0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 36” & 34”) rd Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3 Speed (Cut sheet / Special tracing / A0. 4.

2nd. 430 431 432 433 434 435 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0. 3rd in each Item No. 36” & 34”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 24” and 22” sizes by cut sheet bypass feeding. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.04mm/s 0.430 to 435) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 36” & 34”) (No. 8-108 K116sm8e5 . Item No. 5.431.5 sec 0.5 second delayed.04mm/s 0. 432 and 434.83 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / A0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0. 433 and 435. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 36” & 34”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0.8.04mm/s 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.430. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of A0. 36” & 34”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / Special film / A0. 2nd.5 sec 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd in each Item No. the timing to switch the speed is 0.04mm/second faster.

(Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30” size by roll paper feeding.5 sec 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0.5 second delayed. 441.436. 4th in each Item No. 726.04mm/second faster. 4th in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 440. 2nd. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. Item No.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.437. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 2nd. 4.04mm/s 0. 727) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.436 to 441.5 sec 0. 436 437 438 439 440 441 726 727 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / plain paper / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 28 28 5 5 30 9 34 7 36 20 33 9 36 7 30 20 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 438. 726. 3rd. 3rd and 4th Speed.5 sec 0.8. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0.04mm/s 0. 439.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 2nd. 5.84 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Plain paper / 30”) (No. 8-109 K116sm8e5 . You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 727. 3rd.

04mm/second faster.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. 2nd.85 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Tracing paper / 30”) (No. 447. 3rd and 4th Speed. 728. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 4th in each Item No.5 sec 0. 2nd. 2nd. 446.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 4th in each Item No. 8-110 K116sm8e5 .5 sec 0. 3rd. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 5.04mm/s 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 444. 728.442 to 447.442. 729) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.5 second delayed. 3rd. 445. 729.5 sec 0.443.04mm/s 0. Item No. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30” size by roll paper feeding.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.8. 442 443 444 445 446 447 728 729 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / tracing / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 34 33 4 4 38 11 40 8 34 20 44 11 41 8 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.

5 sec 0. 4th in each Item No. 3rd and 4th Speed.5 sec 0.449. 5. 451.04mm/s 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 3rd. 453. 2nd. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.04mm/s 0. 448 449 450 451 452 453 730 731 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / film / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 40 0 0 40 40 0 0 40 40 0 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 730. 450.86 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Film / 30”) (No. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of 30” size by roll paper feeding.448 to 453.8.5 second delayed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 sec 0. 8-111 K116sm8e5 . 731. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 4th in each Item No. the timing to switch the speed is 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/second faster. 4.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 730. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. 2nd.04mm/s 0. 731) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 452.448. 3rd. 2nd. Item No.

04mm/second faster. 459. 3rd and 4th Speed. 4th in each Item No. 3rd. 732. Item No. 2nd. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 733) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. the timing to switch the speed is 0.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 4th in each Item No. 456. 457. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30” size by roll paper feeding.454. 5.87 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special plain paper / 30”) (No.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. 458.8.5 sec 0. 8-112 K116sm8e5 . each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 732. 454 455 456 457 458 459 732 733 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special plain paper / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 733.5 second delayed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.455. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 2nd. 4.454 to 459.

2nd. 463.461. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/second faster.5 sec 0. 4th in each Item No.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 465. 464. 5. 2nd.460 to 465.04mm/s 0.460. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 4th in each Item No.5 sec 0. 735) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0. Item No.5 sec 0.5 second delayed. 2nd. 8-113 K116sm8e5 . 735. 734. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 3rd. 4. 462. 734.04mm/s 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30” size by roll paper feeding.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 460 461 462 463 464 465 734 735 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special tracing / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.88 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special tracing paper / 30”) (No.8. 3rd and 4th Speed. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd.

04mm/s 0. 737) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 3rd and 4th Speed. 2nd. 471.8. 736. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30” size by roll paper feeding.04mm/s 0.5 second delayed.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 466 467 468 469 470 471 736 737 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed (Roll / special film / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.04mm/second faster. 3rd. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 4th in each Item No.466 to 471. 2nd. 3rd.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0.5 sec 0. 5.5 sec 0. 470. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.89 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for roll paper (Special film / 30”) (No. 4. 737. 2nd. 469. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 736.466.467. 468. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 8-114 K116sm8e5 . Item No.5 sec 0. 4th in each Item No.

It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd in each Item No.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. 5. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper of 30” size by cut sheet bypass feeding. 2nd. Item No. 8-115 K116sm8e5 . 4. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.04mm/second faster. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.472. 2nd. 3rd in each Item No.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 474 and 476. 475 and 477.5 second delayed.8. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.90 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Plain paper / 30”) (No. 2nd and 3rd Speed.472 to 477) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.473. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 472 473 474 475 476 477 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / plain paper / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 28 28 5 5 30 9 34 7 33 9 36 7 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed.04mm/s 0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.

04mm/s 0.04mm/second faster. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd in each Item No. Item No. 2nd. the timing to switch the speed is 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 478 479 480 481 482 483 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / tracing / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 34 33 4 4 38 11 40 8 44 11 41 8 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec 0.91 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Tracing paper / 30”) (No.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 2nd. 2nd and 3rd Speed.479. 4. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.478.04mm/s 0.478 to 483) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 5. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 3rd in each Item No.5 second delayed. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper of 30” size by cut sheet bypass feeding. 481 and 483.8. 8-116 K116sm8e5 .5 sec 0. 480 and 482.04mm/s 0.

485.484 to 489) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film of 30” size by cut sheet bypass feeding.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 484 485 486 487 488 489 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / film / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. 5. 486 and 488.8.04mm/second faster. 3rd in each Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0.04mm/s 0. 3rd in each Item No.5 second delayed. 2nd and 3rd Speed. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.92 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Film / 30”) (No. 487 and 489.04mm/s 0. 2nd.5 sec 0.5 sec 0. Item No. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 4.484. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 8-117 K116sm8e5 . Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.

93 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special plain paper / 30”) (No. 5. 2nd. 490 491 492 493 494 495 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special plain paper / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 40 0 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a plain paper (special media) of 30” size by cut sheet bypass feeding.5 sec 0. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 3rd in each Item No. Item No.490 to 495) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.5 sec You can specify the Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 3rd in each Item No. 2nd. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 492 and 494.5 sec 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 4.04mm/s 0.491.04mm/s 0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 8-118 K116sm8e5 .04mm/s 0.04mm/second faster. 493 and 495.8. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.5 second delayed.490.

94 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special tracing paper / 30”) (No. 5. 2nd.496.5 sec 0.5 second delayed. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed.497.8.502. Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings.04mm/s 0. It is also possible to specify when to switch the speed. 3rd in each Item No.04mm/s 0. 502 503 504 505 506 507 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special film / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. 2nd.5 sec You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed.95 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed for cut sheet paper (Special film / 30”) (No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.502 to 507) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st. 2nd. 496 497 498 499 500 501 Setting Item Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 1st Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 2nd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 3rd Speed (Cut sheet / special tracing / 30”) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 40 40 0 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 0 to 80 0 to 300 Step of increment 0.5 sec You can specify Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 2nd and 3rd Speed.5 sec 0. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a film (special media) of 30” size by cut sheet bypass feeding. 2nd. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 499 and 501. 3rd in each Item No.503.04mm/s 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed.5 sec 0. 505 and 507. the timing to switch the speed is 0. 2nd and 3rd Speed.04mm/second faster. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. each Fuser Motor Speed becomes 0. You can specify the switch timing to each Fuser Motor 1st Speed. 4.04mm/second faster. 5. 3rd in each Item No.04mm/s 0. the timing to switch the speed is 0. Item No. 498 and 500. 3rd in each Item No. 4. (Switch timing) These settings become effective when you use a tracing paper (special media) of 30” size by cut sheet bypass feeding. 8-119 K116sm8e5 . Please refer to the explanation on page 8-64 to 66 for the details of these settings. 8.04mm/s 0.496 to 501) It is possible to compensate the Fuser Motor speed specifying each Fuser Motor 1st.04mm/s 0. 504 and 506. Item No.5 sec 0.5 second delayed.

5. Item No. 508 509 510 Setting Item Default value US EUR/ A ASIA 4FF 4FF 4FF 4FF 4FF 4FF Setting range 0 to 9FE 0 to 9FE 0 to 9FE Step of increment - Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain) Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing) Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film) 8.04mm/s 0.97 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No. 514 515 516 Setting Item Default value USA EUR/ ASIA 13 17 19 19 0 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 Step of increment 0.04mm/s 0.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a print in some cases.511 to No. Item No. 4. 4.04mm/s Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Tracing) Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Film) 8-120 K116sm8e5 .511 to No.98 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 30mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No. 4. 5.514 to 516) It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 30mm end of a print. 5.508 to 510) It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 100mm end of a print. A setting combination among No.516 can reduce ghost images on the bottom area of a print in some cases. This section does not function and is reserved for future update.511 to 513) It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 70mm end of a print. Item No. 511 512 513 Setting Item Default value US EUR/ A ASIA 62F 62F 69F 69F 4FF 4FF Setting range 0 to 9FE 0 to 9FE 0 to 9FE Step of increment - Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain) Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing) Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film) 8.96 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain paper / Tracing paper / Film) (No.8. A setting combination among No.

Roll Width Standard Size Standard Cut Length 36" 841mm 34" 30" 728mm 24" 22" 594mm 18" 420mm 17" 15" 12" 11" 297mm (next page) 36"x48" A0 34"x44" 30"x42" B1 24"x36" 22"x34" A1 18"x24" A2 17"x22" 15"x21" 12"x18" 11"x17" A3 1219mm 1189mm 1118mm 1067mm 1030mm 914mm 864mm 841mm 610mm 594mm 559mm 533mm 457mm 432mm 420mm Judgement Value Additional Length No.613 No. Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 4-617 to 4-620 is not always provided.614 No.613 to 616) It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print. 613 614 615 616 Setting Item Judgement value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1) Judgement value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (24”/ 20”/ A1) Judgement value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2) Judgement value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting range 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20 1 to 20 Step of increment 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm Reference (1) Which Judgement Value / Additional Cut Length setting is applied to a non-standard size print depends on the corresponding roll width. Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 4-613 to 4-616 (Judgment value for “Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print”.619 No.99 Judgement value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (No. 5.616 No.618 No.) Item No. 4.615 No.617 No.8. by providing additional paper length by service modes 4-617 to 4-620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print).620 8-121 K116sm8e5 .

“C” is provided to the trailing edge of non-standard size print. A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width) B: Value of “Judgement Value for “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints” C: Value of “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints” <Example> Actual Image Length: 860mm A: 841mm (A1 roll width) B: 10 C: 20 A (841mm) B (10) Actual Image Length (860mm) Print Length (880mm) Actual Image Length (860mm) C (20) (3) If the actual image length is shorter than “A+B”.) A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width) B: Value of “Judgement Value for “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints” C: Value of “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints” <Example> Actual Image Length: 845mm A: 841mm (A1 roll width) B: 10 C: 20 A (841mm) Actual Image Length (845mm) B (10) Print Length (845mm) 8-122 K116sm8e5 . the print is cut as long as the actual image length. (“C” is not provided to the trailing edge of the print.Reference (2) If the actual image length is longer than (or equal to) “A+B”.

Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 4-613 to 4-616 (Judgment value for “Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print”. 101 Toner Supply Roller Bias (No. 5. by providing additional paper length by service modes 4-617 to 4-620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard size print). 102 Regulation Bias (No. 617 618 619 620 Setting Item Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (24”/ 22”/ A2) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2) Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting range 0 to 35 0 to 35 0 to 35 0 to 35 Step of increment 1mm 1mm 1mm 1mm Refer to page 8-121 and 122 for Additional Cut Length and its Judgement Value. 8-123 K116sm8e5 . 5. 8. Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 4-617 to 4-620 is not always provided. The print density becomes darker if you increase the setting value. 8.) Item No. Change of this setting has no effect on the machine operation. Default Value 270 Setting Range 0 to 800 Step of increment 1 NOTE Please adjust Regulation Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.617 to 620) It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print.8.100 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (No. 5. Default Value 286 Setting Range 0 to 800 Step of increment 1 NOTE This setting does not function.621) It is possible to make a bias adjustment for Toner Supply Roller.622) It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting Regulation Bias (Center). 4. 4. 4.

8. Default / Standard Output are used for a reference to measure density and self operation check only. 8. 4. 103 Density Sensor Default Output (No. Default / Standard Output are used for a reference to measure density and self operation check only.624) It is possible to change the standard output of Density Sensor on Density Measure. Default Value 0 Setting Range 0 to 614 Step of increment 1 NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted. Keep the value unchanged. 5. Default Output will be used for Density Value calculation. Standard Output will be used for Density Value calculation. Keep the value unchanged. 4.623) It is possible to change the default analog output of Density Sensor on Density Measure. 104 Density Sensor Standard Output (No. Default Value 0 Setting Range 0 to 614 Step of increment 1 NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted. 8-124 K116sm8e5 . 5.

Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special media / Film) (12” / 11” / A3) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 160 145 160 177 160 160 177 150 170 160 160 170 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment o 1C 1oC 1oC 1oC 1oC 1C o Reference The center part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print . 4.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print . 631 632 633 634 635 636 Setting Item Print .631 to 636) It is possible to adjust the side part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)] on page 8-53 for further information. 8.8. 625 626 627 628 629 630 Setting Item Print . 039 to 044) separately.4.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print . The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”.Fuser Temperature Center (No. Refer to [8.Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print . 4.Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Print . Refer to [8.Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (12”/11”/A3) (No.Fuser Temperature Center (No.Fuser Temperature Side (Tracingr) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .5. Item No. 8-125 K116sm8e5 . 105 Print .4.Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (12” / 11” / A3) Print .625 to 630) It is possible to adjust the side part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle. 5.5.Fuser Temperature Center (No.039 to 044)] on page 8-53 for further information. 039 to 044) separately.19 Print . You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately. You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately.19 Print . The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”. Item No.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 160 165 160 177 160 160 177 170 170 160 160 170 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment 1oC 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C o o o o o Reference The center part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print . 5. 106 Print .Fuser Temperature Side (18”/17”/15”/A2) (No.

637 to 648) It is possible to adjust the side part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle.Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .Fuser Temperature Center (No. 643 644 645 646 647 648 Setting Item Print . 108 Print . Item No. 4. 039 to 044) separately.Fuser Temperature Center (No. 8-126 K116sm8e5 .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .Fuser Temperature Side (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1) (No.Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .19 Print .Fuser Temperature Center (No. 5. You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately. 8.Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print . 039 to 044) separately.Fuser Temperature Side (24”/22”/A1) (No.4.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .643 to 648) It is possible to adjust the side part of Fuser Temperature in a print cycle. Item No.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 160 165 160 177 160 160 177 170 170 160 160 177 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment 1oC 1C 1C 1C 1C 1C o o o o o Reference The center part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print . The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. 637 638 639 640 641 642 Setting Item Print .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) (24” / 22” / A1) Print . Refer to [8.Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print . The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”.19 Print . You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately.Fuser Temperature Side (Specia / Film) (24” / 22” / A1) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 160 165 160 177 160 160 177 170 170 160 160 170 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment o 1C 1oC 1oC 1oC 1oC 1C o Reference The center part of Fuser Temperature will be controlled by Print .039 to 044)] on page 8-53 for further information. 107 Print . 5.Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Print .039 to 044)] on page 8-53 for further information.5.Fuser Temperature Side (Film) (24” / 22” / A1) Print .4.5.Fuser Temperature Center (No. Refer to [8.8.

Keep the value unchanged. 5.8. 4.5V higher. Default Value 1 Setting Range 0 to 4 NOTE This setting is factory-use only. Default Value 80 Setting Range 0 to 200 Step of increment 0. 110 Regulation Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3 (No. Keep the value unchanged. 5. 109 Density Sensor Output Information (No. The default voltage value of the increment is 40V (corresponding to “80” in the setting value) for switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3.5V NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted. A specified increment of Regulation Bias will be applied at switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2 and Level 3.650) It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Regulation Bias on Auto Adjustment. 4.649) It is possible to change the mode to monitor the default analog output of Density Sensor. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 8-127 K116sm8e5 . 8. the increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment becomes 0.

5V NOTE This setting can be used for checking purpose only. 8-128 K116sm8e5 .651) It is possible to check the total amount (increment) of currently applied Regulation Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation. Default Value 0 Setting Range 0 to 800 Step of increment 0. Keep the value unchanged. It is possible to add a 0. 111 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No. Setting change is allowed to factory-use only.8. 5.5V to the total amount of Regulation Roller Bias Adjustment directly. 4.

Auto Bias Adjustment: Developer Bias (No. 112 Density Compensation ON/OFF (No.657) and Regulation Bias (No.652) It is possible to decide whether Density Compnesation is enabled. 4. one of the Auto Adjustment Level listed below will be applied. Setting value 0 1 (default) Contents Density Compensation Process is disabled Density Compensation Process is enabled Reference Density Cpmpensation Process is performed as follows. 2. Default upon shipment Developer Bias (Negative) Regulation Bias against Developer Bias No Compensation Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 -180V -80V -180V remain default -230V -80V -230V -120V -230V -160V -80V remain default default state 0V Auto Adjustment Level 1 Auto Adjustment Level 2 Auto Adjustment Level 3 Density Measure canceled until reset -100V Developer Bias -180V (default) -180V to -230V 50V increment (No.650) 40V increment (No. 5. Density Threshold: If Density Value (calcurated based on Density Measure) falls short of the lower density limit (Minimum Density: No.650) -500V remain -160V until reset 8-129 K116sm8e5 . Once Level 3 is applied.622) -80V to -120V 40V increment -120V to -160V (No.8.655. 656).657) -200V remain -230V until reset -300V -400V Regulation Bias against Developer Bias -80V (default) (No. 1. Density Measure will remain canceled until reset in Clear Mode. 3.653). Density Measure: Several solid patches are created on Drum and are measured by Density Sensor at a regular interval of Main Motor operating time (No.650) will be adjusted based on the current Auto Adjustment Level.

Even if Developer / Blade Rollers are replaced. (2) While Density Value exceeds Minimum Density. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode] on page 8-160. still the current Auto Adjustment will continue to be applied. 8-130 K116sm8e5 . 10. (3) Auto Adjustment Level will not be reset to the previous level or to the default automatically at all.NOTE (1) Manual Switching of Auto Adjustment Level is not provided. Refer to [8. the current Compensation Level will remain. An applied Auto Adjustment Level should be reset after replacing Developer / Blade Rollers. 2.

When Bias 3 Time in Information Mode reaches a specified period in this setting. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 4. the interval of Density Measure becomes 1 hour longer. 4. which is the lower density limit. Default Value 500 Setting Range 160 to 800 Step of increment 1 NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted. Keep the value unchanged. Default Value 135 Setting Range 110 to 150 Step of increment 1 NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted. 8-131 K116sm8e5 .655. one of Auto Adjustment Level 1. 5. 5. (1) At the time if turning on the machine (2) After completion of the current print queue If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 8.654) It is possible to change the maximum of Regulation Bias. Keep the value unchanged.653) It is possible to change Minimum Density.622) and Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment (No. 8. 5. Minimum Density will rise and thus Auto Adjustment Level would be switched to the next level earlier.8. 115 Density Measure Interval (No. Regulation Bias cannot raise any more. 4. When the total value amount of Regulation Bias (No.641) reaches to the value of this setting. There are 2 kind of the trigger to check Bias 3 Time whether the period passes. 655 656 Setting Item Density Measure Interval at Power on Density Measure Interval at Print Completion Default Value 18 18 Setting range 1 to 100 1 to 100 Step of increment 1 hour 1 hour NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted. Item No. If Density Value falls short of Minimum Density. Level 2. 114 Regulation Bias Maximum (No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. 656) It is possible to change an interval of Density Measure. the maximum of Regulation Bias increases. 113 Minimum Density (No. Keep the value unchanged. Level 3 will be applied. Density Measure will run.

The increased Developer Bias will be applied to the subsequent Compensation Level. the increment of Developer Bias Adjustment becomes higher. 5. 8-132 K116sm8e5 . 4. 116 Developer Bias Increment for Auto Adjustment Level 1 and after (No. The default voltage value of the increment is 50V (corresponding to “80” in the setting value) for switching to Compensation Level 1. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. Keep the value unchanged.8.657) It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Developer Bias Adjustment. A specified increment of Developer Bias will be applied at switching to and as of Compensation Level 1. Default Value 158 Setting Range 0 to 400 Step of increment 1 NOTE This setting has been factory-adjusted.

118 Ready .666 to 671) It is possible to specify “Ready” temperature. Item No. The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”.Fuser Temperature Center (Plain) Ready .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Plain) Ready . 5.Fuser Temperature Side (Film) Ready . Item No.Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Plain) Ready .Temperature” (Example 160oC) 50 oC 0 Turn on Ready (Time) 8.660 to 665) It is possible to specify “Ready” temperature. The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”. in 10 minutes after reaching “Ready . You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately. You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately.Fuser Temperature Center (Film) Ready . 117 Ready .8. 4.Temperature”.Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Tracing) Ready .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Tracing) Ready . 5.Fuser Temperature Center (No. This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below at turning on the machine.Fuser Temperature Side (No.Fuser Temperature Side” reaches a given temperature.Fuser Temperature Side (Plain) Ready .Fuser Temperature Center (Tracing) Ready . 4.Fuser Temperature Side (Tracing) Ready .Fuser Temperature Center (Special / Film) Default value USA EUR/AS 160 160 160 170 177 177 160 160 160 177 160 170 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment o 1C o 1C 1oC 1oC 1oC 1C o Fuser Temperature Overshoot (+10oC against “Ready .Temperature”) (oC) Setting value of “Ready .Fuser Temperature Side (Special / Film) Default value USA EUR/AS 159 159 159 180 177 170 159 159 159 177 159 170 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment o 1C o 1C 1oC o 1C 1C 1C o o Note that the machine gets ready when “Ready . This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below at turning on the machine. 8-133 K116sm8e5 . 660 661 662 663 664 665 Setting Item Ready . 666 667 668 669 670 671 Setting Item Ready .

2.8.5. 4. Item No.4. 4. 8-134 K116sm8e5 .04mm/second faster.070 to 075)] on page 8-64 to 66 and the concerning pages for media type / size.04mm/s 0. 5. Please refer to [8.070 to 075)] on page 8-64 to 66 and the concerning pages for media type / size. 120 Compensation of Fuser Motor Speed 4 Fuser Motor Speed 4 is explained on Fuser Motor Speed 1.39 Compensation of Fuser Speed 1 (No. the motor speed becomes 0.04mm/s 8. 3 together. 5. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0. 2. 672 673 674 675 676 677 Setting Item Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Plain paper) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Tracing paper) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Film paper) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special plain paper) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special tracing paper) Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (Special film) Default value USA EUR/ASIA 50 50 57 50 40 40 40 60 50 40 40 40 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 Step of increment 0.39 Compensation of Fuser Speed 1 (No.04mm/s 0. 119 Fuser Motor Speed (18” / 17” / 15” / 12” / 11” / A2 / A3) (No. Please refer to [8. 5. 121 Switch Timing to Fuser Motor 4th Speed Switch timing of Fuser Motor Speed 4 is explained on Fuser Motor Speed 1.04mm/s 0. 4.4. 3 together. 8. 672 to 677) It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor for each type of paper separately.04mm/s 0.5.

the timing of Assist Fan off becomes 0. If you increase the setting value by “+1”.04mm/s 0.743 to 745) It is possible to adjust the speed of Fuser Motor driving on 100mm end of a print in 36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width. Item No. If you increase the setting value by “+1”. This setting is applied after the period Fuser Temperature Overshoot (+10oC against “Ready Temperature” in 10 minutes).04mm/s 8-135 K116sm8e5 .8. 124 Fuser Motor Speed applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (No. It is possible to change the timing of Assist Fan off.Temperature” (Example 155oC) 0 Turn on End of Overshoot period Standby (idling) (Time) 8.Fuser Temperature Side Default value USA EUR/ASIA 167 167 155 155 Setting range 120 to 180 120 to 180 Step of increment o 1C 1oC Fuser Temperature Overshoot (+10oC against “Ready . 4.Temperature”. in 10 minutes after reaching “Ready .04mm/s slower than the applied speed at that point. Item No. 739) It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature to be maintained during standby (idling time). 5.125 sec 0.Temperature”) (oC) Setting value of “Standby .Fuser Temperature Center Standby . 5. 122 Standby . 740 741 742 Setting Item Assist Fan Off Timing (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) Assist Fan Off Timing (24” / 22” / A1) Assist Fan Off Timing (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) Default value USA EUR/AS 8 4 8 4 8 6 Setting range 0 to 8 0 to 8 0 to 8 Step of increment 0. You can specify the temperature for the center and the sides separately.125 seconds later. Item No.Fuser Temperature (No. 123 Assist Fan Off Timing (No. The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”. 743 744 745 Setting Item Fuser Motor Spped applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (Plain) Fuser Motor Spped applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (Traceing) Fuser Motor Spped applied at 100mm from trailing edge (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1 width) (Film) Default value USA EUR/AS 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting range 0 to 80 0 to 80 0 to 80 Step of increment 0. 5.125 sec 8.04mm/s 0.740 to 742) Assist Fan stops at a regular period after the leading edge of a print of in 15” or wider reaches Registration Sensor. speed of Fuser Motor driving becomes 0. 4. 738 739 Setting Item Standby . 4.738.125 sec 0.

Dec k 1 Runn i ng (St ar t ) NOTE (1) You can not go to other sub modes of the Service Mode unless you cancel the Running Operation. 6. (2) Cut length and the image pattern rely on the settings specified in the Test Print Mode. But note that the printer continues printing endlessly.) 8. 6. In case the machine is provided with 2 Roll Decks. and the printer starts the printing operation. 3. 4.) “(Start)” is indicated when you start the Running Operation. Do not take the following operation because it is meaningless to do it in the field. (If you install any paper it is transported and ejected from the printer as usual. 2 Indication and Operation ( 5 ) Runn i ng Mode 1. and you can enter the Running Mode.8. Indicate “(5) Running Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 8. you can select either of them pressing the [ * ] Key. 8-136 K116sm8e6 . 2. Press the [ENTER] key. (This is called “Running Operation”. 1 Function In the Running Mode the machine takes usual printing operation even if no paper is installed. Dec k 1 Runn i ng ( Ready ) Dec k 2 Runn i ng ( Ready ) You can select Deck 1 and 2 alternately pressing the [ * ] Key. Press the [ENTER] key. 6 Running Mode (Factory Mode) NOTE The Running Mode is prepared for factory use.

Dec k 1 Runn i ng ( S t op ) Dec k 1 Runn i ng ( Ready ) NOTE “(-----)” is indicated if the Running Operation is not available. Press the [ENTER] key again to cancel the Running Operation. Any of paper jam. The indication changes to “(Stop)”.) 8-137 K116sm8e6 . 1.. error or warning condition occurs. Dec k 1 Runn i ng (. It will be indicated in the following cases.. Printer is not ready. and after that “(Ready)” is indicated when the Printing Operation has been completed..5. 2..

R1 Se t R: 0 Sens o r E: 0 D: 0 Status 8-138 K116sm8e6 . 1 Jam/Error Mask Mode Function If the printer has any paper jam or other error. 2. Press the [ENTER] key. and you can enter the Jam/Error Masking Mode. Indicate “(6) Mask Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. NOTE Masking condition will be cancelled if you cancel it manually in the Jam/Error Masking Mode or if you cancel the Service Mode. 8. 7 8. 2 Indication and Operation ( 6 )Mas k Mode 1. you can operate the printer as usual even if the cause of jam or error is not removed. The LCD indicates mask item (sensor name or error name) and status.8. Mask item . The jam or error is not detected when it is masked. it is possible to mask (ignore) it in the Jam/Error Masking Mode. 7. 7.

indicate the necessary mask item on the LCD. go to the following step 6.3. If you will mask any paper jam. R1 Se t R: 0 . Reg i s t Sens o r R: 0 D: 0 E: 0 Sens o r E: 0 D: 0 8-139 K116sm8e6 . (Example: You will mask the Registration Jam.) . press the [ENTER] Key several times to indicate the necessary mask item. Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. go to the following step 4. If you will mask any error. Mask item (Indication on the LCD) Paper jam R1 Set Sensor R2 Set Sensor Feed Sensor Regist Sensor Manual Sensor Sep Sensor Exit Sensor Error M Motor Error F Motor Error P Motor Error Dev Motor Error Counter Error 1st Error Tr Error AC Error Bias Error FPGA Error Contents of mask Roll Deck 1 Jam Roll Deck 2 Jam Feeding Jam Registration Jam Bypass Feeder Jam Internal Jam Fuser Jam Main Motor Error Fuser Motor Error Paper Feed Motor Error Developer Motor Error Counter Error Image Corona Output Error Transfer Corona Output Error Separation Corona Output Error Developer Bias Output Error FPGA Configuration Error 4. In case you will mask any paper jam.

and “1” means “masked”. . Reg i s t Sens o r R: 0 D: 0 E: 0 Press the [ENTER] key. M Mo t o r E r r o r D: 0 7. which can be masked separately. and you can mask the selected mask item. press the [ENTER] Key several times to indicate the necessary mask item. M Mo t o r E r r o r E r r o r Mas k NOTE You can cancel the mask condition if you press the [ENTER] Key once more.) . (Example: You will mask the Main Motor Error. M Mo t o r E r r o r .5. Each paper jam occurs being related with 3 factors such as R (Remain). 8-140 K116sm8e6 . R1 Se t R: 0 Sens o r E: 0 . . 6. Press the [ENTER] key. Press the [ENTER] Key several times until the necessary factor is masked. In case you will mask any error. Press the [ENTER] Key. Reg i s t Sens o r R: 0 D: 1 E: 0 The status of mask for the factor “D” (Delay) changes to 1 (masked). “Error Mask” will be indicated when the selected mask item is in the mask condition. . . The value “0” beside each factor means “not masked”. Reg i s t Sens o r R: 0 D: 0 E: 1 The status of mask for the factor “E” (Early) changes to 1 (masked). D (Delay) and E (Early arrival).

Press the [ENTER] key. 8. The image patterns printed in the Test Print Mode are memorized in the printer. 8 8. Indicate “(7) Test Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. 8. P r i n t e r Ready R1 : 36 R2 : 17 8-141 K116sm8e6 . 2 Indication and Operation ( 7 ) Te s t Mode 1. 2. and you can enter the Test Print Mode. 8. 1 Test Print Mode Function Test Print Mode is available to make the printer perform printing operation by all alone (no output device is connected).8.

Pape r L eng t h 36 x 1 Mirror Image Setting Mode . Dec k Se l ec t i on Ro l l 1 Negative/Positive Setting Mode . Ro l l 24 2 Si ze Image Pattern Setting Mode . R o l l 2 T y pe Pl a i n Manual Type Setting Mode . P r i n t Coun t 010 Cou n t Roll 2 Size Setting Mode . Please select the necessary Sub Item pressing [ ] and [ ] Keys. Image Pa t t e r n P( 0) S( 0) Roll 2 Type Setting Mode . Mi r r o r OFF Print Count Setting Mode . Nega / Pos i Pos i t i v e Paper Length Setting Mode .3. Please refer to the later pages as each Sub Mode is explained precisely. There are some kinds of Sub Item in the Test Print Mode. Sc a l e OFF Deck Selection Mode . Print Mode P r i n t e r Ready R1 : 36 R2 : 17 Scale Setting Mode . R o l l 1 T y pe Pl a i n 8-142 K116sm8e6 . Ro l l 36 1 Si ze Manual Size Setting Mode . Manua l 11 x 17 Si ze Roll 1 Type Setting Mode . Manua l Pl a i n T y pe Roll 1 Size Setting Mode .

“Printer stops. Select either “Roll 1” or “Roll 2” pressing the [ENTER] Key. “Warm Sleep”. Dec k Se l ec t i on Ro l l 1 . 2. Dec k Se l ec t i on Manua l 8-143 K116sm8e6 . you will find such indications as “Warming up”. “Cold Sleep” and so on according to the condition of printer. “Manual” is indicated in this case. (It becomes impossible to make Test Print with Roll 1 or Roll 2. 1 Print Start Mode Press the [ENTER] Key to start test printing. Dec k Se l ec t i on Ro l l 2 The Bypass Feeder is selected as the paper source automatically if only you set the cut sheet paper. 8. 8. .8.”. “Now Printing” is indicated during Test Print. 2. “Printing Stop” is indicated. 8. Now P r i n t i ng R1 : 36 R2 : 17 P r i n t i ng S t op R1 : 36 R2 : 17 NOTE In addition to the above indications.) . P r i n t e r Ready R1 : 36 R2 : 17 Now P r i n t i ng R1 : 36 R2 : 17 Press the [ENTER] key again if you want to stop the Test Print in the middle. 2 Deck Selection You can specify which paper source should be used for Test Print.

And change the magnification pressing the [ * ] Key. It will become A0 x 3 (3567mm) if you press twice. 2. 36. Pape r L eng t h 36 x 1 The setting value flashes. 42. 8-144 K116sm8e6 . 12. . Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. 8. 2. 24. A1. Metric : A0. 17.5 If you press the [ * ] key several times. Pape r L eng t h 24 x 2 NOTE Even if you specify a longer paper length than the maximum cut length. B3. B1. 3 Paper Length You can specify the paper length (cut length) of the Test Print. Pape r L eng t h 24 x 1 [ * ] Key . The setting value (“36x1” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. A4.8. B2. (For example the cut length becomes A0 x 2 (2378mm) if you press the [ * ] key once when A0 is selected. . you can magnify the standard size by the integral number. A2. 22. it is automatically corrected to the maximum cut length.) 3. The following standard paper lengths are selectable. (The maximum cut length relies on the paper size or the “maximum cut length” setting. A5. 11. 34. Change the paper length pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. A3. Pape r L eng t h 36 x 1 [ ] or [ ] Key . 18. and then press the [ENTER] key. 44. The setting value stops flashing when decided.) 1. Indicate “Paper Length” on the LCD. Pape r L eng t h 24 x 1 . 9 and 8. B4 and B5 Inch : 48.

Image Pa t t e r n P( 1) S( 0) Press and hold the [ * ]. Indicate “Print Count” on the LCD. and then press [ ] or [ ]. 2. and then press the [ENTER] key. 8. . Image Pa t t e r n P( 1) S( 0) [ ] or [ ] Key 3. P r i n t Coun t 024 Cou n t [ ] or [ ] Key 3. 4 Print Count It is possible to specify how many sheets of test print should be done. “P(X)” of the setting value means the Test Pattern Number Select the necessary Test Pattern Number pressing [ ] key or [ . 8. Image Pa t t e r n P( 1) S( 1) 4. The setting value stops flashing when decided. 8-145 K116sm8e6 . The setting value (“001 Count” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. and then press [ ] or [ ] Key to change the size. and then press the [ENTER] key. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. . P r i n t Coun t 001 Cou n t ] key or [ ] key. The setting value (“P(0) S(0)” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. Image Pa t t e r n P( 0) S( 0) The setting value flashes. 8. Image Pa t t e r n P( 0) S( 0) ] key. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. . 2. . . “S(X)” of the setting value means the size (enlargement or reduction of image pattern). 2. 2. 1. 5 Image Pattern You can choose which image pattern should be printed in the Test Print. Press and hold the [ * ] Key. . The setting value stops flashing when decided. 1.8. P r i n t Coun t 001 Cou n t The setting value flashes. Indicate “Image Pattern” on the LCD. Indicate the necessary print count pressing [ .

2 No.4 S(0) (solid white) No.4 S(1) (solid black) No.7 No.5 (halftone) No.3 No.8 S(f) 8-146 K116sm8e6 .1 No. No.Reference Examples of the test pattern images are shown below.

1. The setting value (“11x17” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. Pressing [ ] key or [ T y pe ] key. The setting value (“Plain” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. Indicate “Manual Type” on the LCD. 8-147 K116sm8e6 . Manua l Pl a i n T y pe The setting value flashes. The indication stops flashing when decided. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. [ ] or [ ] Key . 8. Indicate the same size with the used cut sheet paper pressing [ . and press the [ENTER] key. 7 Manual Size It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of cut sheet paper you will use. 2. Manua l 11 x 17 Si ze ] key or [ ] key. 2. Si ze [ ] or [ ] Key . 8. . Indicate “Manual Size” on the LCD. Manua l 11 x 17 Si ze The setting value flashes. 1. Manua l 18 x 12 3. The indication stops flashing when decided. . 2. and press the [ENTER] key. 6 Manual Type It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of cut sheet paper you will use. 8. indicate the type of the cut sheet paper you will use. 2. Manua l T y pe .8. Manua l Pl a i n T r a c i ng 3.

2. and press the [ENTER] key. [ ] or [ ] Key . . Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key. 9 Roll 1 Size It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of roll paper in the Roll Deck 1. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value (“36” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. Ro l l 36 1 Si ze ] key or [ ] key. 2. Indicate the same size with the roll paper in the Roll Deck 1 pressing [ . 2. Ro l l 36 1 Si ze The setting value flashes. Indicate either “Roll 1 Size” on the LCD. 8. 1. and press the [ENTER] key. Ro l l 24 1 Si ze 3. The setting value stops flashing when decided. 8-148 K116sm8e6 . . 8. 1. 2. The setting value (“Plain” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now.8. 8. R o l l 1 T y pe T r a c i ng 3. The indication stops flashing when decided. Indicate “Roll 1 Type” on the LCD. 8 Roll 1 Type It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of roll paper in the Roll Deck 1. R o l l 1 T y pe Pl a i n The setting value flashes. . Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. R o l l 1 T y pe Pl a i n [ ] or [ ] Key . indicate the type of the roll paper installed in the Roll 1.

R o l l 2 T y pe Pl a i n [ ] or [ ] Key . 2. 8. Indicate either “Roll 2 Size” on the LCD. The setting value (“36” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. The setting value stops flashing when decided. and press the [ENTER] key. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting.8. 8. 2. 8. R o l l 2 T y pe Pl a i n The setting value flashes. indicate the type of the roll paper installed in the Roll 2. Indicate “Roll 2 Type” on the LCD. 2 Si ze [ ] or [ ] Key . 2. Pressing [ ] key or [ ] key.10 Roll 2 Type It is possible to make the printer recognize the type of roll paper in the Roll Deck 2. and press the [ENTER] key. 1.11 Roll 2 Size It is possible to make the printer recognize the size of roll paper in the Roll Deck 2. Indicate the same size with the roll paper in the Roll Deck 2 pressing [ . The indication stops flashing when decided. R o l l 2 T y pe T r a c i ng 3. . Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value (“Plain” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. Ro l l 36 ] key or [ ] key. . 1. . Ro l l 36 2 Si ze The setting value flashes. 8-149 K116sm8e6 . 2. Ro l l 24 2 Si ze 3.

Nega / Pos i Pos i t i v e ] key or [ ] key. 2. 2. Mi r r o r OFF The setting value flashes.12 Mirror It is possible to print a mirror image. The setting value stops flashing when decided. .13 Nega/Posi It is possible to print a negative image. 2. . Indicate “Mirror” on the LCD. Mi r r o r OFF ] key or [ ] key. 1. 8. Nega / Pos i Pos i t i v e The setting value flashes. 1. and press the [ENTER] key. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. The setting value (“Positive” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now.8. Switch between ON and OFF pressing [ . and press the [ENTER] key. 8-150 K116sm8e6 . . 8. 8. Switch between Positive and Negative pressing [ . . Nega / Pos i Nega t i v e [ ] or [ ] Key 3. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. Indicate “Nega/Posi” on the LCD. The setting value stops flashing when decided. The setting value (“OFF” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. 2. Mi r r o r O N [ ] or [ ] Key 3.

2. 8-151 K116sm8e6 . . Sc a l e ON [ ] or [ ] Key 3. 1.8. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting.14 Scale It is possible to print an image of “scale” on the printed paper for measuring purpose. Sc a l e OFF ] key or [ ] key. Sc a l e OFF The setting value flashes. and press the [ENTER] key. . The setting value (“OFF” in this case) starts flashing showing that you can change the setting now. 2. The indication stops flashing when decided. 8. Indicate “Scale” on the LCD. Switch between ON and OFF pressing [ .

) [ ] or [ ] Key No02 T r Ou t pu t (. Also the Transfer Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating. Sub Mode No.. Sub Mode Name and the status. Sub Mode No. Drum rotates for 1 revolution. Select the necessary Sub Mode pressing [ ] key or [ ] key.. Density Sensor will be tested to check its detecting function of solid white / black. Indicate “(8) Factory Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. The followings are available operations.. 2 Indication and Operation ( 8 ) F ac t o r y Mode 1.) No00 Ma i n Mo t o r (. Density Sensor will be tested to check its standard output. and you can enter the Factory Adjustment Mode. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Available operation Main Motor rotates for 3 minutes. 9 8. Also the Image Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating. 9... (Example: You will make the Transfer Corona operate.) 8-152 K116sm8e6 . Drum rotates for 1 revolution.. 9. and then Bias is outputted for 3 minutes. The LCD indicates Sub Mode Number.. No00 Ma i n Mo t o r (. Density Sensor will check the 8...... Press the [ENTER] key. The machine makes the same operation with the normal printing. Main Motor rotates first. 1 Factory Adjustment Mode ( Factory Use Only ) Function This mode is used mainly in the Factory to adjust several units before shipment. Drum rotates for 1 revolution. 2.) Sub Mode Name Status 3.8. Also the Separation Corona takes discharging when the Drum is rotating.

Press the [ENTER] key again to stop the operation in the middle.) [ENTER] Key No02 T r Ou t pu t (St a r t ) 8-153 K116sm8e6 ... and the selected object starts operating.4.. “Start” is indicated when the selected object is operating. Press the [ENTER] key. No02 T r Ou t pu t (..

2 Indication and Operation ( 9 ) C l ea r Mode 1. and you can enter the Clear Mode. 2. You can clear the error caused by the problem of Fuser Unit. You can clear the record of errors memorized in the memory. You can input the value of Total Counter which is a kind of Software Counter. . RAM C l ea r 8-154 K116sm8e6 . Indicate “(9) Clear Mode” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] key. NOTE Record all the present data for the safety before you make RAM Clear.10. The following modes are available. 1 Clear Mode Function It is possible to clear several kinds of information. 8. You can clear the record of jams memorized in the memory.10. You can input the value of Software Counter. Press the [ENTER] key. Name of mode RAM Clear Mode Error Clear Mode Jam Record Clear Mode Error Record Clear Mode Software Counter Setting Mode Total Counter Setting Mode Density Compensation Reset Mode Contents You can initialize all settings of Adjustment Mode and some other initial information memorized in the RAM. You can reset the counter of Bias 3 Count (Main Motor operating time) and Developer / Regulation Bias to the default.8.10 8.

J am I n f o C l ea r C l ea r . RAM C l ea r . Please read the later pages for the explanation about each mode. Select any subordinate mode pressing [ ] key or [ ] key.000 . . B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 8-155 K116sm8e6 .3. E r r o r C l ea r E. To t a l Coun t 0001720 . Er r o r C l ea r I n f o Cl r . Pr i n t Coun t 0001154 .

8-156 K116sm8e6 . 2 Error Clear Mode You can clear the error caused by the problem of Fuser Unit. Ini t ial s t at e 8. E r r o r C l ea r E. plot and scan unless you clear it in the Error Clear Mode! If the Fuser has any error. To make Error Clear. and then press the [ENTER] Key. and then press the [ENTER]. 1 RAM Clear Mode You can initialize all setting values of Adjustment Mode and some other initial information memorized in the RAM. and then press the [ENTER]. . RAM C l ea r Press and hold the [ * ]. please wait until the Fuser is enough cooled down. 2. its error code is indicated in the LCD. . press and hold the [ * ] Key.10. E-000: Fuser Temperature Rising Error 1 E-001: Fuser Over Temperature Error E-002: Fuser Temperature Rising Error 2 E-003: Fuser Low Temperature Error 1 E-004: Fuser Low Temperature Error 2 Once anyone of the above occurs.8. press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key. and you can cancel the Service Mode. E r r o r C l ea r NOTE Before you make Error Clear. 2. Press any key after the RAM Clear. . NOTE The followings are possible errors caused by the problem of Fuser Unit. To make RAM Clear. “Initial state” is indicated after the clearance.000 Press and hold the [ * ]. No error code will be indicated after the Error Clear. it is impossible to make copy.10.

22 (Jam Info) of the Information Mode. 3 Jam History Clear Mode You can clear the record of jams memorized in the memory. . 4 Error History Clear Mode You can clear the record of errors memorized in the memory. 2. Er r o r I n f o Cl r No error code will be indicated in the No. .8. 2. Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to clear the history of jams. 8. J am I n f o C l ea r No jam code will be indicated in the No. “Clear” is indicated on the LCD before the clearance. 8-157 K116sm8e6 . . Er r o r C l ea r I n f o Cl r Press and hold the [ * ]. “Clear” is indicated on the LCD before the clearance. “Clear” disappears from the LCD after the clearance.23 (Error Info) of the Information Mode. . “Clear” disappears from the LCD after the clearance.10. Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to clear the history of errors. and then press the [ENTER]. and then press the [ENTER].10. J am I n f o C l ea r C l ea r Press and hold the [ * ].

In this case set the value in this mode. 5 Software Counter Setting Mode You can input the value of Software Counter. 0001154 0001150 3. The 1st digit of the counted value starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it. 8-158 K116sm8e6 . . one more upper digit flashes. These are displayed in the UI. Pr i n t Coun t Press [ ] or [ ] Key. Pr i n t . NOTE The KIP3100 has a Software Counter which was synchronized with the Hardware Counter. If you press the [ * ] Key. Indicate the Software Counter Setting Mode. Pr i n t Coun t Press the [ * ] Key. Change the value in the same way.8. It is not necessary to change the value unless the PW10520 PCB is replaced or value lost to reset. The indication stops flashing when decided. Pr i n t Coun t 0001154 0001154 2. Pr i n t Coun t ] key or [ ] key. . and then press the [ENTER] Key. 2. . Pr i n t Coun t Press the [ENTER] Key. Coun t 0001150 0001150 4.10. Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. Change the setting value pressing [ . 1. .

. 0001720 0001720 2. The 1st digit of the counted value starts flashing and it becomes possible to change it.10.8. If you press the [ * ] Key. Indicate the Total Counter Setting Mode. 6 Total Counter Setting Mode You can input the value of Total Counter which is a kind of Software Counter. NOTE The counting unit of Total Counter is always “linear meter”. To t a l Coun t . To t a l Coun t . To t a l Coun t 0001723 Press the [ * ] Key. 1. . 0001723 3. To t a l Coun t ] key or [ ] key. 0001723 4. To t a l Coun t Press the [ENTER] Key. Note that you can not change it. 2. one more upper digit flashes. Change the value in the same way. 8-159 K116sm8e6 . Press the [ENTER] key to decide the setting. and then press the [ENTER] Key. . The indication stops flashing when decided. To t a l Coun t 0001720 Press [ ] or [ ] Key. Change the setting value pressing [ .

10. and then press the [ENTER]. “Clear” is indicated on the LCD before the clearance. Press and hold the [ * ] key and then press the [ENTER] key to reset the above settings. This reset function will be used at the time of replacing Developer Roller. B i a s3 Coun t C l r C l ea r 03 Press and hold the [ * ]. 7 Density Compensation Reset Mode You can reset the current change based on Density Compensation (the counter of Density Measure Interval. “Clear” and the digits (if shown) disappear from the LCD after the clearance. Developer / Regulation Bias Adjustment) to the default.8. 2. . . The 2 digits in the lower row show an applied Compensation Level. B i a s3 Coun t C l r 8-160 K116sm8e6 .

NOTE It is impossible to select the sub mode if the key operation is locked. 2 Selecting each sub mode 1. You can unlock the key operation of Sub UI by this operation.8. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Status Indication (Normal Mode) Deck Information Mode Setting Mode 1 Setting Mode 2 Command Mode 8. The name of selected sub mode is indicated on the LCD.11 User Mode 8. Confirm that the machine is OFF. Status Indication (Normal Mode) P r i n t e r Ready R1 : 36 Press [MENU] key Deck Information Mode ( 1 ) Dec k Inf o Press [MENU] key Command Mode ( 4 ) Com mand Press [MENU] key Setting Mode 1 ( 2 ) Se t t i ng Mode1 Press [MENU] key Setting Mode 2 ( 3 ) Se t t i ng Mode2 Press [MENU] key 8-161 K116sm8e6 . so it becomes possible to select each sub mode of the User Mode. Then turn on the machine while pressing the [MENU] Key. 2. 1 Construction of the User Mode The User Mode consists of following 5 sub modes.11.11. Select each sub mode pressing the [MENU] key.

Printer is ready for printing. The following list shows the possible indication and the status of printer.11. P r i n t e r Ready R1 : 36 Printer is now on printing. Now P r i n t i n g R1 : 36 Printing is stopped in the middle. Pr i n t R1 : 3 6 S t o ppe d Printer is stopped by some abnormal condition.8. War m S l eep R1 : 36 Printer is in the Cold Sleep. LCD Indication Wa r mi n g u p R1 : 3 6 Status of printer Printer is in warming up. 8-162 K116sm8e6 . 3 Status Indication (Normal Mode) Normally the LCD indicates the status of printer. Pr i n t e r S t op R1 : 36 Printer is in the Warm Sleep.

4. ( 1 ) Dec k Info [ENTER] Key Ro l l 1 S i z e 36 3. 4. 1 Function It is possible to indicate the information about the roll paper (size. 2 Indication and Operation 1. and you can check that of Roll 2 when “Roll 2 Size” is indicated.11. Ro l l 1 S i z e 36 Ro l l 2 S i z e 36 [ ] and [ ] Keys Roll 1 information Roll 2 information NOTE You can indicate “Roll 2 Size” only when the machine is equipped with the Roll Deck 2. 8. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Deck Information Mode. Indicate “(1) Deck Info” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] Key. If you press [ ] and [ ] Keys. So select either Roll Deck of which information you will check. 4 Deck Information Mode 8. ( 1 ) Dec k Inf o 2. type and remaining level). 8-163 K116sm8e6 .8. you can indicate either “Roll 1 Size” or “Roll 2 Size” on the LCD. You check the information about the Roll1 when “Roll 1 Size” is indicated.11.11.

Ro l l 1 Paper Emp t y 8-164 K116sm8e6 . Machine is checking the paper. After selecting the Roll Deck. press the [ * ] key several times to indicate the information about the selected Roll Deck.4. The LCD indicates “Size (Width)”. Ro l l 1 S i z e 36 Press [ * ] key Ro l l 1 T y p e Plai n Press [ * ] key Ro l l 1 Rema i n 75% Press [ * ] key Reference (1) Each indication in “Roll Remain” means as follows. 100% From 100 to 75% 75% From 75 to 50% 50% From 50 to 10% 10% Smaller than 10% (2) The following messages are also indicated according to the situation. Ro l l 1 Pape r Chec k Selected roll paper is empty. “Type” and “Remain (Remaining level of roll)” orderly whenever you press the [ * ] Key.

Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 1. 5 Setting Mode 1 8.11. 1 Function This is a setting mode to make the machine recognize the size and the type of roll paper. ( 2 ) Se t t i ng Mode1 Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n [ENTER] Key 3. 2 Indication and Operation (1) Roll type setting 1. which you can specify for each Roll Deck 1 and 2 respectively.11.11. The LCD initially indicates “Roll 1 Type”. There are 2 setting items “Roll Type” and “Roll Size” in the Setting Mode. Indicate “(2) Setting Mode 1” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] Key. 8. indicate either “Roll 1 Type” or “Roll 2 Type” pressing the [ ] key and [ ] key. 5. Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n Ro l l 1 S i z e 36 [ Ro l l 2 T y p e Pl ai n ] key and [ ] key Ro l l 2 S i z e 36 8-165 K116sm8e6 . To specify the type of roll paper. ( 2 ) Se t t i ng Mode1 2. 5.8.

It means the special paper. Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n [ENTER] Key Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n 5. select the type of the roll paper installed on the Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n [ ] and [ ] Keys Ro l l 1 Ty p e T r ac i ng NOTE “1” is indicated after the paper type if you press the [ * ] Key at this time.) Ro l l 1 Ty p e T r ac i ng 1 6. Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the setting. Pressing the [ ] and [ concerning Roll Deck. Ro l l 1 Ty p e T r ac i ng [ENTER] Key Ro l l 1 Ty p e T r ac i ng 8-166 K116sm8e6 .4. (Tracing 1 in this example means “Tracing paper of special paper”. ] Keys. The selected setting (“Tracing” in this example) stops flashing when decided. which means now you can change the setting. The paper type indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the paper type.

( 2 ) Se t t i ng Mode1 2. The LCD initially indicates “Roll 1 Type”. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 1.(2) Size setting 1. indicate either “Roll 1 Size” or “Roll 2 Size” pressing the [ ] key and [ ] key. Indicate “(2) Setting Mode 1” on the LCD pressing the [MENU] Key. Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n Ro l l 1 S i z e 36 [ Ro l l 2 T y p e Pl ai n ] key and [ ] key Ro l l 2 S i z e 36 4. To specify the size of roll paper. which means now you can change the setting. There are 2 setting items “Roll Type” and “Roll Size” in the Setting Mode. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the size setting. ( 2 ) Se t t i ng Mode1 Ro l l 1 T y p e Pl ai n [ENTER] Key 3. Ro l l 2 S i z e 36 [ENTER] Key Ro l l 2 S i z e 36 8-167 K116sm8e6 . which you can specify for each Roll Deck 1 and 2 respectively. The size indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing.

select the size of the roll paper installed on the concerning Ro l l 2 S i z e 36 [ ] and [ ] Keys Ro l l 2 S i z e 24 6. The selected setting (“24” in this example) stops flashing when decided. Ro l l 2 S i z e 24 Ro l l 2 S i z e 24 [ENTER] Key 8-168 K116sm8e6 . Pressing the [ Roll Deck. Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the setting.5. ] and [ ] Keys.

8.11.11. 1 Function It is possible to validate several power saving functions or to change its timer setting. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Setting Mode 2. 2 Indication and Operation (1) Selection of each Sub Mode 1. 6 Setting Mode 2 8. . The LCD initially indicates “Warm Sleep”. 6. ( 3 ) Se t t i ng Mode2 2.11. Press the [MENU] key to indicate “(3) Setting Mode 2”. 6.8. Wa r m S l eep OFF 8-169 K116sm8e6 . Also it is possible to validate several functions related with image process.

Wa rm S l eep T i me 10mi n . . TR As s i s t L ED OFF 8-170 K116sm8e6 . Smoo t h i ng OFF . Co l d S l eep OFF . Powe r Of f 10mi n T i me .3. Wa r m S l eep OFF [ ] and [ ] Keys . As there are 10 Sub Modes in the Setting Mode 2. L ow Temp Mo d e OFF . select the necessary one pressing the [ ] and [ ] Key. Enhanc e OFF . Fu l l OFF I mage Mode . Au t o Powe r O f f OFF . Co l d S l eep T i me 10mi n .

(You can set the timer of the Warm Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode. Select “Warm Sleep” in the Setting Mode 2. (Print starts when the KIP 3100 gets ready. However. The Warm Sleep Mode will work if you select “ON”. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100 is ready.170 degrees Centigrade. But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time. . (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it.) The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device.) . it is better for saving the power to fall down the temperature of heater. please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 .) 1. Wa r m S l eep OFF . Wa r m S l eep ON [ENTER] Key 8-171 K116sm8e6 .(2) ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode It is possible to validate the Warm Sleep Mode which is a kind of power saving function.) Reference The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the temperature of heater some degrees. Wa r m S l eep OFF 2. Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key. (Temperature is kept about 100 degrees Centigrade. Refer to [(3) Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode] on the page 8-172.

. However. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100 is ready. Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys.) Reference The purpose of Warm Sleep Mode is to reduce the power consumption by falling down the temperature of heater some degrees. (It is necessary to validate the Warm Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it. (Temperature is kept about 100 degrees Centigrade.) 1. please understand it takes some minutes to recover from the Warm Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 . Select “Warm Sleep Time” in the Setting Mode 2. Refer to [(2) ON / OFF setting of Warm Sleep Mode] on the page 8-173.) .Wa rm S l eep T i me 10mi n 2.Wa rm S l eep T i me 10mi n . The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours. The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing.170 degrees Centigrade.) The Warm Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. If the KIP3100 receives no job for the time you have specified here. the Warm Sleep Mode works.Wa rm S l eep T i me 50mi n [ENTER] Key 8-172 K116sm8e6 . (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. it is better for saving the power to fall down the temperature of heater.Wa rm S l eep T i me 50mi n [ ] and [ ] Keys 4.Wa rm S l eep T i me 50mi n . Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting. . (Print starts when the KIP 3100 gets ready. which means now you can change the setting.Wa rm S l eep T i me 10mi n [ENTER] Key 3. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting.Wa rm S l eep T i me 10mi n . The timer value stops flashing when decided.(3) Timer setting of Warm Sleep Mode It is possible to set a timer of the Warm Sleep Mode. But if no print job or copy job is sent for a long time. .

However.) 1. . Co l d S l eep OFF . Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key.170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100 is ready.) . The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 . Co l d S l eep OFF 2. The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. it is the best way for saving the power to stop supplying the power to the heater unit completely. Select “Cold Sleep” in the Setting Mode 2. The Cold Sleep Mode will work if you select “ON”. Co l d S l eep ON [ENTER] Key 8-173 K116sm8e6 .(4) ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode It is possible to validate the Cold Sleep Mode which is a kind of power saving function. It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode. Refer to [(5) Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode] on the page 8-174.) Reference The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is not to consume as much power as possible by shutting off supplying the power to the heater unit. please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade. (Print starts when the KIP 3100 gets ready. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. But if the KIP3100 does not receive any print job or copy job for a long time. (You can set the timer of the Cold Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode.

170 degrees Centigrade when the KIP3100 is ready. which means now you can change the setting. Co l d S l eep T i me 50mi n [ ] and [ ] Keys 4. It can save more power than Warm Sleep Mode. Co l d S l eep T i me 10mi n [ENTER] Key 3. Co l d S l eep T i me 10mi n . (Print starts when the KIP 3100 gets ready. But if the KIP3100 does not receive any print job or copy job for a long time. However. . please understand it takes a little long time to recover from the Cold Sleep Mode because it is necessary to raise the temperature again up to about 160 -170 degrees Centigrade. Co l d S l eep T i me 10mi n 2. the Cold Sleep Mode works. The temperature of the heater unit is about 160 .(5) Timer setting of Cold Sleep Mode It is possible to set a timer of the Cold Sleep Mode. The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours. If the KIP3100 receives no job for the time you have specified here. Select “Cold Sleep Time” in the Setting Mode 2.) 1. Co l d S l eep T i me 10mi n . Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting. Refer to [(4) ON / OFF setting of Cold Sleep Mode] on the page 8-173. . The Cold Sleep Mode will be cancelled automatically if only you send a print job or a copy job from the outer device. Co l d S l eep T i me 50mi n [ENTER] Key 8-174 K116sm8e6 . (It is necessary to validate the Cold Sleep Mode in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it.) .) Reference The purpose of Cold Sleep Mode is not to consume as much power as possible by shutting off supplying the power to the heater unit. . Co l d S l eep T i me 50mi n . (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys. Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting. The timer value stops flashing when decided. it is the best way for saving the power to stop supplying the power to the heater unit completely. The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing.

(You can set the timer of the Auto Power OFF in another Sub Mode. If the KIP3100 is turned off by the Auto Power OFF. Select “Auto Power Off” in the Setting Mode 2. Au t o Powe r O f f OFF . Au t o Powe r O f f OFF 2.) .) 1. Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key.) Reference The Auto Power OFF is the function to switch off the KIP3100 automatically if no print job or copy job is sent for the time you have specified in advance (timer). Refer to [(7) Timer setting of Auto Power OFF] on the page 8-176. the operator needs to turn it on again pressing the Power Switch. (It is impossible to turn it on automatically. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it.(6) ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF It is possible to validate the Auto Power OFF which is a kind of power saving function. The Auto Power OFF will work if you select “ON”. . Au t o Powe r O f f ON [ENTER] Key 8-175 K116sm8e6 .

Powe r Of f 10mi n T i me . Press the [ENTER] Key when you will change the timer setting. Powe r Of f 50mi n T i me . Powe r Of f 50mi n T i me [ ] and [ ] Keys 4. Powe r Of f 10mi n T i me [ENTER] Key T i me 3. the Auto Power OFF works. Change the timer value pressing the [ ] and [ ] Keys.) 1. Powe r Of f 10mi n T i me 2. Powe r Of f 10mi n . If the KIP3100 is turned off by the Auto Power OFF the operator needs to turn it on again pressing the Power Switch. The timer value stops flashing when decided. Refer to [(6) ON / OFF setting of Auto Power OFF] on the page 8-175. The value indicated on the 2nd line starts flashing. The setting range is from 10 minutes to 4 hours. Powe r Of f 50mi n T i me [ENTER] Key 8-176 K116sm8e6 . Press the [ENTER] Key finally to decide the timer setting. (It is impossible to turn it on automatically. Select “Power Off Time” in the Setting Mode 2. .(7) Timer setting of Auto Power OFF It is possible to set a timer of the Auto Power OFF. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. If the KIP3100 receives no job for the time you have specified here. . (It is necessary to validate the Auto Power OFF in another Sub Mode if you would like to work it.) Reference The Auto Power OFF is the function to switch off the KIP 3100 automatically if no print job or copy job is sent for the time you have specified in advance (timer). which means now you can change the setting.) . .

Reference There may be the case that the print image looks so light (not so clear) although the density setting is proper or higher than required. TR As s i s t L ED OFF 2.) . . Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key. Refer to [8.) NOTE You can specify to which type of paper the Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) should work. 1. Select “TR Assist LED” in the Setting Mode 2. (Image looks clear with enough density. It can be specified in the Service Mode. The Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) is the solution for this kind of problem as it helps to transfer the toner image. TR As s i s t L ED OFF . it is possible to make the Transfer Assist LED (Separation Lamp) work.38 Operation of Separation Lamp (No. The Transfer Assist LED will work if you select “ON”.) Transfer Assist LED is ON. (Image looks not so clear. Try to make it work if you feel the print image is so light. 4. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. TR As s i s t L ED ON [ENTER] Key 8-177 K116sm8e6 .(8) Transfer Assist setting To print the image clearer. This kind of problem may occur when the used printing paper is special. 5. because it is difficult to transfer the toner image fully onto it.067)] on the page 8-63. Transfer Assist LED is OFF.

Reference A diagonal line tends to look weaker than vertical one or horizontal one.(9) Smoothing setting It is possible to validate the Smoothing function which makes a diagonal line look clearer. Select “Smoothing” in the Setting Mode 2. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. The Smoothing function is validated if you select “ON”.) Smoothing function is ON.) . Smoo t h i ng OFF [ENTER] Key . .) 1. Smoo t h i ng OFF 2. (Diagonal line looks so weak. Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key. Smoo t h i ng ON 8-178 K116sm8e6 . The Smoothing function emphasizes the diagonal one so that it becomes as clear as vertical and horizontal ones. (Diagonal line looks clear. Smoothing function is OFF.

) Dot Enhancement function is ON. 1.25 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) (No. At this time the Level (degree) of Dot Enhancement Function relies on the setting in the Service Mode. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. 5.052)] on the page 8-57 for this setting. . (Diagonal line looks clear. Enhanc e ON [ENTER] Key 8-179 K116sm8e6 .) NOTE The Dot Enhancement function is validated if you select ON in the User Mode. The Dot Enhancement function is validated if you select “ON”. Enhanc e OFF . Reference An isolated dot image tends to look so weak. Select “Enhance” in the Setting Mode 2.) Dot Enhancement function is OFF. It will not emphasize the dots coming together some degree.) . The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear. (Diagonal line looks so weak. 4.(10) Dot Enhancement ON/OFF setting It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer. Enhanc e OFF 2. Refer to [8. (Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key.

The Full Image Mode is validated if you select “ON”. Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key. (Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. Fu l l OFF I mage Mode .(11) Full Image Mode setting Full Image Mode can be validated. . Select “Full Image Mode” in the Setting Mode 2.) . (Print is provided with trailing margin. Full Image Mode is OFF. because it requires a cleaning operation between each sheet. Fu l l ON I mage Mode [ENTER] Key 8-180 K116sm8e6 . (No trailing margin is provided.) NOTE The interval between each sheet of print becomes longer than usual if you validate the Full Image Mode.) Full Image Mode is OFF. Fu l l OFF I mage Mode 2. 1. Reference Usually each print is compulsively provided with a trailing margin of 3mm long regardless of the image size. which makes it possible to print the image in the trailing margin area. But the image can be printed even in the trailing margin area if you validate the Full Image Mode.

(Refer to [(1) Selection of each Sub Mode] on the page 8-169 how to select it. (Setting temperature plus 10 degrees is kept during this period. Reference The toner image may not be fixed firmly onto the paper if you make a copy or plot right after turning on the machine (in the morning especially) in very cold environment. Select “Low Temp Mode” in the Setting Mode 2. it is heated up to 180 degrees. . 2. The Full Image Mode is validated if you select “ON”. L ow Temp Mo d e ON [ENTER] Key 8-181 K116sm8e6 . 1. It works as follows. But it is possible to avoid this kind of fusing problem by the Low Temperature Mode.) 4. L ow Temp Mo d e OFF .(12) Low Temperature Mode setting Low Temperature Mode can be validated to secure the fusing quality in the cold environment. When 360 seconds has passed. The Fuser Roller is heated up to 10 degrees higher than the setting temperature.) . the machine gets ready. (If the setting temperature is 170 degrees. Switch between “ON” and “OFF” pressing the [ENTER] Key. Instead of that the Fuser Roller continues rotating for 360 seconds.) 3. the Low Temperature Mode is validated. 1. If both the center and sides of the Fuser Roller are colder than 30 degrees centigrade when you turn on the machine (or when you cancel the Sleep Mode). L ow Temp Mo d e OFF 2. The machine does not get ready even if the Fuser Roller is heated up to 10 degrees higher than the setting temperature.

the KIP 3100 has a convenient function called “Initial Cut”. ( 4 ) Command 2.11. The LCD indicates “Initial Cut”.11. The leading edge of that roll media is straight after the Initial Cut. Press the [MENU] key to indicate “(4) Command”. 2 Indication and Operation 1. 7. Ini t i al Ro l l Cu t 1 ( Ready ) 8-182 K116sm8e6 . 7.8. To straighten the leading edge easily. . If you select one roll media and make the Initial Cut. Reference The leading edge of the new roll media may be rough or folded.11. the leading part (210mm from the leading edge) of roll media is cut off. 8. Press the [ENTER] key to enter the Command Mode. 7 Command Mode 8. 1 Function This is a mode to make Initial Cut for the roll media.

Ini t i al Ro l l Cu t 2 ( Ready ) 4. Ini t i al Ro l l Cu t .. Pressing the [ * ] Key.) 8-183 K116sm8e6 ..3.. Ini t i al Ro l l Cu t 1 ( Ready ) [ * ] Key .-)” is it is impossible to make Initial Cut by some reason like an error of machine. . Ini t i al Ro l l Cu t 2 (.. select either “Roll 1” or “Roll 2” to which you will make Initial Cut. . . The LCD indicates “(Start)” during the Initial Cut. Press the [ENTER] Key to make Initial Cut.... Ini t i al Ro l l Cu t [ENTER] Key 1 ( Ready ) 1 (St a r t ) NOTE The LCD indicates “(.

12 KIP Scanner Utility 8. remove 4 screws (2) to remove Cover 10 (3). 12. Loosen 4 screws (1). 12. 1 Installing USB Driver 1.0 support 8. 1. 2 3 1 2. 1 Installation NOTE Below are the system requirements to operate KIP Scanner Utility. 4 4 8-184 K116sm8e7 . • Windows 2000 / XP operating system • USB 2. Disconnect the USB Cable (4). and connect it to the USB Terminal to your service PC.8.

5. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive. 8-185 K116sm8e7 . [Found New Hardware Wizard] for “KIP K116” starts automatically. If the following message appears. Click [Next]. select your driver update option and click [Next]. Choose “Search for a suitable driver for my device [recommended]”. 4.3. Turn on both your PC and the KIP 3100.

Click [Continue Anyway] when the following message is indicated. 7.6. 8-186 K116sm8e7 . Open Device Manager. Click [Finish] to close [Found New Hardware Wizard]. and confirm that “KIP K116” is operating properly. 8.

3.EXE for KIP Scanner Utility. 8-187 K116sm8e7 . 2. Click [Next]. Click [Next]. The Setup program starts. 12.8. 2 Installing KIP Scanner Utility 1. 1. Set Technical CD-ROM to your optical disk drive Locate and run SETUP. The destination of the software can be changed.

5. The name of the program folder can be changed.4. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. 8-188 K116sm8e7 . Click [Finish]. Click [Next].

8. 12. 2 Starting KIP Scanner Utility Start KIP Scanner Utility by. “Start” _”Program” _ “ScannerUtility” _ “ScannerUtility” (KIP Scanner Utility’s initial screen) NOTE To use the entire adjustment menu. “(one byte space)/Maintenance” 8-189 K116sm8e7 . (A command line option switch to be set.) (1) Open the properties panel for KIP Scanner Utility shortcut. follow the instruction below. (2) Add the following text to the end of the target path.

12. 1.8. Select [Information] under [Scanner]. 8-190 K116sm8e7 . 2. 3 Displaying Scanner Information It is possible to display the scanner information in the following way. KIP Scanner Utility acquires the scanner information and displays it.

As a result the even level of input can be expected from every pixel after Shading. 4 Scanner Adjustment It is possible to make the following scanner adjustment with KIP Scanner Utility. color evenness and accuracy can be expected. 1 Shading (calibration) [Purpose of Shading (calibration)] There are 2 main purposes for Shading (“white balance”/ “color” calibration). (1) CIS (2) CIS Controller Board (3) Data Controller Board 8-191 K116sm8e8 .8. 1. 4. [Necessary situation] Shading is required when. As a result. 12. Shading Sheet White Area Black Area This compensates the input (color density) from each pixel properly among the pixels. And once performed Shading. • Shading (calibration) • Feed Distance (1:1) • Position (stitching) These adjustments are very important because they are greatly related with the image quality. Original (even density) Dark Dark Light Before Shading (Uneven inputs) Light After Shading (Even inputs) 2. “Color” Calibration The pixels on the CIS will be calibrated in the default color reading for R/G/B by using input gaps between black and white on Shading Sheet. 12. “white balance” / “color” calibration will be done at the same time. But the Shading compensates the input from each pixel properly to remove the unevenness among the pixels. “White Balance” Calibration The pixels on the CIS are not same but they have their own characteristic. 8. • Machine installation • After replacing. This may be a problem because the inputs (density) from those pixels are uneven although they read the same image (density).

Select [All] and then click [Execute]. You will be asked to set Shading Sheet. 1 sheet of Shading Sheet is included in the KIP 3100 accessary. 4. 3. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable. 2. (2) Shading adjustment should be performed with “KIP Scanner Utility 1. Select [Calibration] under [Adjust]. At first it is required to calibrate all pixels.12 (or later)”. [Operation] 1. Keep it in safe custody.NOTE (1) Shading adjustment should be performed with Shading Sheet (P/N: Z168300570). Start KIP Scanner Utility. 8-192 K116sm8e8 .

and the scanner reads it. fold or tear. Keep it in safe custody for avoiding dirt. 6. 7. click [OK]. 8-193 K116sm8e8 . When finished scanning. NOTE “White Balance” / “Color” calibration will be performed at the same time with Shading Sheet. Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet. Set Shading Sheet in the KIP 3100 accessory to the scanner noting the arrow direction.5. NOTE Handle Shading Sheet with great care. It takes 10 minutes or more to complete. Reload Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [Confirm] to check the result of Shading.

The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed. If the density is even at every place. There may be some place of which density is different from others as the following image. finish Shading clicking [Close]. Scan image of Shading Sheet 9. As this pixel is “defective”.8. check whether the density is even or not. Scrolling the image horizontally. Defective pixel 8-194 K116sm8e8 . it is necessary to calibrate it individually in the next step.

NOTE Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image. red cross cursor defective pixel 8-195 K116sm8e8 . This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks. and you will find a kind of red cursor. 11. If you will calibrate an individual pixel. select [Specified part]. Move the pointer onto the scan image. 10.

12. Click [Execute]. and the selected “defective pixel” is compensated individually. Match the vertical line to a defective pixel. 8-196 K116sm8e8 . Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it. 14. The defective pixel is selected by this operation. 13. 15. Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK]. click [Close]. If there are some more defective pixels. When finished. You will be asked to set the original again. Check the result of Shading again. select them in the same way. Shading (“white balance” / “color” calibration) is completed.

It compares the actual original image and the scan image to know how much their lengths are different. • After replacing. (Please record the current setting value before the replacement and input the same value after the replacement. 2 Feed Distance (1:1) [Purpose of Feed Distance (1:1)] The lengths between actual original image and scan image may become different each other if you replace the Feed Roller of the Scanner Unit. Then “Feed Distance” calculates the best compensation (motor speed) automatically so that both images should become as long as each other. (1) Drive Roller 1 (2) Drive Roller 2 Also you need to check whether the Feed Distance is proper after replacing the following parts. 4.) (1) CIS (2) Data Controller Board NOTE Feeding Distance adjustment should be performed with Scanner Adjustment Chart (P/N: Z058501590).8. [Necessary situation] Feed Distance is required when. This is caused by the mechanical play that each Feed Roller has. 12. Actual original image Scan image “Feed Distance” is the solution for this phenomenon. 8-197 K116sm8e9 .

8mm Scanner Adjustment Chart a a b b c 800 c 1000 c 1100 c 1150 d 800 d 1000 d 1100 d 1150 c 800 d 800 Measure between these 2 points. and between “b point” and “d point” on the far right area. 8-198 K116sm8e9 . 2. You can select any one. Measure between these 2 points.0 Cable.7mm” Between “b point” and “d point (800)” is 799. 3. Measure the actual distance between “a point” and “c point” on the far left area of Scanner Adjustment Chart. NOTE There are some number of “c point X” and “d point X” on the chart. but better adjustment can be expected if you measure a longer distance. Let’s suppose that each distance is as follows. Between “a point” and “c point (800)” is “799.[Operation] 1. Start KIP Scanner Utility. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.

4. b) Add the following text to the end of the target path. a) Open the properties panel for a KIP Scanner Utility shortcut. follow the instruction below. Adjust Feed Distance Dialog is indicated. 8-199 K116sm8e9 . Select [Adjust Feed Distance] from [Adjust]. “(one byte space)/Maintenance” (2) Write down the current setting value that will be displayed with [Current Value]. NOTE (1) If [Automatic Adjustment] does not appear.

) 8-200 K116sm8e9 . At first. Set Scanner Adjustment Chart to the scanner unit. and then click [Scan].5. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated. Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. Actual distance between “a” and “b” 6. which you have measured at the former step “1”. input the actual distance between “a point” and “c point” in [Actual Distance]. 7. (You do not have to change any setting this time.

Indicate the enlarged image of “a point” on the screen. 8-201 K116sm8e9 . Scan image of the chart Reference You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of KIP Scanner Utility. which was the measuring point at the former step “1”.8. 9. Press the F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image.

A red cursor appears on the screen. Click the mouse once at the measuring point. Click on the measuring point “a”. Click the input window of [Theoretical Distance]. 8-202 K116sm8e9 . 11.10.

Click on the measuring point “c”. Similarly indicate the enlarged image of “c point” and click the mouse at the measuring point. 13. 8-203 K116sm8e9 . This value means the distance between “a point” and “b point” of the resulting scan image.12. The program automatically calculates the best compensation value considering the difference of “Actual Distance” and “Theoretical Distance”. The calculated compensation value (motor speed) is indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value]. Click [Calculate]. 14. Some value is indicated in [Theoretical Distance] according to 2 measuring points you specified at both steps “9” and “10”.

Center of a-b points a b c 800 c 1000 d 800 d 1000 d 1100 d 1150 Center of c-d points c 1100 c 1150 Measure between these 2 points. It is necessary to check the balance of original feeding between left and right after validating the new setting.2%” means the difference of indicated values is within +/-20. and the calculated Feed Adjustment Value is validated.2%. Click [Set]. 16. do as follows.) Please click [Close] without clicking [Set]. 8-204 K116sm8e9 .15. If the difference of the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left and right is larger than 0. 17. (Left side means “a-c points” side. c) Click [Set] to validate the Value indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value]. You do not have to do anymore thing if the difference between left and right is within 0.) Repeat the former steps from “3” to “12” also for the right side (between “b point” and “d point”). and compare the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left (a-c points) and right (b-d points). (“within 0. and right side means “b-d points” side.2%. a) Measure the actual distance between the center of a-b points and that of c-d points on the chart. b) Repeat the former steps from “3” to “12” for the center area.

CIS (Contact Image Sensor). there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks. And it is also possible to remove the duplication of image by horizontal positioning process (X overlap). As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows. 4. (1) CIS (2) Data Controller Board NOTE (1) Position adjustment should be performed with Stitch Adjustment Chart (P/N: Z168300580). (2) Position adjustment should be performed with “KIP Scanner Utility 1. 3 Position (stitching) [Purpose of Position (stitching)] The scanner part of KIP 3100 reads the image of original with 5 . Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. [Necessary situation] Position is required when. Gap of CIS position Overlaps of reading area Vertical gap of image Duplications of image “Position” is the solution for these kinds of phenomenon.8. 12.12 (or later)”. It is possible remove the vertical gap of image by vertical positioning process (Y offset). • After replacing. As a result there occurs the duplication of image between neighboring Image Block (same image is commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks). 8-205 K116sm8e9 .

3. Select [Automatic Adjustment] from [Adjust]. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2. 2.0 Cable. NOTE If [Automatic Adjustment] does not appear. Start KIP Scanner Utility. b) Add the following text to the end of the target path. follow the instruction below. Scanner Adjustment Dialog is indicated. a) Open the properties panel for KIP Scanner Utility shortcut.[Operation] 1. “(one byte space)/Maintenance” 8-206 K116sm8e9 .

Continue to the next step for Position adjustment for the leading edge of scan images. 8-207 K116sm8e9 . 6. Stitch Adjustment Chart NOTE An incorrect feeding of Stitch Adjustment Chart may result in an error. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner noting the set direction and press [OK].4. the following window will be displayed. After completing the scan. NOTE Position adjustment for the leading edge is always required after Automatic Adjustment. Position adjustment for the border of the image blocks is completed. Press [Close]. Position Stitch Adjustment Chart with the center of Original Table and avoid skewing. 5.

Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner again and press [Scan].7. Select [Adjust Position] from [Adjust]. 8. Adjust Position Dialog is indicated. 8-208 K116sm8e9 .

Scan image of the chart 8-209 K116sm8e9 . The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of KIP Scanner Utility. (You do not have to change any setting this time.9.) 10. Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.

Leading edge of image gap (band) Leading edge of chart 8-210 K116sm8e9 . Enlarge the top center area by right dragging. This band area will be removed after the completion of Position adjustment for the leading edge. Reference There is a gap between the leading edge of the scan image and the leading edge of the chart at this time.11.

Click “Origin” entry field.12. A red cross cursor appears on the scan image. 8-211 K116sm8e9 .

13. Top center NOTE If you make unintended clicks on the image. delete the value to empty the field and retry the operation. 8-212 K116sm8e9 . Click once on the top center of the chart in the scan image. A value appears in the field.

Press [OK].14. Press [Check] then [Set]. 8-213 K116sm8e9 . A dialog appears to prompt confirmation of the result. 15.

Confirm the result of the adjustment. 8-214 K116sm8e9 . Position adjustment for the leading edge is completed. Make a rescan of Stitch Adjustment Chart. No gap (band area) NOTE If the rescan image still has a gap. gap (band) 17. If the gap disappears. The entire Position adjustment is completed. go back to step 11 to remove it completely. Start Adjust Position again.16.

Select [Update Firmware] under [Scanner].8. Click [Browse]. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware It is possible to install a new Firmware to the KIP 3100 with KIP Scanner Utility. 8-215 K116sm8e9 . 1. 12. 2. Firmware Download Utility is displayed.

Select the Firmware component on the hard drive (or another drive). 6.x”. Doing so may result in malfunction of the scanner. NOTE (1) A firmware file for KIP 3100 scanner unit should be named “k116_***. Confirm that the file name you will install is displayed. Click [Start]. A dialog is displayed. which request you to turn off the KIP 3100. (2) Do not send any other file. (The name of the firmware file or the CRC value may vary as the picture below is an example) name of firmware file 5. Click [Open]. Click [Exit] finally. Turn off the machine. 4. 8-216 K116sm8e9 .3.

2 2 2 8-217 K116sm8eA . 1. Pull up Lever 2 (1) to open Engine Unit.8. please turn off KIP 3100. 1 2. 13 Firmware Update (PW11620) Data Controller Board Assy (PW11620) contains a flash type memory to store the firmware for Engine Unit. Before operation. It is possible to send and apply a new firmware by using an exclusive tool with a Windows PC. Remove 6 screws (2).

3 4. 8 8-218 K116sm8eA . Remove Cover 5 (3). Remove 5 screws (4) to remove Cover 10 (5). 6 7 6. Connect RS Signal Cable to the connector (6) on PW11620 PCB (7). Connect the other end of RS Signal Cable (8) to any available COM port on your PC.3. 4 5 4 5.

7. Flash Writing Tool screen is displayed.2 (9: DSW3. Set DIP switch No. be sure to turn off KIP 3100. switch 1: ON switch 2: OFF switch 1: ON switch 2: ON 9 Default Download mode NOTE Before switching. Run “WriteFlash. 8. 8-219 K116sm8eA .exe”. right) to ON.

8-220 K116sm8eA . Select a COM port to be used for the communication in COM drop-down box.9. Select “38400” in bps drop-down box. Choose “2398F” in CPU TYPE drop-down box. 10. 11.

Program Size and Checksum will be displayed. Press [FILE] to locate a firmware file and open it. 14. 13. Press [DOWNLOAD] to start the process. Turn on KIP 3100.12. (program size / checksum may differ from the actual firmware information) 8-221 K116sm8eA .

Retry the operation to overwrite the previous file. the writing process will end abnormally. Replace the cable. Use any unoccupied port. See step 8 and later. Cover 2 and Cover 3 in the original position.15.2 (9: DSW3. Reception Error (2) If an unexpected communication failure occurs during the process. NOTE (1) Update may be failed if any of the following messages appear. switch 1: ON switch 2: ON switch 1: ON switch 2: OFF 9 Download mode 18. Select lower speed. When “Writing success” dialog is displayed. 17. press [OK]. Turn off KIP 3100. Select the port been connecting. right) to OFF. 16. Default 8-222 K116sm8eA . Return Cover 10. Take necessary measures and retry the operation. Set DIP switch No. Message COM Port Open Error Cause Selected port is being used by an application Selected port does not exist RS Signal Cable is not connected to selected port Selected port does not support a given communication speed RS Signal Cable failure Measure Stop the application. Remove RS Signal Cable.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful